WO2013014864A1 - Control device, transfer device, recording medium, and content encoding format determination method - Google Patents

Control device, transfer device, recording medium, and content encoding format determination method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2013014864A1
WO2013014864A1 PCT/JP2012/004308 JP2012004308W WO2013014864A1 WO 2013014864 A1 WO2013014864 A1 WO 2013014864A1 JP 2012004308 W JP2012004308 W JP 2012004308W WO 2013014864 A1 WO2013014864 A1 WO 2013014864A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
unit
encoding format
transfer
content
recording
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2012/004308
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
路子 田中
Original Assignee
パナソニック株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by パナソニック株式会社 filed Critical パナソニック株式会社
Publication of WO2013014864A1 publication Critical patent/WO2013014864A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N5/00Details of television systems
    • H04N5/76Television signal recording
    • H04N5/765Interface circuits between an apparatus for recording and another apparatus
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/41Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
    • H04N21/4104Peripherals receiving signals from specially adapted client devices
    • H04N21/4126The peripheral being portable, e.g. PDAs or mobile phones
    • H04N21/41265The peripheral being portable, e.g. PDAs or mobile phones having a remote control device for bidirectional communication between the remote control device and client device
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/41Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
    • H04N21/4104Peripherals receiving signals from specially adapted client devices
    • H04N21/4122Peripherals receiving signals from specially adapted client devices additional display device, e.g. video projector
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/41Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
    • H04N21/418External card to be used in combination with the client device, e.g. for conditional access
    • H04N21/4184External card to be used in combination with the client device, e.g. for conditional access providing storage capabilities, e.g. memory stick
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/41Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
    • H04N21/426Internal components of the client ; Characteristics thereof
    • H04N21/42646Internal components of the client ; Characteristics thereof for reading from or writing on a non-volatile solid state storage medium, e.g. DVD, CD-ROM
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/43Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
    • H04N21/433Content storage operation, e.g. storage operation in response to a pause request, caching operations
    • H04N21/4334Recording operations
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/43Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
    • H04N21/44Processing of video elementary streams, e.g. splicing a video clip retrieved from local storage with an incoming video stream, rendering scenes according to MPEG-4 scene graphs
    • H04N21/4402Processing of video elementary streams, e.g. splicing a video clip retrieved from local storage with an incoming video stream, rendering scenes according to MPEG-4 scene graphs involving reformatting operations of video signals for household redistribution, storage or real-time display
    • H04N21/440218Processing of video elementary streams, e.g. splicing a video clip retrieved from local storage with an incoming video stream, rendering scenes according to MPEG-4 scene graphs involving reformatting operations of video signals for household redistribution, storage or real-time display by transcoding between formats or standards, e.g. from MPEG-2 to MPEG-4
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/45Management operations performed by the client for facilitating the reception of or the interaction with the content or administrating data related to the end-user or to the client device itself, e.g. learning user preferences for recommending movies, resolving scheduling conflicts
    • H04N21/466Learning process for intelligent management, e.g. learning user preferences for recommending movies
    • H04N21/4667Processing of monitored end-user data, e.g. trend analysis based on the log file of viewer selections
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N5/00Details of television systems
    • H04N5/76Television signal recording
    • H04N5/765Interface circuits between an apparatus for recording and another apparatus
    • H04N5/775Interface circuits between an apparatus for recording and another apparatus between a recording apparatus and a television receiver
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N9/00Details of colour television systems
    • H04N9/79Processing of colour television signals in connection with recording
    • H04N9/7921Processing of colour television signals in connection with recording for more than one processing mode
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N9/00Details of colour television systems
    • H04N9/79Processing of colour television signals in connection with recording
    • H04N9/80Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback
    • H04N9/804Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback involving pulse code modulation of the colour picture signal components
    • H04N9/8042Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback involving pulse code modulation of the colour picture signal components involving data reduction

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a content recording / playback technology, and more particularly, to a technology for transferring content from a recording device to a playback device.
  • a television program recorded by a hard disk recorder can be displayed on any of displays placed in different rooms such as a living room, a kitchen, and a bedroom.
  • the recorded program can be viewed outside the home by mobile devices such as portable video players, mobile phones, and tablet computers.
  • music downloaded from the Internet by a personal computer can be listened to outside the home by a portable audio player, a mobile phone, and a car navigation system.
  • photographs taken with a digital still camera can be displayed on a display or printed by a printer.
  • the recording device records content on a built-in or external storage device such as an HDD or a removable recording medium such as a removable memory card. Therefore, content transfer from the recording device to the playback device is realized by connecting the storage device to the playback device by wire or wirelessly, or by moving a portable recording medium from the recording device to the playback device. Further, a high-functional mobile device typified by a smartphone may be used for transferring content from a recording device to a playback device. That is, the content is once transferred from the recording device to the mobile device, and then transferred from the mobile device to the playback device.
  • the type of encoding format that can be decoded by a certain playback device is determined by the power source type, memory capacity, screen size, manufacturing cost, and the like of the playback device. Therefore, in general, the decodable encoding format differs depending on the model of the playback apparatus.
  • video encoding formats are MPEG2, MPEG4, H.264, and so on. It is defined by parameters such as algorithms such as H.264, profile, level, and mode. These parameters vary depending on the processing capability of the playback device, such as resolution, bit rate, and frame rate.
  • the audio encoding format is defined by algorithms such as MPEG2, AAC, MPEG4, AAC, MP3, etc., parameters such as bit rate and sampling frequency.
  • the encoding format of the content must be set so that the content can be decoded by a predetermined playback device.
  • the detailed setting of the encoding format is generally complicated, it is not preferable that the user manually set the encoding format.
  • Patent Documents 1 and 2 are known as techniques for causing a recording apparatus to automatically set the encoding format of content to be recorded.
  • parameter information that defines an encoding format that can be decoded by a predetermined playback device is recorded in advance on a portable recording medium in which content to be recorded is to be stored.
  • the recording device first reads the parameter information from the portable recording medium.
  • the recording device determines the encoding format of the content based on the parameter information, encodes the content in the encoding format, and records the encoded content on the portable recording medium.
  • the encoding format of the content to be recorded is automatically set to be decodable by a predetermined playback device.
  • the recording device In order to make the content reproducible by different types of playback devices, the recording device must encode the content in each of the encoding formats that can be decoded by those playback devices. Therefore, in general, the amount of data to be recorded increases as the number of playback device models increases.
  • a portable recording medium or a mobile device When a portable recording medium or a mobile device is used for transferring content from the recording device to each playback device, their storage capacity is generally smaller than the capacity of the storage device built in the recording device.
  • the data amount of the encoded content may exceed the free capacity of the portable recording medium or the storage device in the mobile device. In that case, the content cannot be recorded in a form reproducible by all of these playback devices, so the types of content encoding formats must be limited.
  • it is not obvious to those skilled in the art how it would be appropriate to have the recording device perform such a restriction.
  • An object of the present invention is to solve the above-described problems, and in particular, when the free capacity of a storage device used for transferring content from a recording device to a playback device is insufficient, the content encoding format is appropriately set. It is to provide a control device that can be selected.
  • the control device is used when the recording device records the content in the storage device so that at least one of the plurality of playback devices can reproduce the desired content from the storage device.
  • the control device includes a monitoring unit, an encoding format management unit, a history management unit, and a determination unit.
  • the monitoring unit monitors the usage status of the storage device.
  • the encoding format management unit manages information indicating an encoding format that can be decoded by each of the plurality of playback devices.
  • the history management unit manages a history of operations in which each of the plurality of reproducing devices reproduces content from the storage device or establishes connection with the storage device.
  • the determining unit selects one or more encoding formats from among the encoding formats decodable by the plurality of reproducing devices based on the usage status of the storage device and the history, and selects any one of the plurality of reproducing devices from the storage device. In order of the high possibility of being used for the transfer of the content to the network, the entire data obtained by encoding the desired content in the one or more encoding formats is selected to be recorded in the storage device. The determining unit further determines the one or more encoding formats as encoding formats to be used when the recording device records desired content in the storage device.
  • the control device transfers one or more encoding formats from among the encoding formats decodable by each of a plurality of playback devices to transfer content from the storage device to any playback device. Select in descending order of likelihood of use. Therefore, content in an encoded format that is highly likely to be reproduced is preferentially recorded in the storage device. As described above, the control device can appropriately select the content encoding format when the free space of the storage device is insufficient.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing a video content recording / playback system according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention
  • FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the recording apparatus illustrated in FIG. 1.
  • storage part of the transfer apparatus shown by FIG. (B) is a table
  • (C) is a table
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the list of the content displayed by the display part of the reproducing
  • step S ⁇ b> 1002 shown in FIG. 10 is a flowchart of step S ⁇ b> 1002 shown in FIG. 10, that is, a selection process of a playback device as a transfer destination by the transfer device shown in FIG.
  • FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the usage condition of the memory
  • FIG. (B) is a schematic diagram showing data obtained by encoding “drama 2” and “sport 2” in an encoding format decodable by the playback device AD shown in FIG.
  • (C) is a schematic diagram showing the usage status of the storage unit of the transfer device after the content shown in (b) is transferred from the recording device shown in FIG. 1 to the transfer device.
  • FIG. D is a schematic diagram showing a list of contents displayed on the screen of the playback apparatus AD in accordance with the list of contents received from the transfer apparatus.
  • A is a schematic diagram which shows another example of the usage condition of the memory
  • B) is a schematic diagram showing a usage state of the storage unit after deleting encoded data that can be decoded only by a playback device having no playback history from the storage unit.
  • (C) is a schematic diagram showing data obtained by encoding “drama 2” and “sport 2” in an encoding format that can be decoded by each of the playback devices A and C.
  • FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the usage status of the storage unit of the transfer device after the content shown in FIG. 13C is transferred from the recording device shown in FIG. 1 to the transfer device. It is.
  • (B) is a schematic diagram showing a list of contents displayed on the screens of the playback apparatuses A and C in accordance with the list of contents received from the transfer apparatus.
  • (C) is a schematic diagram showing a list of contents displayed on the screen of playback apparatus B according to the list of contents received from the transfer apparatus.
  • (D) is a schematic diagram showing a list of contents displayed on the screen of the playback apparatus D in accordance with the list of contents received from the transfer apparatus.
  • It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the transfer apparatus by Embodiment 2 of this invention.
  • It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the encoding format selection part shown by FIG.
  • 18 is a flowchart of processing in which the transfer time determination unit shown in FIG. 17 determines whether it is appropriate for the transfer device shown in FIG. 16 to transfer content from the recording device at the present time.
  • FIG. 22 is a flowchart of content recording / playback processing by the system shown in FIG. 21;
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing a video content recording / playback system according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
  • this system includes a recording device 110, a transfer device 120, a playback device A131, a playback device B132, a playback device C133, and a playback device D134.
  • the recording device 110 is a device capable of recording video content in a built-in storage unit, and is installed in the user's home 101.
  • the recording device 110 is, for example, a hard disk recorder, and may be an optical disk recorder, a set top box, or a personal computer.
  • the transfer device 120 is a mobile device capable of wired or wireless communication with the recording device 110 and each of the playback devices 131-134, and is used to transfer video content from the recording device 110 to each of the playback devices 131-134.
  • the arrows shown in FIG. 1 represent the movement of video content accompanying the transfer.
  • the transfer device 120 is, for example, a smartphone, and may be a mobile phone, a personal digital assistant (PDA), a portable video player, or a tablet computer.
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • Each of the playback devices A131 to D134 is a device that can play back the video represented by the video content on the screen.
  • the playback device A131 is a small flat panel display, and is installed in the kitchen of the user's home 101.
  • the playback device B132 is a large flat panel display, and is installed in the living room of the user's home 101.
  • the playback device C133 is a car navigation system and is installed in a user-owned automobile.
  • the playback device D134 is a large flat panel display, and is installed in a house different from the user's home 101, for example, the user's home 102.
  • the playback device may be an optical disc player, a mobile phone, a smartphone, a PDA, a portable video player, a set-top box, or a personal computer.
  • the recording device 110 receives the recording reservation information from the transfer device 120 or generates the recording reservation information in accordance with a user instruction.
  • the recording reservation information is information for specifying a program to be reserved for recording. For example, the broadcast station name, the program name, the recording start time, the recording time, the recording image quality, and the recording reservation information are generated. Contains device identification information.
  • the recording device 110 receives the digital broadcast wave using the built-in tuner and the antenna 111 of the home 101, and extracts and stores the content of the program to be reserved for recording from the broadcast wave. To record. Thereafter, the recording device 110 transmits a recording completion notification to the transfer device 120 when communication with the transfer device 120 becomes possible.
  • the notification indicates the identification information of the recorded content, the encoding format, and the data amount.
  • a transfer request is transmitted from the transfer device 120 to the recording device 110.
  • the transfer request indicates information for identifying content to be transferred from the recording device 110 to the transfer device 120, and an encoding format to be used in the transfer.
  • the recording device 110 identifies the content to be transferred from the transfer request, encodes the content in the encoding format indicated by the transfer request, and transmits the encoded content to the transfer device 120.
  • the transfer request indicates a plurality of encoding formats
  • the recording apparatus 110 encodes the content to be transferred in each encoding format.
  • the transfer device 120 first receives recording reservation information and a list of decodable encoding formats from each of the playback devices 131-134. Next, the transfer device 120 transmits the recording reservation information to the recording device 110. After the scheduled recording is performed by the recording device 110, the transfer device 120 receives a recording completion notification from the recording device 110. In response to the notification, the transfer device 120 selects one or more encoding formats from among the encoding formats that can be decoded by the reproducing devices A131 to D134, and sets them in the transfer request.
  • the encoding format indicated by the transfer request represents an encoding format to be used when the recording device 110 transfers the content to be transferred to the transfer device 120.
  • the usage status of the storage unit built in the transfer device 120, the playback history of each playback device 131-134, and the connection history between the transfer device 120 and each playback device 131-134 are displayed. Referenced.
  • the transfer request is set in order from the most frequently used encoding format used for transferring content from the transfer device 120 to any one of the playback devices A131 to D134.
  • the encoding format set in the transfer request is such that the entire data obtained by encoding the content to be transferred in the encoding format indicated by the transfer request is recorded in the storage unit of the transfer device 120. The number is limited.
  • the transfer device 120 transmits a transfer request to the recording device 110, receives the content to be transferred from the recording device 110 as a reply, and stores it in the storage unit. Thereafter, when the transfer device 120 becomes communicable with any of the playback devices A131 to D134, the transfer device 120 generates a list of contents and transmits the content list to the playback device.
  • the list of contents indicates identification information of contents encoded in an encoding format that can be decoded by a reproduction apparatus as a transmission destination among contents stored in the storage unit of the transfer apparatus 120.
  • the transfer device 120 transfers the content indicated by the playback request from the storage unit to the playback device. Thereafter, the transfer device 120 updates the playback history and connection history related to the transfer destination playback device.
  • each playback device 131-134 When each playback device 131-134 has a built-in tuner, it receives a digital broadcast wave using the tuner and an external antenna, and creates an electronic program guide (EPG) based on information represented by the broadcast wave. Generate. In addition, each playback device 131-134 may acquire information necessary for generating an EPG from the Internet or the transfer device 120. Each playback device 131-134 further displays an EPG on the screen in accordance with a user's instruction, and generates recording reservation information based on information from the user. Thereafter, each of the playback devices 131 to 134 transmits the recording reservation information to the transfer device 120 together with a list of encoding formats that can be decoded by the playback device when communication with the transfer device 120 becomes possible.
  • EPG electronic program guide
  • each playback device 131-134 receives a list of contents from the transfer device 120 and displays it on the screen. Subsequently, when the content to be played is designated by the user, each playback device 131-134 sets the identification information of the content in the playback request and transmits the playback request to the transfer device 120. Each playback device 131-134 then plays back the content transferred from the transfer device 120 in response to the playback request.
  • the reproduction process may be performed by a streaming method or a download method.
  • the transfer device 120 is used to transfer content from the recording device 110 to each of the playback devices 131-134.
  • the content recorded by the recording device 110 can be reproduced by the reproducing devices A131 to D134 that cannot be directly connected to the recording device 110.
  • the transfer device 120 selects an encoding format to be used when the recording device 110 transfers desired content to the transfer device 120 from among the encoding formats that can be decoded by the playback devices A131 to D134.
  • the number of encoding formats to be selected is limited such that the entire data obtained by encoding the desired content in these encoding formats is recorded in the storage unit of the transfer device 120.
  • the transfer device 120 selects the encoding format in descending order of frequency used for transferring content from the transfer device 120 to any one of the playback devices A131 to D134. The more frequently encoded content is more likely to be played back by one of the playback devices A131-D134. Accordingly, the storage unit of the transfer device 120 preferentially records data obtained by encoding desired content in an encoding format that is highly likely to be reproduced. As described above, the transfer device 120 can appropriately select the content encoding format when the free space of the storage unit is insufficient.
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the recording apparatus 110 shown in FIG.
  • a recording apparatus 110 includes a digital tuner 201, a control unit 202, an output unit 203, a bus interface (I / F) 204, an operation unit 205, an input / output (I / O) port 206, an optical disc.
  • a drive 207, a storage unit 208, and a communication unit 209 are provided.
  • the digital tuner 201 is connected to an external antenna 111, receives a digital broadcast wave through the antenna 111, and demodulates desired information from the broadcast wave.
  • the control unit 202 includes a CPU, a RAM, and a nonvolatile memory.
  • the control unit 202 functions by the CPU executing the firmware stored in the nonvolatile memory, and controls other elements of the recording device 110.
  • the control unit 202 decodes video content from the information demodulated by the digital tuner 201.
  • the output unit 203 is connected to an external display device DSP via an HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) cable.
  • the output unit 203 converts the video content decoded by the control unit 202 into an HDMI video signal / audio signal, and sends it to the display device DSP through the HDMI cable. Thereby, the video represented by the video content is reproduced on the screen of the display device DSP.
  • the I / F 204 relays data between the control unit 202 and the other elements 205-209.
  • the operation unit 205 receives a radio signal from an external remote controller RMC, or receives a signal indicating that the button has been pressed from a button provided on the front panel of the recording apparatus 110.
  • the operation unit 205 further decodes the function indicated by these signals and instructs the control unit 202 to execute the function.
  • the I / O port 206 is a connector for a memory device MCD such as a memory card and a USB (Universal Serial Bus) memory, and relays data between the memory device MCD and the I / F 204.
  • the optical disc drive 207 irradiates the surface of an optical disc DSC such as a DVD or a Blu-ray (registered trademark) disc with laser light, and decodes data recorded on the optical disc DSC from the change in the amount of reflected light to the I / F 204. hand over.
  • the storage unit 208 is a mass storage device such as an HDD or a semiconductor memory device, and mainly stores the video content decoded by the control unit 202 and the video content read from the optical disc DSC by the optical disc drive 207. To do.
  • the communication unit 209 is connected to the transfer device 120 and the Internet by a wired method such as USB or Ethernet (registered trademark) or a wireless method such as WiFi (registered trademark), Bluetooth (registered trademark), or NFC (Near Field Communication). Communication is possible.
  • a wired method such as USB or Ethernet (registered trademark) or a wireless method such as WiFi (registered trademark), Bluetooth (registered trademark), or NFC (Near Field Communication). Communication is possible.
  • the control unit 202 operates as various functional units depending on the type of firmware executed by the CPU. These functional units include a recording unit 221, a connection management unit 222, a transfer unit 223, and an encoding unit 224.
  • the recording unit 221 receives recording reservation information from the transfer device 120 through the communication unit 209. In addition, the recording unit 221 generates an EPG based on the information demodulated by the digital tuner 201 or the information acquired from the Internet through the communication unit 209, and displays it on the display device DSP through the output unit 203 for the user. Encourage recording reservation. In this case, the recording unit 221 receives a user instruction through the operation unit 205, and generates recording reservation information according to the instruction. According to the recording reservation information thus obtained, the recording unit 221 performs reserved recording.
  • the recording unit 221 extracts the content of the program indicated by the recording reservation information from the information demodulated by the digital tuner 201 in the time zone indicated by the recording reservation information, and stores it in the storage unit 208. .
  • the recording unit 221 notifies the transfer unit 223 of the identification information of the transfer device 120 together with the recording reservation information.
  • the recording unit 221 when the recording unit 221 generates the recording reservation information itself, it notifies the transfer unit 223 of the identification information of the default transfer device together with the recording reservation information.
  • the recording unit 221 sets the recorded content identification information and the data amount in the recording completion notification, and transmits the notification to the transfer unit 223.
  • connection management unit 222 When the communication unit 209 establishes a connection with an external device such as the transfer device 120, the connection management unit 222 reads connection management information related to the connection destination device from the storage unit 208 and causes the communication unit 209 to use it. .
  • the connection management information includes identification information of a connection destination device, a connection history between the communication unit 209 and the device, a connection method, and a key for encrypting communication data. Further, each time the communication unit 209 disconnects the connection with an external device, the connection management unit 222 receives information about the connection from the communication unit 209 and updates the connection management information using the information.
  • the transfer unit 223 stores in the storage unit 208 a pair of the recording reservation information notified from the recording unit 221 and the identification information of the transfer device. Further, when receiving a recording completion notification from the recording unit 221, the transfer unit 223 searches the storage unit 208 for recording reservation information including content identification information indicated by the notification, and transfers the transfer device associated with the recording reservation information Identify the identification information. Thereafter, the transfer unit 223 causes the connection management unit 222 to use the identification information of the transfer device to monitor whether the communication unit 209 has established a connection with the transfer device. When establishment of the connection is detected by the connection management unit 222, the transfer unit 223 transmits a recording completion notification to the transfer device and waits for a transfer request from the transfer device.
  • the transfer unit 223 searches the storage unit 208 for the content indicated by the transfer request, and determines whether the encoding format of the content matches the encoding format indicated by the transfer request. To do. If both encoding formats match, the transfer unit 223 transfers the content as it is from the storage unit 208 to the transfer device. On the other hand, if the two encoding formats do not match, the transfer unit 223 causes the encoding unit 224 to convert the encoding format of the content into the encoding format indicated by the transfer request, and then transfers the content to the transfer device. Forward.
  • the encoding unit 224 converts the content encoding format stored in the storage unit 208 into a desired encoding format. The conversion is realized by re-encoding the content in a desired encoding format. In addition, the encoding unit 224 may acquire content encoded in a desired encoding format from the Internet or the optical disc DSC.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the transfer device 120 shown in FIG.
  • the transfer device 120 includes a control unit 301, an I / F 302, an operation unit 303, an I / O port 304, a storage unit 305, and a communication unit 306.
  • the control unit 301 includes a CPU, a RAM, and a nonvolatile memory. The control unit 301 functions when the CPU executes firmware stored in the nonvolatile memory, and controls other elements of the transfer device 120.
  • control unit 301 uses the playback device A131-D134 based on the usage status of the storage unit 305, the playback history of each playback device 131-134, and the connection history between the communication unit 209 and each playback device 131-134. To select one or more encoding formats from among the encoding formats that can be decoded.
  • the I / F 302 relays data between the control unit 301 and the other elements 303-306.
  • the operation unit 303 receives a signal indicating pressing and touching by a user's finger from buttons and a touch panel provided on the housing of the transfer device 120. The operation unit 303 further decodes the functions indicated by these signals and instructs the control unit 301 to execute the functions.
  • the I / O port 304 is a connector for a memory device MCD such as a memory card and a USB memory, and relays data between the memory device MCD and the I / F 302.
  • the storage unit 305 is a mass storage device such as an HDD or a semiconductor memory device, and stores video content to be transferred from the recording device 110 to each of the playback devices 131-134.
  • the communication unit 306 can communicate with the recording device 110, the playback device A131-D134, and the Internet by a wired method such as USB or Ethernet, or a wireless method such as WiFi, Bluetooth, or NFC.
  • the control unit 301 operates as various functional units depending on the type of firmware executed by the CPU. These functional units include a connection management unit 311, a transfer unit 312, and an encoding format selection unit 313.
  • connection management unit 311 When the communication unit 306 establishes a connection with an external device such as the recording device 110, the connection management unit 311 reads connection management information regarding the connection destination device from the storage unit 305 and causes the communication unit 306 to use the connection management information. . Further, every time the communication unit 306 disconnects from an external device, the connection management unit 311 receives information related to the connection from the communication unit 306 and updates the connection management information using the information. The connection management unit 311 also uses the connection management information to check the history of the recording device 110 and the playback devices A131 to D134 from the latest connection to the connection a certain number of times ago. Calculate the number of connection operations per month or year. The number of times is called connection frequency. The connection frequency is stored in the storage unit 305 as part of the connection management information.
  • the transfer unit 312 receives a notification of establishment from the connection management unit 311 each time the communication unit 306 establishes a connection with each playback device 131-134. In response to the notification, the transfer unit 312 requests recording reservation information and a list of encoding formats that can be decoded from the connected playback device. The transfer unit 312 further receives the information from the playback device and passes the information to the encoding format selection unit 313.
  • the transfer unit 312 acquires the recording reservation information from the encoding format selection unit 313 and transmits the recording reservation information to the recording device 110. To do. Subsequently, when a recording completion notification is received from the recording device 110, the transfer unit 312 requests the encoding format selection unit 313 to select an encoding format in response to the notification. The encoding format to be selected should be used when the recording device 110 transfers the content indicated by the recording completion notification to the storage unit 305. The transfer unit 312 also reads the encoded format and data amount of the recorded content from the recording completion notification and passes them to the encoding format selection unit 313 to be used for selecting the encoding format.
  • the transfer unit 312 After the encoding format is selected by the encoding format selection unit 313, the transfer unit 312 sets the encoding format to a transfer request and transmits the transfer request to the recording device 110. Subsequently, the transfer unit 312 receives the desired content from the recording device 110 as a reply to the transfer request and stores it in the storage unit 305.
  • the transfer unit 312 encodes the encoding format management information related to the playback device to which it is connected. Obtained from the format selection unit 313.
  • the encoding format management information is information in which a list of encoding formats that can be decoded by the playback device is associated with the identification information of each playback device 131-134. Further, the transfer unit 312 generates a list of contents based on the encoding format management information and transmits it to the playback device.
  • the list of contents indicates identification information of contents encoded in an encoding format that can be decoded by the playback apparatus, among the contents stored in the storage unit 305. Further, when a playback request is returned from the playback device, the transfer unit 312 transfers the content indicated by the playback request from the storage unit 305 to the playback device. After the end of the transfer operation, the transfer unit 312 notifies the encoding format selection unit 313 of information related to the transfer operation, such as content playback time, encoding format, and data amount.
  • the playback management information related to the playback device stored in 305 is updated.
  • the reproduction management information is information in which the reproduction history of each reproduction apparatus A131-D134 that can be connected to the communication unit 306 is associated with the reproduction history of the reproduction apparatus.
  • the reproduction history represents a history of content transfer operations performed by the transfer device 120 on the reproduction device.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 also refers to the reproduction management information to perform a certain number of times before the transfer operation, for example, 10 times before the latest transfer operation performed by the transfer device 120 for each of the reproduction devices 131-134.
  • the history is checked, and the playback frequency of each playback device 131-134 is calculated from the history.
  • the reproduction frequency is expressed as the number of transfer operations per week, January, or year.
  • the reproduction frequency is stored in the storage unit 305 as part of the reproduction management information.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 When receiving the recording reservation information from the transfer unit 312, the encoding format selection unit 313 stores the recording reservation information in the storage unit 305. The encoding format selection unit 313 also reads out desired recording reservation information from the storage unit 305 and passes it to the transfer unit 312 in response to a request from the transfer unit 312. On the other hand, when the encoding format selection unit 313 receives from the transfer unit 312 a list of encoding formats that can be decoded by any of the playback devices, the encoding format management unit 313 manages the encoding format stored in the storage unit 305 based on the list. Update information.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 further refers to the reproduction management information related to the reproduction device, and from the latest transfer operation performed by the transfer device 120 to the reproduction device until a certain number of times before the transfer operation, for example, ten times before. Check the history of. Then, the encoding format selection unit 313 calculates an average amount of data that the playback device reproduces per hour from the history and incorporates it in the encoding format management information.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 monitors the usage status of the storage unit 305, specifically, the area of the storage unit 305 in which data is recorded, that is, the change of the usage area. Further, when the encoding unit selection unit 313 is requested by the transfer unit 312 to select an encoding format, the encoding format selection unit 313 calculates the size of the used area based on the usage status of the storage unit 305 and compares the size with a threshold value. For example, when the capacity of the storage unit 305 is 10 GB, the threshold value is set to 7 GB.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 refers to the connection management information in the storage unit 305 and sets a playback device whose connection frequency with the communication unit 306 is higher than a predetermined value as a content transfer destination.
  • the predetermined value depends on at least how often the connection frequency is likely to be used for reproducing the content. In particular, when the predetermined value is 0, all playback devices that have been connected to the transfer device 120 in the past are set as content transfer destinations.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 acquires the reproduction frequency of each reproduction device 131-134 from the reproduction management information in the storage unit 305.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 selects one or more of the playback devices A131 to D134 as content transfer destinations in descending order of playback frequency. At that time, the number of transfer destination playback devices is limited as follows.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 identifies content recorded by the recording device 110 that has not yet been transferred to the storage unit 305 (hereinafter referred to as unviewed recorded content).
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 predicts the amount of data obtained by encoding the unviewed recorded content in an encoding format that can be decoded by the playback apparatus of the transfer destination. Specifically, the encoding format selection unit 313 reads the recording time of the unviewed recorded content from the recording reservation information, and from the encoding format management information, the transfer destination playback device reproduces the average per hour. The data amount is read, and the product of the recording time and the average data amount is calculated as a predicted value. The encoding format selection unit 313 limits the number of transfer destination playback devices so that the predicted data amount does not exceed the free capacity of the storage unit 305.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 refers to the encoding format management information in the storage unit 305, and identifies an encoding format that can be decoded by the playback apparatus of the content transfer destination as a selection candidate. Further, the encoding format selection unit 313 transfers the content from the transfer device 120 to any one of the playback devices based on the playback frequency and playback history indicated by the playback management information in the storage unit 305. Calculate the frequency of use. After that, the encoding format selection unit 313 selects one or more encoding formats from the selection candidate encoding formats in the order of the above-mentioned frequency.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 first predicts the data amount obtained by encoding the desired content in the selected encoding format. In the prediction process, the content encoding format and the data amount indicated by the recording completion notification are used. Next, the encoding format selection unit 313 limits the number of encoding formats to be selected so that the predicted data amount does not exceed the free capacity of the storage unit 305. When the size of the used area in the storage unit 305 exceeds the threshold, the encoding format selection unit 313 deletes from the storage unit 305 encoded data that can be decoded only by a playback device other than the transfer destination.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 expands the free capacity of the storage unit 305 as much as possible so that desired content can be recorded in the storage unit 305 in as many encoding formats as possible.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 determines the encoding format thus selected as an encoding format to be used when the recording device 110 records desired content on the transfer device 120 and notifies the transfer unit 312 of the encoding format.
  • connection management information in the connection management information, the connection frequency and the connection history are associated with the identification information of the connection target device.
  • the connection history includes the communication unit 306 of the transfer device 120 for each connection target device, the date of the connection operation performed between the present and a predetermined period before, for example, one year ago, and the time that the connection was maintained.
  • the playback device A131 maintains the connection with the communication unit 306 of the transfer device 120 for 10 minutes on February 21, 30 minutes on February 22, and 24 February. Maintain 40 minutes a day.
  • the playback apparatus B132 maintains the connection with the communication unit 306 of the transfer apparatus 120 for 5 minutes on January 5.
  • the connection frequency is calculated by the connection management unit 311 of the transfer device 120 from the history up to a certain number of times before the latest connection, for example, the connection 10 times before.
  • the playback device A 131 performs the average connection from the latest connection with the communication unit 306 of the transfer device 120 to the previous connection 10 times at a frequency of 3 times a week.
  • FIG. 4B is a table showing the data structure of the encoding format management information stored in the storage unit 305 of the transfer device 120.
  • the encoding format management information includes the encoding format and resolution, and the average amount of data per hour in the identification information of each of the playback devices A131 to D134.
  • the format and resolution of the encoding format represent those that can be decoded by the associated playback device.
  • the average data amount per hour represents the average data amount that the associated playback device plays back per hour.
  • the playback device A131 can decode content encoded with MPEG4 and H264 / AVC. Further, the playback device A131 plays back the content encoded in MPEG4 on an average of 500 MB per hour.
  • (C) of FIG. 4 is a table showing a data structure of the reproduction management information stored in the storage unit 305 of the transfer device 120.
  • the reproduction frequency and reproduction history of the reproduction device are associated with the identification information of each of the reproduction devices A131 to D134.
  • the playback history includes items such as date, playback time, encoding format, and data volume.
  • “Date” represents the date when the transfer device 120 transferred the content to the playback devices A 131 to D 134 before a predetermined period from the present, for example, one year ago.
  • “Reproduction time” represents the time when the content transferred to the reproduction devices A131 to D134 was reproduced. If the transfer is a streaming system, the playback time is equal to the transfer time. If the transfer is a download system, the playback time indicates the playback time of the transferred part of the content.
  • the “encoding format” represents the encoding format of the transferred content.
  • “Data amount” represents the data amount of the transferred content. For example, according to FIG.
  • the playback device A131 receives content of 50 minutes playback time on January 5 from the transfer device 120, and receives content of 30 minutes playback time on February 1. Receiving content with a playback time of 20 minutes on the 8th, receiving content with a playback time of 30 minutes on February 15.
  • the playback device B132 has not received any content from the transfer device 120 between now and a predetermined period. Furthermore, the content received by the playback device A131 from the transfer device 120 on January 5 is encoded by MPEG4 720p, and the data amount is 400 MB.
  • the reproduction frequency is calculated from the history up to a certain number of times before the latest transfer operation performed by the transfer device 120 for each of the reproduction devices A131 to D134, for example, up to 10 times before the transfer operation.
  • the playback device A131 receives the content from the transfer device 120 on an average once a week.
  • the encoding format “MPEG4 720p” is used for transferring content from the transfer device 120 to the playback device A131 with an average of three times a month.
  • FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a configuration common to the playback devices 131-134 shown in FIG.
  • the playback device 130 includes a digital tuner 501, a control unit 502, a display unit 503, an I / F 504, an operation unit 505, an I / O port 506, and a communication unit 507.
  • the digital tuner 501 is connected to an antenna ANT external to the playback device 130 or an antenna built in the playback device 130, receives a digital broadcast wave through the antenna ANT, and demodulates desired information from the broadcast wave.
  • the control unit 502 includes a CPU, a RAM, and a nonvolatile memory.
  • the control unit 502 functions when the CPU executes the firmware stored in the nonvolatile memory, and controls other elements of the playback device 130.
  • the control unit 502 decodes video content from the information demodulated by the digital tuner 501 and the data transferred from the transfer device 120.
  • the display unit 503 includes a display panel, and reproduces the video represented by the video content decoded by the control unit 502 on the display panel.
  • the I / F 504 relays data between the control unit 502 and other elements 505-507.
  • the operation unit 505 receives a radio signal from the external remote controller RMC, or receives a signal indicating that the button is pressed from a button provided on the front panel of the playback device 130.
  • the operation unit 505 further decodes the function indicated by these signals and instructs the control unit 502 to execute the function.
  • the I / O port 506 is a connector for a memory device MCD such as a memory card or a USB memory, and relays data between the memory device MCD and the I / F 504.
  • the communication unit 507 can communicate with the transfer device 120 and the Internet by a wired method such as USB or Ethernet, or a wireless method such as WiFi, Bluetooth, or NFC.
  • the control unit 502 operates as various functional units depending on the type of firmware executed by the CPU. These functional units include a playback unit 521, a recording reservation unit 522, and a connection management unit 523.
  • the playback unit 521 decodes the video content demodulated by the digital tuner 501.
  • the playback unit 521 also decodes the video content transferred from the transfer device 120 through the communication unit 507.
  • the playback unit 521 further transmits the decoded video content to the display unit 503, and causes the display unit 503 to play back the video represented by the video content.
  • the playback unit 521 first receives a list of content from the transfer device 120 and displays it on the display unit 503, and allows the user to select the content to be played back. Prompt for specification.
  • the playback unit 521 sets the identification information as a playback request and transmits the playback request to the communication unit 507 to the transfer device 120. Let Subsequently, the playback unit 521 decrypts the content transferred from the transfer device 120 to the communication unit 507 in response to the playback request, and causes the display unit 503 to play back the content.
  • the reproduction process may be performed by a streaming method or a download method.
  • the playback unit 521 holds a list of encoding formats that can be decoded.
  • the playback unit 521 transmits the list to the transfer device 120.
  • the recording reservation unit 522 generates an EPG based on information demodulated by the digital tuner 501 or information acquired from the Internet through the communication unit 507 and displays it on the display unit 503 to prompt the user to make a recording reservation.
  • the recording reservation unit 522 further receives a user instruction through the operation unit 505, and generates recording reservation information according to the instruction.
  • the recording reservation unit 522 further transmits recording reservation information to the transfer device 120 when the communication unit 507 establishes a connection with the transfer device 120.
  • the connection management unit 523 causes the communication unit 507 to use connection management information regarding the connection destination device when the communication unit 507 establishes a connection with an external device such as the transfer device 120. Further, each time the communication unit 507 disconnects the connection with an external device, the connection management unit 523 receives information regarding the connection from the communication unit 507 and updates the connection management information using the information.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a list of contents displayed by the display unit 503 of the playback device 130.
  • the content list includes the content title, the recording date, and the recording time as items.
  • “Content title” indicates a title of content encoded in an encoding format that can be decoded by the playback unit 521 of the playback device 130 among the content stored in the storage unit 305 of the transfer device 120.
  • the user operates the remote controller while viewing this list, for example, moves the cursor to an item related to the program “Drama 2” and presses the enter button.
  • a hatched portion shown in FIG. 6A represents a cursor.
  • the operation unit 505 of the playback device 130 identifies the identification information of the program “Drama 2” based on the signal from the remote controller.
  • the playback unit 521 sets the identification information in the playback request.
  • FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of an EPG displayed by the display unit 503 of the playback device 130.
  • the EPG shown in (b) of FIG. 6 represents a list of broadcast programs from 19:00 to 23:00 on the month and day.
  • the user operates the remote controller while viewing this EPG, for example, moves the cursor to the item indicating the program “Drama 1” that is scheduled to be broadcast from the 20:00 to 21:00, and presses the enter button.
  • a hatched portion shown in FIG. 6B represents a cursor.
  • the operation unit 505 of the playback device 130 specifies identification information of the program “Drama 1” based on a signal from the remote controller.
  • the recording reservation unit 522 searches the EPG for information relating to the program “Drama 1” using the identification information, and generates recording reservation information based on the information.
  • the recording reservation information includes the identification information of the broadcasting station A, the identification information of the program “drama 1”, the recording start time “ ⁇ month ⁇ day 20:00”, the recording time “60 minutes”, the image quality of recording, and the playback device 130. Including identification information.
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart of content recording / playback processing by the system shown in FIG. This process is started when the transfer device 120 is connected to one of the playback devices A131 to D134.
  • step S701 the playback unit 521 of the playback device 130 connected to the transfer device 120 transmits a list of encoding formats that can be decoded to the transfer device 120. Further, the recording reservation unit 522 of the playback device 130 transmits the recording reservation information to the transfer device 120. The transfer device 120 stores the information in the storage unit 305. Here, if the encoding format management information regarding the playback device 130 is already stored in the storage unit 305 of the transfer device 120, the playback unit 521 of the playback device 130 transmits a list of encoding formats that can be decoded again. You don't have to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.
  • step S702 when the communication unit 306 of the transfer device 120 establishes a connection with the recording device 110, the transfer unit 312 of the transfer device 120 transfers the recording reservation information to the recording device 110.
  • the recording unit 221 accepts the recording reservation information and notifies the transfer unit 223 together with the identification information of the transfer device 120.
  • the transfer unit 223 stores the pair of the recording reservation information and the identification information of the transfer device 120 in the storage unit 208. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S703.
  • step S703 the recording unit 221 of the recording apparatus 110 performs reserved recording according to the recording reservation information stored in the storage unit 208.
  • the recording unit 221 transmits a recording completion notification to the transfer unit 223 of the recording device 110.
  • the transfer unit 223 searches the storage unit 208 for recording reservation information including the content identification information indicated by the notification, and identifies the identification information of the transfer device 120 associated with the recording reservation information.
  • the transfer unit 223 further causes the connection management unit 222 to use the identification information to monitor whether the communication unit 209 has established a connection with the transfer device 120.
  • the transfer unit 223 transmits a recording completion notification to the transfer device 120. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S704.
  • step S704 when the transfer unit 312 of the transfer device 120 receives the recording completion notification from the recording device 110, it requests the encoding format selection unit 313 to select the encoding format.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 selects an encoding format according to the request. Details of the selection process will be described later.
  • the transfer unit 312 sets the selected encoding format as a transfer request, and transmits the transfer request to the recording device 110. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S705.
  • step S705 the transfer unit 223 of the recording apparatus 110 searches the storage unit 208 for the content indicated by the transfer request in response to the transfer request, and the encoding format of the content matches the encoding format indicated by the transfer request. Judge whether to do. If both encoding formats match, the transfer unit 223 transfers the content as it is from the storage unit 208 to the transfer device 120. On the other hand, if the two encoding formats do not match, the transfer unit 223 causes the encoding unit 224 to convert the encoding format of the content into the encoding format indicated by the transfer request, and then transfers the content to the transfer device 120. Forward to. The transfer unit 312 of the transfer device 120 receives the content and stores it in the storage unit 305. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S706.
  • step S706 when the communication unit 306 of the transfer device 120 establishes a connection with one of the playback devices A131 to D134, the transfer unit 312 of the transfer device 120 performs the playback based on the identification information of the playback device connected to the transfer device 120. Reference is made to encoding format management information related to the device. Further, the transfer unit 312 generates a list of contents based on the encoding format management information and transmits it to the playback device. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S707.
  • step S707 the playback unit 521 of the playback device 130 receives the content list from the transfer device 120 and displays it on the display unit 503 to prompt the user to specify the content to be played back.
  • the operation unit 505 of the playback device 130 receives an instruction from the user, and specifies identification information of content to be played back according to the instruction.
  • the playback unit 521 of the playback device 130 sets the identification information as a playback request, and causes the communication unit 507 to transmit the playback request to the transfer device 120. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S708.
  • step S708 when the playback request is returned from the playback device 130, the transfer unit 312 of the transfer device 120 transfers the content indicated by the playback request from the storage unit 305 to the playback device 130.
  • the playback unit 521 of the playback device 130 decrypts the content received by the communication unit 507 and causes the display unit 503 to play back the content.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 of the transfer device 120 updates the reproduction management information when the transfer of the content is completed. Thereafter, the process ends.
  • FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the encoding format selection unit 313 of the transfer apparatus 120 shown in FIG.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 includes a monitoring unit 801, a recording reservation management unit 802, a history management unit 803, an encoding format management unit 804, a data amount prediction unit 805, and a determination unit 806.
  • These functional units 801 to 806 operate when a CPU in the control unit 301 executes predetermined firmware.
  • the monitoring unit 801 monitors the usage status of the storage unit 305 of the transfer device 120. Further, in response to the inquiry from the determination unit 806, the monitoring unit 801 calculates the size of the usage area based on the usage status of the storage unit 305, and compares the size with a threshold value. The comparison result is notified to the determination unit 806 as a reply to the inquiry.
  • the recording reservation management unit 802 When the recording reservation management unit 802 receives the recording reservation information from the transfer unit 312 of the transfer device 120, the recording reservation information is stored in the storage unit 305. In response to a request from the transfer unit 312, the recording reservation management unit 802 reads desired recording reservation information from the storage unit 305 and passes it to the transfer unit 312. At that time, the recording reservation management unit 802 updates information for identifying whether or not the recording reservation information has already been transferred to the recording device 110 for each of the recording reservation information stored in the storage unit 305. The recording reservation management unit 802 further stores recording reservation information used when the transfer unit 312 transfers content from the recording device 110 to the storage unit 305 and instructs the recording device 110 to record the content. Search from part 305. Thereby, the recording reservation management unit 802 identifies, for each recording reservation information stored in the storage unit 305, whether or not the content indicated by the recording reservation information has already been transferred from the recording device 110 to the storage unit 305. Manage information.
  • the recording reservation management unit 802 calculates the total recording time between the contents recorded by the recording device 110 but not yet transferred to the storage unit 305 as follows: To calculate. First, the data amount prediction unit 805 searches the recording reservation information stored in the storage unit 305 for the following: the recording reservation information has already been transferred to the recording device 110, and the recording start time indicated by the recording reservation information Has already passed, but the content indicated by the recording reservation information has not yet been transferred from the recording device 110 to the storage unit 305. Next, the recording reservation management unit 802 adds up the recording time with the entire searched recording reservation information, and passes the obtained value to the data amount prediction unit 805.
  • the history management unit 803 acquires information regarding the transfer operation from the transfer unit 312 and stores the information in the storage unit 305 based on the information.
  • the stored reproduction management information relating to the reproduction apparatus is updated.
  • the history management unit 803 also refers to the reproduction management information, and records the history from the latest transfer operation performed by the transfer device 120 to each of the playback devices 131 to 134 a certain number of times before, for example, the transfer operation 10 times before.
  • the reproduction frequency of each reproduction device 131-134 is calculated from the history.
  • the history management unit 803 incorporates the reproduction frequency into a part of the reproduction management information. Further, in response to a request from the determination unit 806, the history management unit 803 reads the reproduction frequency of each reproduction device 131-134 from the reproduction management information in the storage unit 305 and passes it to the determination unit 806.
  • the encoding format management unit 804 When the encoding format management unit 804 receives a list of encoding formats that can be decoded by any of the playback devices from the transfer unit 312, the encoding format management unit 804 stores the encoding format management information stored in the storage unit 305 based on the list. Update. The encoding format management unit 804 further refers to the playback management information related to the playback device, and from the latest transfer operation performed by the transfer device 120 to the playback device, for example, up to a transfer operation 10 times before, for example, Check the history of. Then, the encoding format selection unit 313 calculates an average amount of data that the playback device reproduces per hour from the history and incorporates it in the encoding format management information. The encoding format management unit 804 also reads encoding format management information from the storage unit 305 in response to a request from the data amount prediction unit 805 or the determination unit 806, and passes it to the data amount prediction unit 805 or the determination unit 806.
  • the data amount predicting unit 805 determines the data amount obtained by encoding the content recorded by the recording device 110 in a specific encoding format using any of the following two methods. Predict.
  • the data amount prediction unit 805 first acquires the recording time of unviewed recorded content from the recording reservation management unit 802. On the other hand, the data amount prediction unit 805 obtains the encoding format management information related to each reproduction device 131-134 from the encoding format management unit 804, and each reproduction device 131-134 obtains the encoding format management information from the encoding format management information. Read the average amount of data to be played back per hour. Next, the data amount prediction unit 805 calculates, as a predicted value, the product of the average data amount that the specific playback device plays back per hour and the recording time of unviewed recorded content.
  • the data amount prediction unit 805 first reads the content encoding format and the data amount from the recording completion notification received by the transfer unit 312 from the recording device 110. Next, the data amount prediction unit 805 converts the content of the data amount indicated by the recording completion notification into the specific encoding format from the change rate of the data amount when the encoding format indicated by the recording completion notification is converted into the specific encoding format. The amount of data obtained by converting to is calculated as a predicted value.
  • the data amount prediction unit 805 stores in advance the rate of change of the data amount when converting one of the various pairs of encoding formats into the other.
  • the first method has a smaller amount of calculation than the second method, so the calculation of the predicted value is faster.
  • the second method uses the data amount of the content before transfer for prediction, a more accurate predicted value than that of the first method can be obtained.
  • the determination unit 806 selects an encoding format as follows in response to a request from the transfer unit 312. The determination unit 806 further determines the selected encoding format as an encoding format to be used when the recording device 110 transfers the content to be transferred indicated by the recording completion notification to the transfer device 120, and sends it to the transfer unit 312. Notice.
  • the determination unit 806 inquires of the monitoring unit 801 whether or not the size of the used area of the storage unit 305 exceeds the threshold value. When the size of the used area does not exceed the threshold, the determination unit 806 refers to the connection management information in the storage unit 305 and sets a playback device having a connection frequency with the communication unit 306 higher than 0 as the content transfer destination To do. On the other hand, when the size of the used area exceeds the threshold, the determination unit 806 acquires the playback frequency of each playback device 131-134 from the history management unit 803, and selects one or more of the playback devices A131-D134. The content is selected as a transfer destination in descending order of reproduction frequency. At that time, the number of transfer destination playback devices is limited as follows.
  • the determination unit 806 causes the data amount prediction unit 805 to predict the data amount obtained by encoding the unviewed recorded content in an encoding format that can be decoded by the transfer destination playback device using the first method.
  • the determination unit 806 limits the number of transfer destination playback devices so that the predicted data amount does not exceed the free capacity of the storage unit 305.
  • the determination unit 806 obtains the encoding format management information related to the playback device at the transfer destination from the encoding format management unit 804, and based on the encoding format management information, the encoding format that can be decoded by these playback devices Are identified as selection candidates. Subsequently, the determination unit 806 causes the data amount prediction unit 805 to predict the data amount obtained by encoding the transfer target content indicated by the recording completion notification in the encoding format of the selection candidate by the second method. Further, the determination unit 806 acquires the reproduction management information from the history management unit 803, and from the reproduction frequency and the reproduction history indicated by the reproduction management information, each encoding format of the selection candidate is transferred from the transfer device 120 to the reproduction devices A131 to D134.
  • the determination unit 806 then prioritizes the selection candidate encoding formats in descending order of the calculated frequency, and selects one or more encoding formats from the selection candidate encoding formats according to the priority order. At that time, the determination unit 806 determines the number of encoding formats to be selected so that the amount of data obtained by encoding the content to be transferred in the selected encoding format does not exceed the free capacity of the storage unit 305. Limit. The determining unit 806 also deletes, from the storage unit 305, encoded data that can be decoded only by a playback device other than the transfer destination when the size of the use area of the storage unit 305 exceeds the threshold value.
  • the free data in the storage unit 305 is transferred in order from the data that is not likely to be used for playback, such as data that has not been used for playback and old data that has not been used for playback so far. It is selected so as to exceed the amount of content data.
  • the determination unit 806 can increase the free capacity of the storage unit 305 as much as possible, and can record the content to be transferred in the storage unit 305 in as many encoding formats as possible. To.
  • step S704 shown in FIG. 7, that is, the encoding format selection processing by the transfer apparatus 120. This process is started when the transfer unit 312 of the transfer device 120 receives a recording completion notification from the recording device 110.
  • step S901 the transfer unit 312 requests the encoding format selection unit 313 to select an encoding format in response to the recording completion notification from the recording device 110.
  • the determination unit 806 inquires of the monitoring unit 801 about the result of comparing the size of the used area of the storage unit 305 with the threshold value. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S902.
  • step S902 the monitoring unit 801 calculates the size of the used area of the storage unit 305 in response to the inquiry from the determination unit 806, and notifies the determination unit 806 of the result of comparing the size with the threshold value. If the size of the used area does not exceed the threshold, the process proceeds to step S903. If the size of the used area exceeds the threshold, the process proceeds to step S1001.
  • step S903 since the size of the used area does not exceed the threshold value, the free space in the storage unit 305 is sufficiently large.
  • the determination unit 806 refers to the connection management information in the storage unit 305, and sets a playback device having a connection frequency with the communication unit 306 higher than 0 as a content transfer destination. As a result, all playback devices having a connection history are set as transfer destinations. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S904.
  • step S904 the determination unit 806 first acquires the encoding format management information related to the transfer destination playback device from the encoding format management unit 804, and can be decoded by those playback devices based on the encoding format management information.
  • An encoding format is specified as a selection candidate.
  • the determination unit 806 instructs the data amount prediction unit 805 to predict the data amount obtained by encoding the transfer target content indicated by the recording completion notification in the encoding format of the selection candidate by the second method. Request.
  • the data amount predicting unit 805 uses the data amount change rate when converting the encoding format indicated by the recording completion notification to each encoding format of the selection candidate and the data amount indicated by the recording completion notification. Calculate the predicted value. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S905.
  • step S905 the determination unit 806 first obtains the reproduction management information from the history management unit 803, and uses the reproduction frequency and the reproduction history indicated by the reproduction management information to indicate that each of the encoding formats of the selection candidates is the transfer device 120.
  • the frequency used to transfer the content from one to the playback devices A131 to D134 is calculated.
  • the determination unit 806 gives priorities to the selection candidate encoding formats in descending order of the calculated frequency. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S906.
  • step S906 the determination unit 806 first acquires the free capacity of the storage unit 305 from the monitoring unit 801. Next, the determination unit 806 selects one or more encoding formats according to the priority order from the encoding formats of the selection candidates. Next, the determination unit 806 obtains a predicted value of the data amount obtained by encoding the content to be transferred in the selected encoding format from the data amount prediction unit 805 and compares it with the free capacity of the storage unit 305. To do. If the predicted value does not exceed the free space, the determination unit 806 selects a new encoding format from the remaining selection candidates according to the priority order.
  • the determination unit 806 can select the encoding value while comparing the predicted value with the free space in the storage unit 305, thereby allowing the predicted value not to exceed the free space in the storage unit 305. Select as many encoding formats as possible. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S907.
  • step S907 the determination unit 806 determines the selected encoding format as the encoding format that the recording device 110 should use to transfer the content to the transfer device 120, and notifies the transfer unit 312 of it. Thus, the encoding format selection process ends. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S705 shown in FIG.
  • step S1001 since the size of the used area of the storage unit 305 exceeds the threshold value, there is a high possibility that the free capacity of the storage unit 305 is insufficient. Therefore, the determination unit 806 first obtains the reproduction management information from the history management unit 803, and identifies a reproduction device without a reproduction history based on the reproduction management information. Next, the determination unit 806 deletes from the storage unit 305 encoded data that can be decoded only by the specified playback device. Thereby, the determination unit 806 increases the free capacity of the storage unit 305. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1002.
  • step S1002 the determination unit 806 acquires the playback frequency of each playback device 131-134 from the playback management information, and determines N units (the letter N represents an integer of 1 or more) from the playback devices A131-D134. Select content transfer destinations in descending order of playback frequency. At that time, the determining unit 806 causes the data amount predicting unit 805 to predict the data amount obtained by encoding the unviewed recorded content in an encoding format that can be decoded by the transfer destination playback device, using the first method, The number N of transfer destination playback devices is limited so that the amount of data does not exceed the free capacity of the storage unit 305. Details of this selection process will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1003.
  • step S1003 the determination unit 806 operates in the same manner as in step S904. That is, the determination unit 806 is obtained by specifying an encoding format that can be decoded by the playback apparatus as the transfer destination as a selection candidate, and encoding the transfer target content indicated by the recording completion notification in the selection candidate encoding format.
  • the data amount prediction unit 805 is made to predict the data amount by the second method. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1004.
  • step S1004 the determination unit 806 acquires the free capacity of the storage unit 305 from the monitoring unit 801, and compares the data amount predicted by the data amount prediction unit 805 in step S1003 with the free capacity. If the free capacity is equal to or less than the data amount, the process proceeds to step S1005. If the free capacity is larger than the data amount, the process proceeds to step S1009.
  • step S1005 the free capacity of the storage unit 305 is equal to or less than the predicted value of the data amount. Therefore, the determination unit 806 checks whether or not the encoded data that can be decoded only by the playback device other than the transfer destination remains in the storage unit 305. If such encoded data remains, the process proceeds to step S1006. If such encoded data does not remain, the process proceeds to step S1007.
  • step S1006 encoded data that can be decoded only by a playback device other than the transfer destination remains in the storage unit 305. Therefore, the determination unit 806 deletes the oldest encoded data from the storage unit 305. Thereafter, the process is repeated from step S1004. In the loop processing in steps S1004 to S1006, all the encoded data that can be decoded by the playback device other than the transfer destination is deleted from the storage unit 305 until the free space in the storage unit 305 exceeds the predicted value of the data amount Repeat until.
  • step S1007 the determination unit 806 calculates the frequency at which each of the selection candidate encoding formats was used to transfer the content from the transfer device 120 to any one of the playback devices A131 to D134 in the same manner as in step S905. Priorities are assigned to the selection candidate encoding formats in descending order of the calculated frequency. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S1008.
  • step S1008 the determination unit 806 selects as many encoding formats as possible from the encoding formats of the selection candidates according to the priority order in the same manner as in step S906. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S907.
  • step S1009 the amount of data obtained by encoding the content to be transferred with all the encoding formats of the selection candidates is smaller than the free capacity of the storage unit 305. Therefore, the determination unit 806 selects all the encoding formats of selection candidates. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S907.
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart of step S1002 shown in FIG. 10, that is, a transfer destination playback device selection process by the transfer device 120.
  • the transfer apparatus 120 operates the elements of the encoding format selection unit 313 shown in FIG. 8 as follows.
  • step S1101 the recording reservation management unit 802 identifies unviewed recording content based on the recording reservation information, reads the recording time TRT of the unviewed recording content from the recording reservation information, and passes it to the data amount prediction unit 805.
  • the recording reservation management unit 802 sums the recording times of the unviewed recorded contents and passes the total value to the data amount prediction unit 805. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1102.
  • step S1102 the data amount prediction unit 805 acquires the encoding format management information regarding the reproducing devices A131-D134 from the encoding format management unit 804, and each reproducing device 131-134 uses the encoding format management information. Read the average amount of data PTH reproduced per hour. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1103.
  • step S1103 the determination unit 806 acquires the playback frequency of each playback device 131-134 from the history management unit 803 and initializes the variable N to 1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1104.
  • step S1104 the determination unit 806 first selects N playback devices from the playback devices A131 to D134 in descending order of playback frequency, and notifies the data amount prediction unit 805 of the identification information of these N playback devices. To do. In response to the notification, the data amount prediction unit 805 adds up the average data amount PTH that is reproduced per hour for each of the N playback devices. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1105.
  • step S1105 the data amount prediction unit 805 calculates the product of the total of the average data amount PTH calculated in step S1104 and the recording time TRT of the unviewed recorded content, and determines that product as a predicted value. To pass.
  • the determination unit 806 acquires the free capacity of the storage unit 305 from the monitoring unit 801, and compares the predicted value received from the data amount prediction unit 805 with the free capacity. If the predicted value is smaller than the free space, the process proceeds to step S1106. If the predicted value is greater than or equal to the free capacity, the process proceeds to step S1107.
  • step S1106 since the predicted value is smaller than the free capacity of the storage unit 305, unviewed recorded content may be further recorded in the storage unit 305 in an encoding format that can be decoded by a playback device different from the N playback devices. I don't know. Therefore, the determination unit 806 increases the variable N by 1. Thereafter, the process is repeated from step S1104.
  • step S1107 since the predicted value is equal to or larger than the free capacity of the storage unit 305, the unviewed recorded content cannot be recorded in the storage unit 305 in an encoded format that can be decoded by all N playback devices. Accordingly, the determination unit 806 decreases the variable N by 1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1108.
  • step S1108 the determination unit 806 selects N playback devices from the playback devices A131 to D134 in descending order of playback frequency, and sets these N playback devices as content transfer destinations. In this way, the transfer destination playback device prevents the predicted value of the data amount obtained by encoding the unviewed recorded content in an encoding format decodable by the transfer destination playback device from exceeding the free capacity of the storage unit 305. The number N is limited. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1003.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a usage state of the storage unit 305 of the transfer device 120.
  • a large rectangle 1201 shown in FIG. 12A represents the storage area of the storage unit 305, and a small rectangle 1202 represents data obtained by encoding the content in a specific encoding format. Further, the length of the vertical side of each of the rectangles 1201 and 1202 represents the data amount.
  • the storage unit 305 stores two types of video contents “sport 1” and “drama 1”. Each content is encoded in an encoding format that can be decoded by each of the playback devices A131 to D134.
  • “sport 1; A” is data obtained by encoding “sport 1” in an encoding format that can be decoded by the playback device A131.
  • the encoding format is MPEG4.
  • the size USA of the portion where the content is recorded in the storage area of the storage unit 305, that is, the size USA of the use area is smaller than the threshold THR.
  • the recording device 110 records two types of contents “drama 2” and “sport 2” in accordance with the recording reservation information received from the transfer device 120.
  • the recording device 110 transmits a recording completion notification regarding “drama 2” and “sport 2” to the transfer device 120.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 of the transfer device 120 first calculates the size of the used area in the storage unit 305 and compares the size with a threshold value. In the example shown in FIG. 12A, the size USA of the used area of the storage unit 305 is smaller than the threshold value THR.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 sets all the playback devices that have been connected to the transfer device 120 in the past as content transfer destinations. According to FIG. 4A, all of the playback devices A131-D134 have been connected to the transfer device 120 in the past. Therefore, all of the playback devices A131 to D134 are set as content transfer destinations. Next, the encoding format selection unit 313 selects one or more encoding formats from among the encoding formats that can be decoded by the playback device A131-D134 as the transfer destination, and transfers them from the storage unit 305 to one of the playback devices A131-D134. Are selected in descending order of frequency of use.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 further predicts the data amount obtained by encoding “drama 2” and “sport 2” with the selected encoding format by the second method, and the predicted value is stored in the storage unit.
  • the number of encoding formats to be selected is limited so as not to exceed 305 free space.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing data obtained by encoding “drama 2” and “sport 2” in an encoding format decodable by the playback devices A131-D134.
  • Each rectangle shown in (b) of FIG. 12 represents data obtained by encoding “Drama 2” or “Sport 2” in a specific encoding format.
  • “Drama 2; A” represents data obtained by encoding “Drama 2” in an encoding format that can be decoded by the playback device A131.
  • the length of the vertical side of each rectangle represents the predicted value of the data amount by the data amount prediction unit 805.
  • the reproduction frequency is higher in the order of the reproduction apparatuses A131, C133, D134, and B132. Therefore, the encoding format selection unit 313 can encode the encoding format decodable by the reproducing device A131, the encoding format decodable by the reproducing device C133, the encoding format decodable by the reproducing device D134, and decodable by the reproducing device B132. Prioritize in order of encoding format.
  • the encoded data represented by the rectangle shown in (b) of FIG. 12 has the highest priority in the encoding format in order from the top. Referring to (a) and (b) of FIG.
  • FIG. 12B A predicted value of the data amount obtained by encoding “Drama 2” and “Sport 2” in an encoding format that can be decoded by the playback devices A131 to D134 is shown in FIG. Unlike the existing value CTS, when the free space SPA of the storage unit 305 is exceeded, the encoding format selection unit 313 sequentially deselects from the encoding format with the lowest priority. In the example shown in FIG. 12B, the selected encoding format is limited so that the encoded data “sport 2; B” represented by the lowermost rectangle is deleted in order.
  • FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram showing a usage state of the storage unit 305 of the transfer device 120 after the content shown in (b) is transferred from the recording device 110 to the transfer device 120.
  • the large rectangle represents the storage area of the storage unit 305
  • the small rectangle represents data obtained by encoding the content in a specific encoding format.
  • the encoding format selected by the encoding format selection unit 313 is notified from the transfer device 120 to the recording device 110 by a transfer request.
  • the recording device 110 encodes “drama 2” and “sport 2” in the encoding format indicated by the transfer request and transfers them to the storage unit 305 of the transfer device 120.
  • FIG. 12C as in FIG. 12A, the large rectangle represents the storage area of the storage unit 305, and the small rectangle represents data obtained by encoding the content in a specific encoding format.
  • the encoding format selected by the encoding format selection unit 313 is notified from the transfer device 120 to the recording device 110 by a transfer request.
  • the playback device 120 as the transfer destination for any of the four types of content “sport 1”, “drama 1”, “drama 2”, and “sport 2”
  • Encoded data that can be decoded by A131-D134 is recorded in the storage unit 305.
  • the transfer device 120 includes identification information of “sport 1”, “drama 1”, “drama 2”, and “sport 2” in the list of contents to be transmitted to any of the playback devices A131 to D134 as the transfer destination. Describe.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing a list of contents displayed on the screen of the playback apparatus in accordance with the list of contents received from the transfer apparatus 120.
  • Each of the transfer destination playback devices A131 to D134 displays a list of contents shown in FIG. 12D on the screen. Therefore, the user of any playback device can select the content to be played back from “Sport 1”, “Drama 1”, “Drama 2”, and “Sport 2”.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing another example of the usage status of the storage unit 305 of the transfer device 120.
  • a large rectangle 1301 shown in FIG. 13A represents a storage area of the storage unit 305, and a small rectangle 1302 represents data obtained by encoding the content in a specific encoding format. The length of the vertical side of each of the rectangles 1301 and 1302 represents the data amount.
  • the storage unit 305 stores two types of video contents “sport 1” and “drama 1”. Each content is encoded in an encoding format that can be decoded by each of the playback devices A131 to D134. Further referring to FIG. 13A, the size USA of the used area of the storage unit 305 exceeds the threshold value THR.
  • the recording device 110 records two types of contents “drama 2” and “sport 2” in accordance with the recording reservation information received from the transfer device 120.
  • the recording device 110 transmits a recording completion notification regarding “drama 2” and “sport 2” to the transfer device 120.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 of the transfer device 120 first calculates the size of the used area in the storage unit 305 and compares the size with a threshold value. In the example shown in FIG. 13A, the size USA of the used area of the storage unit 305 exceeds the threshold value THR.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 first identifies a playback device without a playback history based on the playback management information.
  • the playback management information does not include the playback history related to the playback device B132, so the playback device B is specified.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 deletes the encoded data that can be decoded only by the reproducing apparatus B from the storage unit 305.
  • the data to be deleted that is, the encoded data “sport 1; B” and “drama 1; B”, which can be decoded only by the playback device B, are highlighted with diagonal lines.
  • FIG. 13A the data to be deleted, that is, the encoded data “sport 1; B” and “drama 1; B”, which can be decoded only by the playback device B, are highlighted with diagonal lines.
  • FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram illustrating a usage state of the storage unit 305 after the encoded data that can be decoded only by a playback device having no playback history is deleted from the storage unit 305.
  • the rectangles 1301 and 1302 shown in FIG. 13B are the same as those shown in FIG. Since the encoded data indicated by the oblique lines in FIG. 13A is deleted from the storage unit 305, the free capacity of the storage unit 305 is calculated from the value SPA shown in FIG. Increase to the value SPB shown in (b).
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 encodes unviewed recorded content, that is, “drama 2” and “sport 2” in an encoding format that can be decoded by each playback device 131-134. Is predicted by the first method.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 further acquires the playback frequency of each playback device 131-134 from the playback management information, and selects N playback devices A131-D134 in descending order of playback frequency as content transfer destinations. To do.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 then limits the number N of transfer destination playback devices so that the total amount of data predicted for each transfer destination playback device does not exceed the free capacity of the storage unit 305. . In the example shown in FIG.
  • the reproduction frequency is higher in the order of the reproduction apparatuses A131, C133, D134, and B132.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 further restricts the content transfer destinations to two units, ie, the reproduction device A131 and the reproduction device C133, on the condition that the total of the predicted data amount does not exceed the free capacity of the storage unit 305.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 selects one or more encoding formats from among the encoding formats that can be decoded by the playback apparatuses A131 and C133 that are the transfer destinations, and transfers them from the storage unit 305 to any one of the playback apparatuses A131 to D134. Are selected in descending order of frequency of use.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 further selects the data amount obtained by encoding “drama 2” and “sport 2” in the selected encoding format so that it does not exceed the free capacity of the storage unit 305. Limit the number of encoding formats to be played.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing data obtained by encoding “Drama 2” and “Sport 2” in an encoding format that can be decoded by each of the playback devices A131 and C133.
  • Each rectangle shown in (c) of FIG. 13 represents data obtained by encoding the content in a specific encoding format, and the length of the vertical side of the rectangle is the data amount prediction unit 805. Represents the predicted value of the data volume.
  • the playback frequency of the playback device A131 is higher than the playback frequency of the playback device C133. Therefore, the encoding format selection unit 313 gives higher priority to the encoding format that can be decoded by the reproducing device A131 than the encoding format that can be decoded by the reproducing device C133.
  • the encoded data represented by the rectangle shown in (c) of FIG. 13 has the highest priority in the encoding format in order from the top. Referring to (b) and (c) of FIG. 13, the prediction of the data amount obtained by encoding “drama 2” and “sport 2” in an encoding format decodable by the playback devices A131 and C133.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 selects all encoding formats that can be decoded by the playback apparatuses A131 and C133 as transfer destinations.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 first selects encoded data that can be decoded only by a playback device other than the transfer destination from the oldest one. In order, they are deleted from the storage unit 305. Thereby, the encoding format selection unit 313 expands the free space of the storage unit 305 as much as possible. In the example shown in FIG.
  • the encoded data “drama 2; D” and “sport 2; D” that can be decoded only by the playback device D134, which is a playback device other than the transfer destination, are stored in the storage unit 305. Is recorded. Therefore, the encoding format selection unit 313 deletes these encoded data from the storage unit 305. Even if all the encoded data that can be decoded only by the playback device other than the transfer destination is deleted from the storage unit 305, if the predicted value exceeds the free capacity of the storage unit 305, the encoding format selection unit 313 In addition, the encoding format with the lowest priority is removed from the selection in order. In the example shown in FIG. 13C, the selected encoding format is limited so that data “sport 2; C” represented by the lowermost rectangle is deleted in order.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing a change in the amount of data predicted in the selection process of the transfer destination playback device.
  • the lengths of the vertical sides of the large rectangles 1401, 1402, and 1403 shown in FIGS. 14A, 14B, and 14C are 1, 2, and 3, respectively. This represents the amount of data expected in some cases.
  • the determination unit 806 selects the playback device A131 having the highest playback frequency as the playback device of the transfer destination.
  • the length of the vertical side of the small rectangle 1411 represents the average data amount PTHA that the playback device A131 plays back per hour.
  • the determination unit 806 selects the playback device A131 having the highest playback frequency and the playback device C133 having the second highest playback frequency as playback devices to be transferred.
  • the lengths of the vertical sides of the small rectangles 1411 and 1412 represent the average data amounts PTHA and PTHC reproduced by the playback devices A131 and C133, respectively, per hour.
  • the determination unit 806 selects the playback devices A131, C133, and D134 as the transfer destination playback devices in descending order of playback frequency.
  • the lengths of the vertical sides of the small rectangles 1411, 1412, 1413 are respectively the average data amounts PTHA, PTHC, Represents PTHD.
  • the product (PTHA + PTHC + PTHD) ⁇ TRT of the total PTHA + PTHC + PTHD of the data amount and the recording time TRT of the unviewed recorded content is calculated as a predicted value of the data amount.
  • FIG. 15A is a schematic diagram showing a usage state of the storage unit 305 of the transfer device 120 after the content shown in FIG. 13C is transferred from the recording device 110 to the transfer device 120.
  • the large rectangle 1501 represents the storage area of the storage unit 305
  • the small rectangle 1502 is obtained by encoding the content in a specific encoding format. Data.
  • the encoding format selected by the encoding format selection unit 313 is notified from the transfer device 120 to the recording device 110 by a transfer request.
  • the recording apparatus 110 encodes “drama 2” and “sport 2” in the encoding format indicated by the transfer request, and transfers them to the storage unit 305 of the transfer apparatus 120.
  • the transfer device 120 describes all identification information of “sport 1”, “drama 1”, “drama 2”, and “sport 2” in the list of contents to be transmitted to the playback devices A131 and C133. In the list of contents to be transmitted to the playback device D134, identification information for “sport 1” and “drama 1” is described. On the other hand, the identification information of any content is not described in the content list transmitted to the playback device B132.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram showing a list of contents displayed on the screens of the reproducing apparatuses A131 and C133 according to the list of contents received from the transfer apparatus 120.
  • the storage unit 305 uses the playback devices A131 and C133 for "sport 1", “drama 1", “drama 2", and “sport 2". Decoded encoded data is stored. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 15B, the list of contents displayed on the screen includes all of “sport 1”, “drama 1”, “drama 2”, and “sport 2”. Therefore, the users of the playback devices A131 and C133 can select the content to be played back from “Sport 1”, “Drama 1”, “Drama 2”, and “Sport 2”.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram showing a list of contents displayed on the screen of the playback apparatus B 132 in accordance with the list of contents received from the transfer apparatus 120.
  • the storage unit 305 does not store encoded data that can be decoded only by the playback apparatus B. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 15C, a message indicating that there is no content that can be played back by the playback device B is displayed on the screen. Therefore, the user of the playback device B132 cannot view any content of “Sport 1”, “Drama 1”, “Drama 2”, and “Sport 2”.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram showing a list of contents displayed on the screen of the reproducing apparatus D134 in accordance with the list of contents received from the transfer apparatus 120.
  • the encoded data that can be decoded only by the playback device D are “sport 1; D” and “drama 1”. Only “D”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 15D, the list of contents displayed on the screen includes only “sport 1” and “drama 1”. Therefore, the user of the playback device D134 can view only “Sport 1” or “Drama 1”.
  • the transfer device 120 When the transfer device 120 requests the recording device 110 to transfer the desired content to the storage unit 305, the transfer device 120 determines the encoding format to be used for the transfer in an encoding format that can be decoded by the playback devices A131 to D134. Choose from. At that time, the number of encoding formats to be selected is limited so that the entire data obtained by encoding the desired content in these encoding formats is recorded in the storage unit 305. Therefore, when the free space in the storage unit 305 is insufficient, it is not possible to select all the encoding formats that can be decoded by the playback devices A131 to D134.
  • the transfer device 120 selects an encoding format in descending order of frequency of use for transferring content from the storage unit 305 to any one of the playback devices A131 to D134.
  • the more frequently encoded content is more likely to be played back by one of the playback devices A131-D134. Therefore, the storage unit 305 preferentially records data obtained by encoding desired content in an encoding format that is highly likely to be reproduced.
  • the transfer device 120 can appropriately select the content encoding format when the storage unit 305 has insufficient free space.
  • the transfer device 120 further checks whether or not the size of the used area in the storage unit 305 exceeds the threshold value.
  • the size of the use area of the storage unit 305 exceeds the threshold value, there is a high possibility that an area for recording content in a low-priority encoding format cannot be secured in the storage unit 305.
  • data obtained by encoding desired content in an encoding format that can be decoded only by the playback device up to a playback device with low playback frequency There is a high probability that the amount does not have to be predicted.
  • the transfer device 120 performs the transfer destination playback device selection processing (S1002) prior to the encoding format selection processing (S1003-S1009), and the playback frequency is high.
  • a playback device is preferentially set as a transfer destination.
  • the number of encoding format selection candidates decreases, so that the burden on the transfer apparatus 120 is reduced by the data amount prediction processing for each selection candidate (S1003).
  • the first method which is simpler than the second method, is used for predicting the data amount. Therefore, the burden on the transfer device 120 is light throughout the entire encoding format selection process (S1001-S1009).
  • the recording / playback system treats a broadcast program recorded by the recording device 110 as content to be transferred to the playback devices A131-D134.
  • the recording / reproducing system may treat content read from a portable recording medium such as an optical disk or a memory card, or content downloaded from a network by the recording device 110 as a transfer target.
  • the content to be transferred may be a still image or audio content in addition to the moving image content, and includes a radio broadcast program, a home video, a photograph, a song, a lecture / lecture, and a copy of commercially available content.
  • the recording device 110 may be an optical disc recorder, a digital video camera, a digital still camera, an audio recorder, an IC recorder, or the like in addition to an electronic device having a broadcast program recording function.
  • the playback device may be an audio player, a surround system, and a printer in addition to an electronic device having a video playback function.
  • the recording reservation information and the list of decodable encoding formats are transmitted from each reproducing device 131-134 to the recording device 110 via the transfer device 120.
  • the recording reservation information or the like may be transmitted from each playback device 131-134 to the recording device 110 via a home network or a network such as the Internet. Even in this case, the recorded content is transferred from the recording device 110 via the transfer device 120 to each playback device 131-134. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an excessive increase in network traffic due to the transfer of content.
  • the transfer device 120 transfers the content from the recording device 110 and the content to the playback devices A131 to D134 by wire or wirelessly.
  • the recording device 110 may write the content to be transferred to a memory device such as a memory card or a USB memory, and the transfer device 120 may read the content from the memory device.
  • the transfer device 120 may write the content to be transferred to the memory device, and the playback devices A131 to D134 may read the content from the memory device.
  • the transfer device 120 is used only for transferring content to the playback devices A131 to D134.
  • the transfer device 120 is an electronic device equipped with a video playback function, such as a smartphone and a tablet computer, the transfer device 120 may be used as one of the playback devices.
  • the recording unit 221 and the encoding unit 224 of the recording apparatus 110 shown in FIG. 2 operate when the control unit 202 executes specific firmware by the CPU.
  • the recording unit and the encoding unit may be configured by dedicated hardware.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 of the transfer device 120 compares the size of the used area of the storage unit 305 with a predetermined threshold, and transfers the transfer if the size of the used area of the storage unit 305 exceeds the threshold. Limit the number of previous playback devices. In addition, the encoding format selection unit 313 compares the free capacity of the storage unit 305 or the ratio of the size of the used area to the capacity of the storage unit 305 with a predetermined threshold, and the free capacity is below the threshold, or When the ratio exceeds the threshold, the number of transfer destination playback devices may be limited.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 calculates the reproduction frequency of each reproduction apparatus 131-134 from the history indicated by the reproduction management information and incorporates it in the reproduction management information. In addition, the encoding format selection unit 313 calculates the frequency used for transferring content to one of the playback devices for each type of encoding format from the history indicated by the playback management information, and incorporates it in the playback management information. But you can.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 refers to the playback management information regarding the playback device, and the playback device plays back per hour. Calculate the average amount of data.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 may acquire an average amount of data that each playback device plays back per hour from the playback device or the recording device 110.
  • a standard value may be incorporated in advance in the encoding format management information as the amount of data that each playback device plays back per hour.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 transfers the content from the transfer device 120 to any one of the playback devices A131 to D134 with respect to the encoding format that can be decoded by the transfer destination playback device. Prioritize in order of frequency used. Accordingly, it is considered that an encoding format having a higher frequency is more likely to be used for transferring content from the transfer device 120 to any one of the playback devices A131 to D134.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 may assign a higher priority to an encoding format that can be decoded by a playback device having a high playback frequency or connection frequency. In that case, it is considered that an encoding format that can be decoded by a playback device having a high playback frequency or connection frequency is likely to be used for transferring content from the transfer device 120 to any one of the playback devices A131 to D134.
  • the (J) encoding format selection unit 313 uses the reproduction frequency to limit the number of reproduction apparatuses as transfer destinations.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 may use connection frequency. Further, the number of transfer destination playback devices may be set by a user or set to a default value.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 converts all of the unviewed recorded content in an encoding format that can be decoded by the playback device of the transfer destination.
  • the amount of data obtained by encoding the content is predicted.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 may limit the data amount prediction target to unrecorded recorded content recorded from the present time to a predetermined period before, for example, one week before.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 is less likely to be used for reproduction out of the encoded data stored in the storage unit 305. The necessary amount is automatically deleted from the storage unit 305. In addition, the encoding format selection unit 313 may cause the user to select content to be deleted from the content stored in the storage unit 305.
  • the recording / reproducing system according to the second embodiment of the present invention differs from the system according to the first embodiment in that the transfer device 120 restricts the time when the content is transferred from the recording device 110 to a time when power can be secured. Since other configurations and functions are the same as those of the system according to the first embodiment, the description of the first embodiment is used for the similar configurations and functions.
  • the transfer device 120 Since the transfer device 120 is a mobile device, it normally receives power from a built-in battery. However, transfer of content from the recording device 110 to the transfer device 120 takes a long time and consumes a large amount of power, so there is a risk that the battery will run out during the processing. Therefore, as described below, when the transfer device 120 according to the second embodiment of the present invention can be regarded as being in a state where it can receive power supply from the external power supply based on the history of receiving power supply from the external power supply, The content is transferred from the recording device 110. Thereby, the risk of running out of battery due to the content transfer process can be suppressed.
  • FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the transfer apparatus 120 according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • transfer device 120 includes a GPS (Global Positioning System) unit 1601 and a power supply control unit 1602 in addition to the elements shown in FIG. 3. These elements 1601 and 1602 can exchange data with the control unit 301 through the I / F 204.
  • the GPS unit 1601 receives radio waves transmitted by at least three GPS satellites, and determines the distance between the transfer device 120 and each GPS satellite from the difference between the time indicated by those radio waves and the time when these radio waves are received. Calculate The GPS unit 1601 further calculates the latitude and longitude of the transfer device 120 from the calculated distance.
  • the power control unit 1602 controls processing for charging a battery built in the transfer device 120 using an external power source.
  • FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the encoding format selection unit 313 shown in FIG.
  • the encoding format selection unit 313 includes a power monitoring unit 1701, a position detection unit 1702, and a transfer time determination unit 1703 in addition to the function units 801-806 shown in FIG. Similar to the other function units 801-806, these function units 1701-1703 operate by the CPU in the control unit 301 executing predetermined firmware.
  • the power monitoring unit 1701 monitors whether or not the transfer device 120 is supplied with power from an external power source through the power control unit 1602 and notifies the transfer timing determination unit 1703 of the start and end of the power supply.
  • the position detection unit 1702 uses the GPS unit 1601 to monitor the latitude and longitude of the transfer device 120, and in response to a request from the transfer time determination unit 1703, the current latitude and longitude are transferred to the transfer time determination unit 1703. Notice.
  • the transfer time determination unit 1703 generates power supply information using notifications from the power monitoring unit 1701 and the position detection unit 1702.
  • the power supply information is a history that the transfer device 120 has received power supply from an external power source.
  • the transfer time determination unit 1703 further sets a pair of a power guarantee period and a power guarantee area using the power supply information.
  • the power guarantee period and the power guarantee area respectively represent a time zone in which the possibility that the transfer device 120 receives power supply from the external power source is higher than a predetermined level, and a range of latitude and longitude. If the transfer device 120 is located in any power guarantee area that is paired with any power guarantee period, the transfer device 120 is considered to be in a situation where it can receive power from an external power source. be able to.
  • the transfer time determination unit 1703 firstly belongs to one of the power guarantee periods, and the power guarantee period It is determined whether or not the current latitude and longitude of the transfer device 120 belong to a pair of power security areas. If the determination is affirmative, the transfer time determination unit 1703 allows the transfer unit 312 to transfer the content from the recording device 110 to the storage unit 305. On the other hand, if the determination is negative, the transfer timing determination unit 1703 causes the power monitoring unit 1701 to monitor whether or not the transfer device 120 is connected to an external power source. Thereafter, when the power monitoring unit 1701 detects that the transfer device 120 is connected to the external power supply, the transfer time determination unit 1703 allows the transfer unit 312 to transfer the content from the recording device 110 to the storage unit 305. .
  • FIG. 18 is a table showing an example of power supply information.
  • the power supply information includes a combination of start time, supply time, and position in one item.
  • the “start time” represents the date and time when the transfer device 120 starts to receive power supply from the external power supply.
  • the transfer time determination unit 1703 records the time when the start of power supply is notified from the power monitoring unit 1701 as the start time.
  • “Supply time” represents a time during which the transfer device 120 was supplied with power from an external power source.
  • the transfer time determination unit 1703 records the difference between the time when the end of power supply is notified from the power monitoring unit 1701 and the start time as the supply time.
  • “Position” represents the latitude and longitude that the transfer device 120 was located during the period when it was supplied with power from the external power supply.
  • the transfer time determination unit 1703 acquires the latitude and longitude of the transfer device 120 from the position detection unit 1702 and records them as the position of the transfer device 120.
  • the transfer time determination unit 1703 sets the power guarantee period / area from the power supply information as follows. First, the transfer time determination unit 1703 extracts an item indicating a matching position with GPS accuracy, for example, 100 m accuracy, from the items of power supply information. Next, the transfer time determination unit 1703 overlaps at least two items from the start time and the supply time indicated by each of the extracted items in the time period during which the transfer device 120 was supplied with power from the external power supply. Find the part. Subsequently, the transfer time determination unit 1703 obtains the frequency recorded in the power supply information per predetermined period, such as one week, for each discovered part.
  • the transfer time determination unit 1703 obtains the frequency recorded in the power supply information per predetermined period, such as one week, for each discovered part.
  • a time zone in which the frequency exceeds a predetermined level, for example, once per week, is set as a power guarantee period, and the range of latitude and longitude that matches the position of the transfer device 120 in the time zone with the accuracy of GPS is power.
  • a predetermined level for example, once per week
  • the transfer time determination unit 1703 searches for a time zone overlapping between at least two of the items from the start time and the supply time indicated by the items in the first, third, and fourth rows.
  • the period indicated by the item in the first row is “21:00 to 24:00”
  • the time zone indicated by the item in the third row is “22:00 to 23:00”
  • the item in the fourth row indicates The time zone is “23:00 to 4:00”. Accordingly, “22:00 to 23:00” overlaps between the items in the first row and the items in the third row, and “23:00 to“ from the items in the first row to the items in the fourth row. 24:00 "is duplicated.
  • the transfer timing determination unit 1703 sets “22:00 to 24:00” as the power guarantee period, and the position of the transfer device 120 in that time zone (34 degrees 78 minutes 46.77 seconds north, 135 degrees 63 east longitude). A range within a radius of 100 m centered on the minute (10.35 seconds) is set as the power guarantee region.
  • FIG. 19 is a flowchart of processing in which the transfer time determination unit 1703 determines whether it is appropriate for the transfer device 120 to transfer content from the recording device 110 at this time. This processing is started by sending a signal to the transfer time determination unit 1703 when the determination unit 806 is requested by the transfer unit 312 to select an encoding format.
  • step S1901 the transfer timing determination unit 1703 acquires the current time and requests the position detection unit 1702 to notify the current position of the transfer device 120. In response to the request, the position detection unit 1702 notifies the transfer time determination unit 1703 of the current latitude and longitude measured by the GPS unit 1601. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S1902.
  • step S1902 the transfer timing determination unit 1703 uses the power supply information to set a power security period and a power security area. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S1903.
  • step S1903 the transfer time determination unit 1703 confirms whether or not both the power security period and the power security area have been successfully set in step S1902. If both of these settings have succeeded, the process proceeds to step S1904. If at least one of the settings has failed, the process proceeds to step S1906.
  • step S1904 the power guarantee period is successfully set.
  • the transfer time determination unit 1703 determines whether or not the current time belongs to any power guarantee period. If the current time belongs to any power guarantee period, the process proceeds to step S1905. If the current time does not belong to any power guarantee period, the process proceeds to step S1906.
  • step S1905 the power security area has been successfully set. Further, the current time belongs to one of the power guarantee periods.
  • the transfer timing determination unit 1703 determines whether or not the current position of the transfer device 120 belongs to the power guarantee area that forms a pair with the power guarantee period. If the current position belongs to the power guarantee area, the process proceeds to step S1907. If not, the process proceeds to step S1906.
  • step S1906 it is unknown whether the transfer device 120 can receive power from an external power source. Accordingly, the transfer time determination unit 1703 inquires of the power monitoring unit 1701 whether or not the transfer device 120 is connected to an external power source. If the power monitoring unit 1701 detects that the transfer device 120 is connected to the external power supply, the process proceeds to step S1907, and the process repeats step S1906 until the detection is detected.
  • step S1907 since the transfer device 120 is located in the corresponding power guarantee area during the power guarantee period, the transfer device 120 can be regarded as being in a state where it can receive power supply from an external power source. it can. Alternatively, the transfer device 120 is actually connected to an external power source and supplied with power therefrom. Therefore, the transfer time determination unit 1703 permits the transfer unit 312 to transfer content from the recording device 110 to the storage unit 305. Thereafter, the process ends.
  • the transfer device 120 when transferring a content from the recording device 110, the transfer device 120 according to the second embodiment of the present invention first has a current time that belongs to any one of the power guarantee periods, and is compatible with the power guarantee period. It is determined whether the latitude and longitude of the transfer device 120 at the present time belong to the power security area. If the determination is affirmative, the transfer device 120 can be regarded as being in a state where it can receive power supply from the external power supply even though it is not actually connected to the external power supply. Therefore, the transfer device 120 immediately starts transferring content from the recording device 110 in a state where it is not actually connected to an external power supply, and as a result, the battery is likely to run out before the transfer is completed.
  • the transfer device 120 does not require the user to connect the transfer device 120 to an external power source every time content is transferred from the recording device 110, and the battery is exhausted due to the transfer processing of the content from the recording device 110. Risk can be suppressed.
  • the transfer device 120 shown in FIG. 16 measures the position by the GPS unit 1601. In addition, the transfer device 120 may measure the position based on the intensity of the radio wave received from the base station whose position is fixed using the wireless communication function.
  • the method of setting the power guarantee period / area from the power supply information is not limited to the above method. For example, a time zone that overlaps between items included in the power supply information may be searched first, and then the frequency with which the position of the transfer device 120 in the searched time zone matches with the accuracy of GPS may be calculated. Further, the transfer time determination unit 1703 may allow the user to set the power guarantee period / area.
  • the video content recording / playback system differs from the system according to the first embodiment mainly in the following two points: (1) A portable recording medium is transferred from the recording device to the playback device instead of the transfer device. Used to transfer content to (2) A recording device, instead of the transfer device, selects an encoding format for recording content on a portable recording medium. Since other configurations and functions are the same as those of the system according to the first embodiment, the description of the first embodiment is used for the similar configurations and functions.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the data recording area 2010 of the portable recording medium 2000 according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
  • This portable recording medium 2000 is a memory card such as an SD card.
  • a USB memory, an optical disk, or a removable HDD may be used.
  • the memory card 2000 can be connected to both the recording device and the playback device included in the system according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
  • data recording area 2010 of memory card 2000 includes six areas 2001-2006. In the first area 2001, recording reservation information is recorded. In the second area 2002, connection management information AD is recorded.
  • the connection management information A, B, C, and D are connection management information related to the connection between the memory card 2000 and the four playback devices A, B, C, and D, respectively.
  • encoding format management information AD is recorded.
  • Encoding format management information A,..., D is encoding format management information related to an encoding format that can be decoded by the playback devices A,.
  • reproduction management information AD is recorded.
  • Reproduction management information A,..., D is reproduction management information related to reproduction processing performed by the reproduction apparatuses A,.
  • content 1; AD and content 2; AD are recorded as content to be transferred from the recording device to the playback device AD.
  • Content 1; A,..., D are data obtained by encoding the same content 1 in an encoding format decodable by the playback devices A,. The same applies to content 2; AD.
  • a list of contents that can be reproduced by each of the reproduction apparatuses AD among the contents recorded in the fifth area 2005 is recorded.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram showing a video content recording / playback system according to Embodiment 3 of the present invention.
  • the arrows shown in FIG. 21 represent the movement of video content when transferred from the recording device 2110 to the playback devices A131-D134.
  • the content to be transferred is first written into the memory card 2000 by the recording device 2110. Thereafter, the memory card 2000 is removed from the recording device 2110 by the user and connected to one of the reproducing devices A131 to D134. As a result, the content to be transferred is reproduced from the memory card 2000 by the connected reproduction device.
  • the recording device 2110 When the memory card 2000 is connected to the recording device 2110, the recording device 2110 first reads the recording reservation information from the memory card 2000. Next, the recording device 2110 performs reserved recording according to the recording reservation information. Here, the memory card 2000 may be temporarily removed from the recording device 2110 until the scheduled recording is completed. When the memory card 2000 is connected to the recording device 2110 after the scheduled recording is completed, the recording device 2110 first starts from the memory card 2000 with connection management information AD, encoding format management information AD, and reproduction management. Read information AD. Next, the recording apparatus 2110 selects one or more encoding formats from among the encoding formats that can be decoded by the reproducing apparatuses A131 to D134 based on the read management information, and records the recorded content in those encoding formats.
  • the usage status of the data recording area 2010 of the memory card 2000, the playback history of each playback device 131-134, and the connection history between the memory card 2000 and each playback device 131-134 are referred to. Is done.
  • data encoded in the encoding format having a high frequency used for transferring contents from the memory card 2000 to any one of the playback devices A131 to D134 is written in the memory card 2000 in order.
  • the number of encoding formats to be selected is limited so that the entire data obtained by encoding the content to be transferred in the selected encoding format is recorded on the memory card 2000.
  • the recording device 2110 further generates a list of content encoded in an encoding format that can be decoded by each of the playback devices 131 to 134 out of the content stored in the memory card 2000, and writes the list to the memory card 2000.
  • each playback device 131-134 When the memory card 2000 is connected to each playback device 131-134, the playback device writes the recording reservation information to the memory card 2000. The playback apparatus further updates the encoding format management information related to itself stored in the memory card 2000 as necessary. On the other hand, each playback device 131-134 reads a list of contents from the memory card 2000 and displays it on the screen. Subsequently, when content to be played is designated by the user, each playback device 131-134 reads the content from the memory card 2000 and plays it. When the playback processing is completed, each playback device 131-134 updates the playback management information related to itself stored in the memory card 2000. Thereafter, when the user instructs removal of the memory card 2000, each of the playback devices 131-134 updates the connection management information regarding itself stored in the memory card 2000, and disconnects the connection with the memory card 2000.
  • the memory card 2000 is used to transfer content from the recording device 2110 to each of the reproducing devices 131-134.
  • the content recorded by the recording device 2110 can be reproduced by the reproducing devices A131 to D134 that cannot be directly connected to the recording device 2110.
  • the recording device 2110 selects an encoding format to be used when the recording device 110 writes desired content to the memory card 2000 from among encoding formats that can be decoded by the reproducing devices A131 to D134.
  • the number of encoding formats to be selected is limited so that the entire data obtained by encoding the desired content in these encoding formats is recorded in the memory card 2000.
  • the recording device 2110 selects the encoding format in descending order of frequency of use for transferring contents from the memory card 2000 to any one of the playback devices A131 to D134. The more frequently encoded content is more likely to be played back by one of the playback devices A131-D134. Accordingly, the memory card 2000 preferentially records data obtained by encoding desired content in an encoding format that is highly likely to be reproduced. As described above, the recording device 2110 can appropriately select the content encoding format when the free space of the memory card 2000 is insufficient.
  • FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the recording apparatus 2110 shown in FIG.
  • the recording apparatus 2110 shown in FIG. 22 is different from the recording apparatus 110 shown in FIG. 2 in that the control unit 202 further includes an encoding format selection unit 2210.
  • the recording apparatus 2110 shown in FIG. 22 is the same as the recording apparatus 110 shown in FIG. Therefore, for the details of these similar elements, the description in Embodiment 1 is incorporated.
  • the control unit 202 operates as various functional units depending on the type of firmware executed by the CPU. These functional units further include an encoding format selection unit 2210 in addition to the recording unit 221, the connection management unit 222, the transfer unit 223, and the encoding unit 224 shown in FIG.
  • the recording unit 221 reads recording reservation information from the memory card 2000 through the I / O port 206. In addition, the recording unit 221 generates recording reservation information in accordance with a user instruction. According to the recording reservation information thus obtained, the recording unit 221 performs reserved recording.
  • the recording unit 221 notifies the transfer unit 223 of the identification information of the memory card 2000 together with the recording reservation information.
  • the recording unit 221 when the recording unit 221 generates the recording reservation information itself, it notifies the transfer unit 223 of the default recording medium identification information together with the recording reservation information. Further, when the scheduled recording is finished, the recording unit 221 sets the recorded content identification information and the data amount in the recording completion notification, and transmits the notification to the transfer unit 223.
  • connection management unit 222 When the I / O port 206 establishes a connection with the memory card 2000, the connection management unit 222 reads connection management information related to the memory card 2000 from the storage unit 208 and causes the I / O port 206 to use it. Further, each time the I / O port 206 disconnects from the memory card 2000, the connection management unit 222 receives information related to the connection from the I / O port 206 and updates the connection management information using the information. To do.
  • the transfer unit 223 stores the pair of the recording reservation information notified from the recording unit 221 and the identification information of the recording medium in the storage unit 208. Further, when receiving a recording completion notification from the recording unit 221, the transfer unit 223 searches the storage unit 208 for recording reservation information including content identification information indicated by the notification, and a recording medium associated with the recording reservation information Identify the identification information. Thereafter, the transfer unit 223 causes the connection management unit 222 to use the identification information of the recording medium to monitor whether the I / O port 206 has established a connection with the recording medium.
  • the transfer unit 223 When the connection management unit 222 detects that the connection between the I / O port 206 and the memory card 2000 is established, the transfer unit 223 reads the connection management information, the reproduction management information, and the encoding format management information from the memory card 2000. To the encoding format selection unit 2210 and requests the encoding format selection unit 2210 to select the encoding format. The encoding format to be selected should be used when the transfer unit 223 transfers the content indicated by the recording completion notification to the memory card 2000. The transfer unit 223 also reads the recording format and the data amount of the recorded content from the recording completion notification and passes them to the encoding format selection unit 2210 to be used for selection of the encoding format.
  • the transfer unit 223 determines whether the encoding format matches the encoding format of the recorded content. If both encoding formats match, the transfer unit 223 transfers the content as it is from the storage unit 208 to the memory card 2000. On the other hand, if both encoding formats do not match, the transfer unit 223 causes the encoding unit 224 to convert the encoding format of the content into the encoding format selected by the encoding format selection unit 2210, and then The content is written to the memory card 2000.
  • the transfer unit 223 acquires the encoding format management information from the encoding format selection unit 2210, and generates a list of contents based on the encoding format management information.
  • the list of contents indicates identification information of contents encoded in an encoding format that can be decoded by each of the playback devices 131 to 134 among the contents stored in the memory card 2000.
  • the transfer unit 223 further writes the list of contents into the memory card 2000.
  • the encoding format selection unit 2210 refers to the playback management information regarding each playback device 131-134, and transfers a certain number of times before the latest transfer operation performed by the playback device to the memory card 2000, for example, 10 times before. Check the history up to the operation. The encoding format selection unit 2210 further calculates an average amount of data that the playback device reproduces per hour from the history and incorporates it in the encoding format management information.
  • the encoding format selection unit 2210 monitors the usage status of the memory card 2000, specifically, changes in the area actually used in the data recording area. Further, when the encoding format selection unit 2210 is requested by the transfer unit 223 to select an encoding format, the encoding format selection unit 2210 calculates the size of the usage area based on the usage status of the memory card 2000 and compares the size with a threshold value.
  • the encoding format selection unit 2210 refers to the connection management information acquired from the transfer unit 223, and sets a playback device having a connection frequency with the memory card 2000 higher than a predetermined value as a content transfer destination.
  • the predetermined value depends on at least how often the connection frequency is likely to be used for reproducing the content. In particular, when the predetermined value is 0, all playback devices that have been connected to the memory card 2000 in the past are set as the content transfer destination.
  • the encoding format selection unit 2210 first acquires the playback frequency of each playback device 131-134 from the playback management information acquired from the transfer unit 223. Next, the encoding format selection unit 2210 selects one or more of the playback devices A131 to D134 as content transfer destinations in descending order of playback frequency.
  • the encoding format selection unit 2210 limits the number of transfer destination playback devices in the same manner as the encoding format selection unit 313 included in the transfer device 120 according to the first embodiment. Specifically, first, content that has not yet been transferred to the memory card 2000 among the content recorded by the recording device 2110 is encoded in an encoding format that can be decoded by the playback device at the transfer destination. The amount of data is predicted. Next, the number of transfer destination playback devices is limited so that the predicted data amount does not exceed the free capacity of the memory card 2000.
  • the encoding format selection unit 2210 refers to the encoding format management information acquired from the transfer unit 223, and specifies an encoding format that can be decoded by the transfer destination playback device as a selection candidate.
  • the encoding format selection unit 2210 further determines, from the playback frequency and playback history indicated by the playback management information, the frequency at which each encoding format of the selection candidate was used to transfer content from the memory card 2000 to any playback device. Calculate.
  • the encoding format selection unit 2210 selects one or more encoding formats from the selection candidate encoding formats in the order of the above-mentioned frequencies.
  • the encoding format selection unit 2210 first predicts the data amount obtained by encoding the desired content in the selected encoding format. Next, the encoding format selection unit 2210 limits the number of encoding formats to be selected so that the predicted data amount does not exceed the free capacity of the memory card 2000. When the size of the used area of the memory card 2000 exceeds the threshold value, the encoding format selection unit 2210 deletes the encoded data that can be decoded only by the playback device other than the transfer destination from the memory card 2000. Thereby, the encoding format selection unit 2210 expands the free space of the memory card 2000 as much as possible, and enables desired content to be recorded in the memory card 2000 in as many encoding formats as possible. The encoding format selection unit 2210 determines the encoding format thus selected as an encoding format to be used when the transfer unit 223 records desired content on the memory card 2000, and notifies the transfer unit 223 of the determination.
  • FIG. 23 is a flowchart of content recording / playback processing by the system shown in FIG. This process is started when the memory card 2000 is connected to one of the playback devices A131-D134.
  • step S2301 the playback unit 521 of the playback device 130 connected to the memory card 2000 transmits the encoding format management information to the memory card 2000. Further, the recording reservation unit 522 of the playback device 130 transmits the recording reservation information to the transfer device 120. Here, if the encoding format management information related to the playback device 130 is already stored in the memory card 2000, the playback unit 521 of the playback device 130 may not transmit the encoding format management information again. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2302.
  • step S2302 when the memory card 2000 is connected to the recording device 2110, the recording unit 221 of the recording device 2110 reads the recording reservation information from the memory card 2000.
  • the recording unit 221 further notifies the transfer unit 223 of the recording reservation information together with the identification information of the memory card 2000.
  • the transfer unit 223 stores the pair of the recording reservation information and the identification information of the memory card 2000 in the storage unit 208. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2303.
  • step S2303 the recording unit 221 of the recording device 2110 performs reserved recording according to the recording reservation information stored in the storage unit 208.
  • the recording unit 221 transmits a recording completion notification to the transfer unit 223 of the recording device 2110.
  • the transfer unit 223 searches the storage unit 208 for recording reservation information including the identification information of the content indicated by the notification, and identifies the identification information of the memory card 2000 associated with the recording reservation information.
  • the transfer unit 223 further causes the connection management unit 222 to use the identification information to monitor whether the I / O port 206 has established a connection with the memory card 2000. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S2304.
  • step S2304 the connection management unit 222 detects that the I / O port 206 is connected to the memory card 2000.
  • the transfer unit 223 reads the connection management information, the reproduction management information, and the encoding format management information from the memory card 2000 and passes them to the encoding format selection unit 2210, and the encoding format selection unit 2210 stores the encoding format information.
  • Request selection The encoding format selection unit 2210 selects an encoding format according to the request. The details of the selection process are the same as those according to the first embodiment. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S2305.
  • step S2305 the transfer unit 223 of the recording device 2110 determines whether or not the encoding format selected by the encoding format selection unit 2210 matches the encoding format of the recorded content. If both encoding formats match, the transfer unit 223 transfers the content as it is from the storage unit 208 to the memory card 2000. On the other hand, if the two encoding formats do not match, the transfer unit 223 first causes the encoding unit 224 to convert the encoding format of the content into the encoding format selected by the encoding format selection unit 2210. Next, the transfer unit 223 writes the content to the memory card 2000.
  • the transfer unit 223 acquires the encoding format management information from the encoding format selection unit 2210, generates a list of contents based on the encoding format management information, and writes the content list to the memory card 2000. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S2306.
  • step S2306 when the memory card 2000 is connected to any of the playback devices A131 to D134, the playback unit 521 of the playback device 130 reads the content list from the memory card 2000 and causes the display unit 503 to display the content list. Prompt to specify the content to be played. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S2307.
  • step S2307 the operation unit 505 of the playback device 130 receives an instruction from the user, and specifies identification information of the content to be played according to the instruction. Using the identification information, the playback unit 521 of the playback device 130 reads the content to be played back from the memory card 2000, decodes it, and causes the display unit 503 to play it back. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S2308.
  • step S2308 when the content playback process is completed, the playback unit 521 of the playback device 130 updates the playback management information related to itself stored in the memory card 2000. After that, when the user instructs removal of the memory card 2000, the connection management unit 523 of the playback device 130 updates the connection management information related to itself stored in the memory card 2000 and cuts off the connection with the memory card 2000. To do. Thereafter, the process ends.
  • the recording device 2110 selects an encoding format to be used for the transfer from among encoding formats that can be decoded by the playback devices A131-D134. At that time, the number of encoding formats to be selected is limited so that the entire data obtained by encoding the desired content in these encoding formats is recorded in the memory card 2000. Therefore, when the free space of the memory card 2000 is insufficient, it is not possible to select all of the encoding formats that can be decoded by the playback devices A131 to D134. Accordingly, the recording device 2110 selects the encoding format in descending order of frequency of use for transferring contents from the memory card 2000 to any one of the playback devices A131 to D134.
  • the memory card 2000 preferentially records data obtained by encoding desired content in an encoding format that is highly likely to be reproduced.
  • the recording device 2110 can appropriately select the content encoding format when the free space of the memory card 2000 is insufficient.
  • the recording reservation information and the encoding format management information are transmitted from each reproducing device 131-134 to the recording device 2110 via the memory card 2000.
  • the recording reservation information or the like may be transmitted from each playback device 131-134 to the recording device 2110 via a home network or a network such as the Internet.
  • the recorded content is transferred from the recording device 2110 via the memory card 2000 to each of the playback devices 131-134.
  • the memory card 2000 may not have the areas 2001 and 2003 for recording the recording reservation information and the encoding format management information.
  • the present invention may be characterized as follows based on the above embodiment.
  • the determination unit determines from the storage device any one of the encoding formats that can be decoded by each of the plurality of playback devices based on the history managed by the history management unit.
  • the frequency used to transfer the content to the playback device may be calculated, and it may be considered that there is a high possibility that the content will be used to transfer the content to any of the playback devices in descending order of the frequency.
  • the history management unit calculates the frequency at which each playback device plays back content from the storage device, or establishes a connection with the storage device, and the decision unit can decode it by the playback device with the higher frequency.
  • Such an encoding format may be regarded as an encoding format that is highly likely to be used for transferring content to any of the playback devices. In any case, it is possible to appropriately evaluate the possibility that each encoding format is used for transferring content to any one of the playback devices.
  • the monitoring unit, the history management unit, and the determination unit may operate as follows.
  • the monitoring unit compares the size of the used area of the storage device with a predetermined threshold value.
  • the history management unit calculates the frequency of the operation for each of the plurality of playback devices to play back content from the storage device or to establish a connection with the storage device.
  • the determination unit selects one or more playback devices from the plurality of playback devices as the transfer destination playback device in the order of the above-mentioned frequency, and determines
  • the encoding format candidates determined by the unit are limited to encoding formats that can be decoded by the playback apparatus at the transfer destination. As a result, when the free space of the storage device is insufficient, an encoding format that is highly likely to be used for transferring content to any of the playback devices is preferentially selected. Thus, the control apparatus can appropriately select the content encoding format.
  • the determination unit when the size of the use area of the storage device is less than the threshold, the frequency of the operation of establishing a connection with the storage device from a plurality of playback devices exceeds a predetermined value.
  • a playback device may be selected, and encoding format candidates determined by the determination unit may be limited to encoding formats that can be decoded by the selected playback device. As a result, even if there is a free space in the storage device, the free space is not consumed.
  • the control device may further include a recording reservation management unit and a data amount prediction unit.
  • the recording reservation management unit manages information related to reserved recording by the recording device.
  • the data amount prediction unit predicts the data amount obtained by encoding the desired content in a specific encoding format from the encoding format decodable by each of the plurality of playback devices and information related to the reserved recording.
  • the determination unit causes the data amount prediction unit to predict the amount of data obtained by encoding the desired content in an encoding format that can be decoded by the playback device of the transfer destination, and the predicted value is the free capacity of the storage device.
  • the number of playback devices as transfer destinations may be limited so as not to exceed.
  • the control device may further include a power monitoring unit, a position detection unit, and a transfer time determination unit.
  • the power monitoring unit monitors whether the storage device is supplied with power from an external power source.
  • the position detection unit detects the position of the storage device.
  • the transfer time determination unit uses the power monitoring unit and the position detection unit to determine a time zone and a region where the storage device is more likely to receive power supply from an external power source than a predetermined level, and the current time Belongs to the time zone and the current position of the storage device belongs to the area, the recording device is allowed to transfer the content to the storage device.
  • control device described above restricts the transfer of content from the recording device to the storage device to a situation where it is assumed that the storage device can be supplied with power from an external power source. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the content transfer from being interrupted due to the battery running out.
  • a transfer device is a device that is portable and transfers desired content from a recording device to at least one of a plurality of playback devices, and includes a storage unit, a control unit, and a transfer unit. Yes.
  • the storage unit receives desired content from the recording device and stores it.
  • the control unit determines an encoding format to be used when the recording device records desired content in the storage unit.
  • the transfer unit notifies the recording device of the encoding format determined by the control unit, and transfers the desired content encoded in the encoding format from the recording device to the storage unit. To at least one of the devices.
  • the control unit includes a monitoring unit, an encoding format management unit, a history management unit, and a determination unit.
  • the monitoring unit monitors the usage status of the storage unit.
  • the encoding format management unit manages information indicating an encoding format that can be decoded by each of the plurality of playback devices.
  • the history management unit manages a history of operations in which each of the plurality of reproducing devices reproduces content from the storage unit or establishes a connection with the transfer device.
  • the determining unit selects one or more encoding formats from among the encoding formats that can be decoded by each of the plurality of playback devices based on the usage status of the storage unit and the history, and any playback device from the storage unit.
  • the entire data obtained by encoding the desired content in the one or more encoding formats is selected to be recorded in the storage unit.
  • the determining unit further determines the one or more encoding formats as encoding formats to be used when the recording apparatus records desired content in the storage unit.
  • This transfer device selects one or more encoding formats from among the encoding formats that can be decoded by each of the plurality of reproducing devices in the order of the high possibility. As a result, the transfer device can appropriately select the content encoding format even when the storage unit has insufficient free space.
  • a recording medium is a recording medium used when transferring desired content from a recording apparatus to at least one of a plurality of reproducing apparatuses, and includes the following areas: (1 ) An area in which information indicating an encoding format decodable by each of a plurality of playback devices is recorded. (2) Each of the playback devices plays back content from the recording medium or accesses the recording medium. An area where an operation history is recorded, and (3) an area where desired content is encoded and recorded by the recording device.
  • the encoding format of the desired content is used for transferring content from the recording medium to one of the playback devices, among the encoding formats that can be decoded by each of the plurality of playback devices based on the above history. This is an encoding format that is highly likely to be generated.
  • the recording device can select one or more encoding formats from among the encoding formats that can be decoded by each of the plurality of reproducing devices, in the order of the above-mentioned possibility.
  • the desired content encoded in the encoding format is selected so as to be recorded on the recording medium.
  • the recording apparatus can appropriately select the content encoding format even when the recording medium has insufficient free space.
  • a method for determining a content encoding format in which a recording device stores the content in the storage device so that at least one of the plurality of playback devices can reproduce the desired content from the storage device.
  • a method for causing the control device to determine the encoding format to be used when recording the video includes the following steps. First, an encoding format that can be decoded by each of a plurality of playback devices is stored. Next, each of the plurality of playback devices acquires a history of an operation of playing back content from the storage device or an operation of establishing a connection with the storage device. Subsequently, the usage status of the storage device is monitored.
  • one or more encoding formats can be selected from among the encoding formats that can be decoded by each of the plurality of playback devices, and any one of the playback devices from the storage device.
  • the entire data obtained by encoding the desired content in the one or more encoding formats is selected so as to be recorded in the storage device.
  • One or more encoding formats are determined as encoding formats to be used when the recording device records desired content in the storage device.
  • one or more encoding formats are selected from the encoding formats that can be decoded by each of a plurality of playback devices in the order of the high possibility. As a result, even if the storage device has insufficient free space, the content encoding format can be selected appropriately.
  • the present invention relates to a content recording / reproducing technique, and as described above, one or more encoding formats are selected from encoding formats decodable by each of a plurality of reproducing apparatuses.
  • the present invention is clearly industrially applicable.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Databases & Information Systems (AREA)
  • Signal Processing For Digital Recording And Reproducing (AREA)
  • Television Signal Processing For Recording (AREA)
  • Two-Way Televisions, Distribution Of Moving Picture Or The Like (AREA)

Abstract

Provided is a control device that determines encoding formats to be used by a recording device to record desired content on the storage device such that at least one of multiple reproduction devices can reproduce the content from the storage device. A monitoring unit of the control device monitors the use status of the storage device. An encoding format management unit manages information that indicates encoding formats decodable by the respective reproduction devices. A history management unit manages operation histories, such as reproduction of content from the storage device, of the respective reproduction devices. A determination unit selects, among the encoding formats decodable by the multiple reproduction devices, one or more encoding formats in descending order of likelihood of being used in transferring content from the storage device to any one of the reproduction devices on the basis of the use status of the storage device and the histories such that entire data obtained by encoding the desired content using the one or more encoding formats are recorded on the storage device.

Description

制御装置、転送装置、記録媒体、及びコンテンツの符号化形式の決定方法Control device, transfer device, recording medium, and content encoding format determination method
 本発明はコンテンツの記録再生技術に関し、特に、コンテンツを記録装置から再生装置へ転送する技術に関する。 The present invention relates to a content recording / playback technology, and more particularly, to a technology for transferring content from a recording device to a playback device.
 近年、コンテンツの記録再生技術の進歩に伴い、様々な記録装置で記録されたコンテンツを様々な再生装置に再生させることが可能になっている。例えば、ハードディスク・レコーダによって録画されたテレビ番組を、居間、台所、及び寝室等、異なる部屋に置かれたディスプレイのいずれによっても表示させることができる。更に、その録画された番組を、ポータブル・ビデオ・プレーヤ、携帯電話、及びタブレット型コンピュータ等のモバイル機器によって自宅の外で視聴することもできる。また、パーソナル・コンピュータによってインターネットからダウンロードされた楽曲を、ポータブル・オーディオ・プレーヤ、携帯電話、及びカー・ナビゲーション・システムによって自宅の外で聴くことができる。その他に、デジタル・スチル・カメラで撮影された写真を、ディスプレイに表示することも、プリンタで印刷することもできる。 In recent years, with the advancement of content recording / playback technology, it has become possible to play back content recorded on various recording devices on various playback devices. For example, a television program recorded by a hard disk recorder can be displayed on any of displays placed in different rooms such as a living room, a kitchen, and a bedroom. In addition, the recorded program can be viewed outside the home by mobile devices such as portable video players, mobile phones, and tablet computers. Also, music downloaded from the Internet by a personal computer can be listened to outside the home by a portable audio player, a mobile phone, and a car navigation system. In addition, photographs taken with a digital still camera can be displayed on a display or printed by a printer.
 記録装置はコンテンツを、内蔵若しくは外付けされたHDD等の記憶装置、又は、取り外し可能に装着されたメモリカード等の可搬性記録媒体に記録する。従って、記録装置から再生装置へのコンテンツの転送は、記憶装置を有線若しくは無線で再生装置に接続することにより、又は、可搬性記録媒体を記録装置から再生装置へ移動させることによって実現される。更に、スマートフォンに代表される高機能のモバイル機器が、記録装置から再生装置へのコンテンツの転送に利用される場合もある。すなわち、コンテンツは一旦、記録装置からモバイル機器へ転送され、その後、そのモバイル機器から再生装置へ転送される。 The recording device records content on a built-in or external storage device such as an HDD or a removable recording medium such as a removable memory card. Therefore, content transfer from the recording device to the playback device is realized by connecting the storage device to the playback device by wire or wirelessly, or by moving a portable recording medium from the recording device to the playback device. Further, a high-functional mobile device typified by a smartphone may be used for transferring content from a recording device to a playback device. That is, the content is once transferred from the recording device to the mobile device, and then transferred from the mobile device to the playback device.
 ある再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式の種類は、その再生装置の電源の種類、メモリ容量、画面サイズ、及び製造コスト等によって決まる。従って、一般に、再生装置の機種ごとに復号可能な符号化形式が異なる。例えば、映像の符号化形式は、MPEG2、MPEG4、H.264等のアルゴリズム、プロファイル、レベル、及びモード等のパラメータによって規定される。それらのパラメータは、解像度、ビットレート、及びフレームレート等、再生装置の処理能力によって異なる。また、音声の符号化形式は、MPEG2 AAC、MPEG4 AAC、MP3等のアルゴリズム、ビットレート、及びサンプリング周波数等のパラメータによって規定される。それらのパラメータも再生装置の処理能力によって異なる。従って、ユーザはコンテンツを記録装置に記録させる場合、そのコンテンツの符号化形式を、所定の再生装置によって復号可能なものに設定しなければならない。しかし、符号化形式の詳細な設定は一般に複雑であるので、ユーザに符号化形式を手動で設定させるのは好ましくない。 The type of encoding format that can be decoded by a certain playback device is determined by the power source type, memory capacity, screen size, manufacturing cost, and the like of the playback device. Therefore, in general, the decodable encoding format differs depending on the model of the playback apparatus. For example, video encoding formats are MPEG2, MPEG4, H.264, and so on. It is defined by parameters such as algorithms such as H.264, profile, level, and mode. These parameters vary depending on the processing capability of the playback device, such as resolution, bit rate, and frame rate. The audio encoding format is defined by algorithms such as MPEG2, AAC, MPEG4, AAC, MP3, etc., parameters such as bit rate and sampling frequency. These parameters also differ depending on the processing capability of the playback device. Therefore, when a user records content on a recording device, the encoding format of the content must be set so that the content can be decoded by a predetermined playback device. However, since the detailed setting of the encoding format is generally complicated, it is not preferable that the user manually set the encoding format.
 記録対象のコンテンツの符号化形式を記録装置に自動的に設定させる技術としては、例えば特許文献1及び2に記載されたものが知られている。それらの技術によれば、記録対象のコンテンツが格納されるべき可搬性記録媒体に、所定の再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式を規定するパラメータ情報が予め記録されている。記録装置はコンテンツを記録する際、まず、その可搬性記録媒体からそのパラメータ情報を読み出す。記録装置は次に、そのパラメータ情報に基づいてコンテンツの符号化形式を決定し、その符号化形式でコンテンツを符号化してその可搬性記録媒体に記録する。こうして、記録対象のコンテンツの符号化形式が自動的に、所定の再生装置によって復号可能なものに設定される。 For example, the techniques described in Patent Documents 1 and 2 are known as techniques for causing a recording apparatus to automatically set the encoding format of content to be recorded. According to these techniques, parameter information that defines an encoding format that can be decoded by a predetermined playback device is recorded in advance on a portable recording medium in which content to be recorded is to be stored. When recording a content, the recording device first reads the parameter information from the portable recording medium. Next, the recording device determines the encoding format of the content based on the parameter information, encodes the content in the encoding format, and records the encoded content on the portable recording medium. Thus, the encoding format of the content to be recorded is automatically set to be decodable by a predetermined playback device.
特開2007-13602号公報JP 2007-13602 A 国際公開第03/042915号パンフレットInternational Publication No. 03/042915 Pamphlet
 コンテンツを、異なる機種の再生装置によって再生可能にするには、記録装置にそのコンテンツを、それらの再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式のそれぞれで符号化させなければならない。従って、一般には、再生装置の機種が増えるほど、記録対象のデータ量が増大する。記録装置から各再生装置へのコンテンツの転送に可搬性記録媒体又はモバイル機器を利用する場合、それらの記憶容量は一般に、記録装置に内蔵された記憶装置の容量よりも小さい。その結果、再生装置の機種が多過ぎる場合、符号化後のコンテンツのデータ量が可搬性記録媒体又はモバイル機器内の記憶装置の空き容量を超え得る。その場合、コンテンツを、それら全ての再生装置によって再生可能な態様では記録することができないので、コンテンツの符号化形式の種類を制限しなければならない。しかし、そのような制限を記録装置にどのように行わせることが適切であるのかは、当業者にとっても自明ではない。 In order to make the content reproducible by different types of playback devices, the recording device must encode the content in each of the encoding formats that can be decoded by those playback devices. Therefore, in general, the amount of data to be recorded increases as the number of playback device models increases. When a portable recording medium or a mobile device is used for transferring content from the recording device to each playback device, their storage capacity is generally smaller than the capacity of the storage device built in the recording device. As a result, if there are too many types of playback devices, the data amount of the encoded content may exceed the free capacity of the portable recording medium or the storage device in the mobile device. In that case, the content cannot be recorded in a form reproducible by all of these playback devices, so the types of content encoding formats must be limited. However, it is not obvious to those skilled in the art how it would be appropriate to have the recording device perform such a restriction.
 本発明の目的は、上記の課題を解決することにあり、特に、記録装置から再生装置へのコンテンツの転送に利用される記憶装置の空き容量が不足する場合、コンテンツの符号化形式を適切に選択することのできる制御装置を提供することにある。 An object of the present invention is to solve the above-described problems, and in particular, when the free capacity of a storage device used for transferring content from a recording device to a playback device is insufficient, the content encoding format is appropriately set. It is to provide a control device that can be selected.
 本発明の1つの観点による制御装置は、複数の再生装置の少なくとも1台が記憶装置から所望のコンテンツを再生することができるように、記録装置がその記憶装置にそのコンテンツを記録する際に利用すべき符号化形式を決定する。この制御装置は、監視部、符号化形式管理部、履歴管理部、及び決定部を備えている。監視部は上記の記憶装置の使用状況を監視する。符号化形式管理部は、複数の再生装置のそれぞれによって復号可能な符号化形式を示す情報を管理する。履歴管理部は、複数の再生装置のそれぞれが記憶装置からコンテンツを再生する動作、又は記憶装置との接続を確立する動作の履歴を管理する。決定部は、記憶装置の使用状況と上記の履歴とに基づき、複数の再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式の中から1つ以上の符号化形式を、記憶装置から複数の再生装置のいずれかへのコンテンツの転送に利用される可能性が高い順に、それら1つ以上の符号化形式で所望のコンテンツを符号化することによって得られるデータの全体が記憶装置に記録されるように選択する。決定部は更に、それら1つ以上の符号化形式を、記録装置が記憶装置に所望のコンテンツを記録する際に利用すべき符号化形式として決定する。 The control device according to one aspect of the present invention is used when the recording device records the content in the storage device so that at least one of the plurality of playback devices can reproduce the desired content from the storage device. Determine the encoding format to be used. The control device includes a monitoring unit, an encoding format management unit, a history management unit, and a determination unit. The monitoring unit monitors the usage status of the storage device. The encoding format management unit manages information indicating an encoding format that can be decoded by each of the plurality of playback devices. The history management unit manages a history of operations in which each of the plurality of reproducing devices reproduces content from the storage device or establishes connection with the storage device. The determining unit selects one or more encoding formats from among the encoding formats decodable by the plurality of reproducing devices based on the usage status of the storage device and the history, and selects any one of the plurality of reproducing devices from the storage device. In order of the high possibility of being used for the transfer of the content to the network, the entire data obtained by encoding the desired content in the one or more encoding formats is selected to be recorded in the storage device. The determining unit further determines the one or more encoding formats as encoding formats to be used when the recording device records desired content in the storage device.
 本発明の上記の観点による制御装置は、複数の再生装置のそれぞれによって復号可能な符号化形式の中から1つ以上の符号化形式を、記憶装置からいずれかの再生装置へのコンテンツの転送に利用される可能性が高い順に選択する。従って、記憶装置には、再生される可能性の高い符号化形式のコンテンツが優先的に記録される。このように、上記の制御装置は、記憶装置の空き容量が不足する場合、コンテンツの符号化形式を適切に選択することができる。 The control device according to the above aspect of the present invention transfers one or more encoding formats from among the encoding formats decodable by each of a plurality of playback devices to transfer content from the storage device to any playback device. Select in descending order of likelihood of use. Therefore, content in an encoded format that is highly likely to be reproduced is preferentially recorded in the storage device. As described above, the control device can appropriately select the content encoding format when the free space of the storage device is insufficient.
本発明の実施形態1による映像コンテンツの記録再生システムを示す模式図である。1 is a schematic diagram showing a video content recording / playback system according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention; FIG. 図1に示されている記録装置の構成を示すブロック図である。FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the recording apparatus illustrated in FIG. 1. 図1に示されている転送装置の構成を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the transfer apparatus shown by FIG. (a)は、図3に示されている転送装置の記憶部に格納された接続管理情報のデータ構造を示す表である。(b)は、その記憶部に格納された符号化形式管理情報のデータ構造を示す表である。(c)は、その記憶部に格納された再生管理情報のデータ構造を示す表である。(A) is a table | surface which shows the data structure of the connection management information stored in the memory | storage part of the transfer apparatus shown by FIG. (B) is a table | surface which shows the data structure of the encoding format management information stored in the memory | storage part. (C) is a table | surface which shows the data structure of the reproduction | regeneration management information stored in the memory | storage part. 図1に示されている各再生装置に共通する構成を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the structure common to each reproducing | regenerating apparatus shown by FIG. (a)は、図5に示されている再生装置の表示部によって表示されたコンテンツの一覧の一例を示す模式図である。(b)は、その表示部によって表示されたEPGの一例を示す模式図である。(A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the list of the content displayed by the display part of the reproducing | regenerating apparatus shown by FIG. (B) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of EPG displayed by the display part. 図1に示されているシステムによるコンテンツの記録再生処理のフローチャートである。It is a flowchart of the recording / reproducing process of the content by the system shown by FIG. 図3に示されている転送装置の符号化形式選択部の構成を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the encoding format selection part of the transfer apparatus shown by FIG. 図7に示されているステップS704、すなわち、図3に示されている転送装置による符号化形式の選択処理のフローチャートの左半分である。FIG. 7 is the left half of the flowchart of step S704 shown in FIG. 7, that is, the encoding format selection process by the transfer apparatus shown in FIG. 図7に示されているステップS704、すなわち、図3に示されている転送装置による符号化形式の選択処理のフローチャートの右半分である。7 is the right half of the flowchart of step S704 shown in FIG. 7, that is, the encoding format selection processing by the transfer apparatus shown in FIG. 図10に示されているステップS1002、すなわち、図3に示されている転送装置による転送先の再生装置の選択処理のフローチャートである。FIG. 11 is a flowchart of step S <b> 1002 shown in FIG. 10, that is, a selection process of a playback device as a transfer destination by the transfer device shown in FIG. (a)は、図3に示されている転送装置の記憶部の使用状況の一例を示す模式図である。(b)は、図1に示されている再生装置A-Dによって復号可能な符号化形式で「ドラマ2」と「スポーツ2」とを符号化することによって得られるデータを示す模式図である。(c)は、(b)に示されているコンテンツが、図1に示されている記録装置から転送装置へ転送された後における転送装置の記憶部の使用状況を示す模式図である。(d)は、その転送装置から受信されたコンテンツの一覧に従って再生装置A-Dの画面に表示されるコンテンツの一覧を示す模式図である。(A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the usage condition of the memory | storage part of the transfer apparatus shown by FIG. (B) is a schematic diagram showing data obtained by encoding “drama 2” and “sport 2” in an encoding format decodable by the playback device AD shown in FIG. . (C) is a schematic diagram showing the usage status of the storage unit of the transfer device after the content shown in (b) is transferred from the recording device shown in FIG. 1 to the transfer device. (D) is a schematic diagram showing a list of contents displayed on the screen of the playback apparatus AD in accordance with the list of contents received from the transfer apparatus. (a)は、図3に示されている転送装置の記憶部の使用状況の別例を示す模式図である。(b)は、その記憶部から、再生履歴のない再生装置のみによって復号可能な符号化データを削除した後におけるその記憶部の使用状況を示す模式図である。(c)は、再生装置A、Cのそれぞれによって復号可能な符号化形式で「ドラマ2」と「スポーツ2」とを符号化することによって得られるデータを示す模式図である。(A) is a schematic diagram which shows another example of the usage condition of the memory | storage part of the transfer apparatus shown by FIG. (B) is a schematic diagram showing a usage state of the storage unit after deleting encoded data that can be decoded only by a playback device having no playback history from the storage unit. (C) is a schematic diagram showing data obtained by encoding “drama 2” and “sport 2” in an encoding format that can be decoded by each of the playback devices A and C. FIG. 転送先の再生装置の選択処理において予測されるデータ量の変化を示す模式図である。(a)、(b)、(c)に示されている大きい矩形の縦辺の長さがそれぞれ、転送先の再生装置の台数Nが1、2、3である場合に予測されるデータ量を表す。It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the data amount estimated in the selection process of the reproducing | regenerating apparatus of a transfer destination. (A), (b), and (c) The amount of data predicted when the length of the vertical side of the large rectangle is 1, 2, 3, respectively. Represents. (a)は、図13の(c)に示されているコンテンツが、図1に示されている記録装置から転送装置へ転送された後におけるその転送装置の記憶部の使用状況を示す模式図である。(b)は、その転送装置から受信されたコンテンツの一覧に従って再生装置AとCとの画面に表示されるコンテンツの一覧を示す模式図である。(c)は、その転送装置から受信されたコンテンツの一覧に従って再生装置Bの画面に表示されるコンテンツの一覧を示す模式図である。(d)は、その転送装置から受信されたコンテンツの一覧に従って再生装置Dの画面に表示されるコンテンツの一覧を示す模式図である。FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the usage status of the storage unit of the transfer device after the content shown in FIG. 13C is transferred from the recording device shown in FIG. 1 to the transfer device. It is. (B) is a schematic diagram showing a list of contents displayed on the screens of the playback apparatuses A and C in accordance with the list of contents received from the transfer apparatus. (C) is a schematic diagram showing a list of contents displayed on the screen of playback apparatus B according to the list of contents received from the transfer apparatus. (D) is a schematic diagram showing a list of contents displayed on the screen of the playback apparatus D in accordance with the list of contents received from the transfer apparatus. 本発明の実施形態2による転送装置の構成を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the transfer apparatus by Embodiment 2 of this invention. 図16に示されている符号化形式選択部の構成を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the encoding format selection part shown by FIG. 電力供給情報の一例を示す表である。It is a table | surface which shows an example of electric power supply information. 図16に示されている転送装置が記録装置からコンテンツを現時点で転送することが適切であるか否かを、図17に示されている転送時期決定部が判断する処理のフローチャートである。18 is a flowchart of processing in which the transfer time determination unit shown in FIG. 17 determines whether it is appropriate for the transfer device shown in FIG. 16 to transfer content from the recording device at the present time. 本発明の実施形態3による可搬性記録媒体のデータ記録領域の構造を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of the data recording area of the portable recording medium by Embodiment 3 of this invention. 本発明の実施形態3による映像コンテンツの記録再生システムを示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the recording / reproducing system of the video content by Embodiment 3 of this invention. 図21に示されている記録装置の構成を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the recording device shown by FIG. 図21に示されているシステムによるコンテンツの記録再生処理のフローチャートである。FIG. 22 is a flowchart of content recording / playback processing by the system shown in FIG. 21;
 以下、本発明の実施形態について、図面を参照しながら説明する。 Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
 《実施形態1》 << Embodiment 1 >>
  [システムの概要] [System overview]
 図1は、本発明の実施形態1による映像コンテンツの記録再生システムを示す模式図である。図1を参照するに、このシステムは、記録装置110、転送装置120、再生装置A131、再生装置B132、再生装置C133、及び再生装置D134を備えている。記録装置110は、内蔵の記憶部に映像コンテンツを記録可能な装置であり、ユーザの自宅101に設置されている。記録装置110は、例えばハードディスク・レコーダであり、その他に、光ディスク・レコーダ、セットトップ・ボックス、又はパーソナル・コンピュータであってもよい。転送装置120は、記録装置110及び各再生装置131-134と有線又は無線で通信可能なモバイル機器であり、映像コンテンツを記録装置110から各再生装置131-134へ転送するのに利用される。図1に示されている矢印は、その転送に伴う映像コンテンツの動きを表している。転送装置120は、例えばスマートフォンであり、その他に、携帯電話、携帯情報端末(PDA)、ポータブル・ビデオ・プレーヤ、又はタブレット型コンピュータであってもよい。再生装置A131-D134はいずれも、映像コンテンツの表す映像を画面に再生可能な装置である。再生装置A131は小型のフラットパネル・ディスプレイであり、ユーザの自宅101の台所に設置されている。再生装置B132は大型のフラットパネル・ディスプレイであり、ユーザの自宅101の居間に設置されている。再生装置C133はカー・ナビゲーション・システムであり、ユーザ所有の自動車に設置されている。再生装置D134は大型のフラットパネル・ディスプレイであり、ユーザの自宅101とは異なる家屋、例えばユーザの実家102に設置されている。再生装置はその他に、光ディスク・プレーヤ、携帯電話、スマートフォン、PDA、ポータブル・ビデオ・プレーヤ、セットトップ・ボックス、又はパーソナル・コンピュータであってもよい。 FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing a video content recording / playback system according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. Referring to FIG. 1, this system includes a recording device 110, a transfer device 120, a playback device A131, a playback device B132, a playback device C133, and a playback device D134. The recording device 110 is a device capable of recording video content in a built-in storage unit, and is installed in the user's home 101. The recording device 110 is, for example, a hard disk recorder, and may be an optical disk recorder, a set top box, or a personal computer. The transfer device 120 is a mobile device capable of wired or wireless communication with the recording device 110 and each of the playback devices 131-134, and is used to transfer video content from the recording device 110 to each of the playback devices 131-134. The arrows shown in FIG. 1 represent the movement of video content accompanying the transfer. The transfer device 120 is, for example, a smartphone, and may be a mobile phone, a personal digital assistant (PDA), a portable video player, or a tablet computer. Each of the playback devices A131 to D134 is a device that can play back the video represented by the video content on the screen. The playback device A131 is a small flat panel display, and is installed in the kitchen of the user's home 101. The playback device B132 is a large flat panel display, and is installed in the living room of the user's home 101. The playback device C133 is a car navigation system and is installed in a user-owned automobile. The playback device D134 is a large flat panel display, and is installed in a house different from the user's home 101, for example, the user's home 102. In addition, the playback device may be an optical disc player, a mobile phone, a smartphone, a PDA, a portable video player, a set-top box, or a personal computer.
 記録装置110は、まず、転送装置120から録画予約情報を受信し、又はユーザの指示に従って録画予約情報を生成する。録画予約情報は、予約録画の対象である番組を特定するための情報であり、例えば、放送局名、番組名、録画開始時刻、録画時間、録画の画質、及び、この録画予約情報を生成した装置の識別情報を含む。記録装置110は、次に、内蔵のチューナと自宅101のアンテナ111とを利用してデジタル放送波を受信し、その放送波の中から、予約録画の対象である番組のコンテンツを抽出して記憶部に記録する。記録装置110はその後、転送装置120と通信可能になった際に録画完了通知を転送装置120へ送信する。その通知は、録画されたコンテンツの識別情報、符号化形式、及びデータ量を示す。その通知に応じて、転送装置120から記録装置110へ転送要求が送信される。転送要求は、記録装置110から転送装置120へ転送されるべきコンテンツを識別するための情報と、その転送の際に利用されるべき符号化形式とを示す。記録装置110はその転送要求から転送対象のコンテンツを特定し、その転送要求の示す符号化形式でそのコンテンツを符号化して転送装置120へ送信する。ここで、その転送要求が複数の符号化形式を示す場合、記録装置110は各符号化形式で転送対象のコンテンツを符号化する。 First, the recording device 110 receives the recording reservation information from the transfer device 120 or generates the recording reservation information in accordance with a user instruction. The recording reservation information is information for specifying a program to be reserved for recording. For example, the broadcast station name, the program name, the recording start time, the recording time, the recording image quality, and the recording reservation information are generated. Contains device identification information. Next, the recording device 110 receives the digital broadcast wave using the built-in tuner and the antenna 111 of the home 101, and extracts and stores the content of the program to be reserved for recording from the broadcast wave. To record. Thereafter, the recording device 110 transmits a recording completion notification to the transfer device 120 when communication with the transfer device 120 becomes possible. The notification indicates the identification information of the recorded content, the encoding format, and the data amount. In response to the notification, a transfer request is transmitted from the transfer device 120 to the recording device 110. The transfer request indicates information for identifying content to be transferred from the recording device 110 to the transfer device 120, and an encoding format to be used in the transfer. The recording device 110 identifies the content to be transferred from the transfer request, encodes the content in the encoding format indicated by the transfer request, and transmits the encoded content to the transfer device 120. Here, when the transfer request indicates a plurality of encoding formats, the recording apparatus 110 encodes the content to be transferred in each encoding format.
 転送装置120はまず各再生装置131-134から、録画予約情報と、復号可能な符号化形式の一覧とを受信する。転送装置120は次に記録装置110へ録画予約情報を送信する。記録装置110によって予約録画が行われた後、転送装置120は記録装置110から録画完了通知を受信する。その通知に応じて、転送装置120は、再生装置A131-D134によって復号可能な符号化形式の中から1つ以上の符号化形式を選択して転送要求に設定する。転送要求の示す符号化形式は、転送対象のコンテンツを記録装置110が転送装置120へ転送する際に利用すべき符号化形式を表す。符号化形式の選択処理では、転送装置120に内蔵された記憶部の使用状況、各再生装置131-134の再生履歴、及び、転送装置120と各再生装置131-134との間の接続履歴が参照される。その結果、転送要求には、転送装置120から再生装置A131-D134のいずれかへのコンテンツの転送に利用された頻度が高い符号化形式から順に設定される。その上、転送要求の示す符号化形式で転送対象のコンテンツを符号化することによって得られるデータの全体が転送装置120の記憶部に記録されるように、転送要求に設定される符号化形式の数が制限される。転送装置120は続いて転送要求を記録装置110へ送信し、その返信として転送対象のコンテンツを記録装置110から受信して記憶部に格納する。その後、転送装置120は、再生装置A131-D134のいずれかと通信可能になった際にコンテンツの一覧を生成してその再生装置へ送信する。そのコンテンツの一覧は、転送装置120の記憶部に格納されたコンテンツのうち、送信先の再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式で符号化されたコンテンツの識別情報を示す。更に、コンテンツの一覧を受信した再生装置から転送装置120へ再生要求が返信された場合、転送装置120は、その再生要求の示すコンテンツを記憶部からその再生装置へ転送する。その後、転送装置120は、転送先の再生装置に関する再生履歴と接続履歴とを更新する。 The transfer device 120 first receives recording reservation information and a list of decodable encoding formats from each of the playback devices 131-134. Next, the transfer device 120 transmits the recording reservation information to the recording device 110. After the scheduled recording is performed by the recording device 110, the transfer device 120 receives a recording completion notification from the recording device 110. In response to the notification, the transfer device 120 selects one or more encoding formats from among the encoding formats that can be decoded by the reproducing devices A131 to D134, and sets them in the transfer request. The encoding format indicated by the transfer request represents an encoding format to be used when the recording device 110 transfers the content to be transferred to the transfer device 120. In the encoding format selection process, the usage status of the storage unit built in the transfer device 120, the playback history of each playback device 131-134, and the connection history between the transfer device 120 and each playback device 131-134 are displayed. Referenced. As a result, the transfer request is set in order from the most frequently used encoding format used for transferring content from the transfer device 120 to any one of the playback devices A131 to D134. Moreover, the encoding format set in the transfer request is such that the entire data obtained by encoding the content to be transferred in the encoding format indicated by the transfer request is recorded in the storage unit of the transfer device 120. The number is limited. Subsequently, the transfer device 120 transmits a transfer request to the recording device 110, receives the content to be transferred from the recording device 110 as a reply, and stores it in the storage unit. Thereafter, when the transfer device 120 becomes communicable with any of the playback devices A131 to D134, the transfer device 120 generates a list of contents and transmits the content list to the playback device. The list of contents indicates identification information of contents encoded in an encoding format that can be decoded by a reproduction apparatus as a transmission destination among contents stored in the storage unit of the transfer apparatus 120. Further, when a playback request is returned from the playback device that has received the list of contents to the transfer device 120, the transfer device 120 transfers the content indicated by the playback request from the storage unit to the playback device. Thereafter, the transfer device 120 updates the playback history and connection history related to the transfer destination playback device.
 各再生装置131-134は、チューナを内蔵している場合、そのチューナと外部のアンテナとを利用してデジタル放送波を受信し、その放送波の表す情報に基づいて電子番組表(EPG)を生成する。各再生装置131-134はその他に、EPGの生成に必要な情報をインターネット又は転送装置120から取得してもよい。各再生装置131-134は更に、ユーザの指示に従ってEPGを画面に表示し、ユーザからの情報に基づいて録画予約情報を生成する。各再生装置131-134はその後、転送装置120と通信可能になった際に録画予約情報を、その再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式の一覧と共に、転送装置120へ送信する。その一方で、各再生装置131-134は転送装置120からコンテンツの一覧を受信して画面に表示する。続いて、ユーザから再生対象のコンテンツが指定された場合、各再生装置131-134はそのコンテンツの識別情報を再生要求に設定して、その再生要求を転送装置120へ送信する。各再生装置131-134は続いて、その再生要求に応じて転送装置120から転送されるコンテンツを再生する。その再生処理は、ストリーミング方式で行われても、ダウンロード方式で行われてもよい。 When each playback device 131-134 has a built-in tuner, it receives a digital broadcast wave using the tuner and an external antenna, and creates an electronic program guide (EPG) based on information represented by the broadcast wave. Generate. In addition, each playback device 131-134 may acquire information necessary for generating an EPG from the Internet or the transfer device 120. Each playback device 131-134 further displays an EPG on the screen in accordance with a user's instruction, and generates recording reservation information based on information from the user. Thereafter, each of the playback devices 131 to 134 transmits the recording reservation information to the transfer device 120 together with a list of encoding formats that can be decoded by the playback device when communication with the transfer device 120 becomes possible. On the other hand, each playback device 131-134 receives a list of contents from the transfer device 120 and displays it on the screen. Subsequently, when the content to be played is designated by the user, each playback device 131-134 sets the identification information of the content in the playback request and transmits the playback request to the transfer device 120. Each playback device 131-134 then plays back the content transferred from the transfer device 120 in response to the playback request. The reproduction process may be performed by a streaming method or a download method.
 上記のとおり、本発明の実施形態1による記録再生システムでは、記録装置110から各再生装置131-134へコンテンツを転送するのに転送装置120が利用される。それにより、記録装置110へ直に接続することができない再生装置A131-D134にも、記録装置110によって録画されたコンテンツを再生させることができる。更に、転送装置120は、再生装置A131-D134によって復号可能な符号化形式の中から、記録装置110が転送装置120へ所望のコンテンツを転送する際に利用すべき符号化形式を選択する。そのとき、選択される符号化形式の数は、それらの符号化形式で所望のコンテンツを符号化することによって得られるデータの全体が転送装置120の記憶部に記録されるように制限される。従って、記憶部の空き容量が不足する場合、再生装置A131-D134によって復号可能な符号化形式の全てを選択することができない。しかし、転送装置120は符号化形式を、転送装置120から再生装置A131-D134のいずれかへのコンテンツの転送に利用された頻度が高い順に選択する。この頻度が高い符号化形式のコンテンツほど、再生装置A131-D134のいずれかによって再生される可能性が高い。従って、転送装置120の記憶部には、再生される可能性の高い符号化形式で所望のコンテンツを符号化することによって得られるデータが優先的に記録される。このように、転送装置120は、記憶部の空き容量が不足する場合、コンテンツの符号化形式を適切に選択することができる。 As described above, in the recording / playback system according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the transfer device 120 is used to transfer content from the recording device 110 to each of the playback devices 131-134. As a result, the content recorded by the recording device 110 can be reproduced by the reproducing devices A131 to D134 that cannot be directly connected to the recording device 110. Further, the transfer device 120 selects an encoding format to be used when the recording device 110 transfers desired content to the transfer device 120 from among the encoding formats that can be decoded by the playback devices A131 to D134. At that time, the number of encoding formats to be selected is limited such that the entire data obtained by encoding the desired content in these encoding formats is recorded in the storage unit of the transfer device 120. Therefore, when the free space of the storage unit is insufficient, it is not possible to select all the encoding formats that can be decoded by the playback devices A131 to D134. However, the transfer device 120 selects the encoding format in descending order of frequency used for transferring content from the transfer device 120 to any one of the playback devices A131 to D134. The more frequently encoded content is more likely to be played back by one of the playback devices A131-D134. Accordingly, the storage unit of the transfer device 120 preferentially records data obtained by encoding desired content in an encoding format that is highly likely to be reproduced. As described above, the transfer device 120 can appropriately select the content encoding format when the free space of the storage unit is insufficient.
  [記録装置の構成] [Recording device configuration]
 図2は、図1に示されている記録装置110の構成を示すブロック図である。図2を参照するに、記録装置110は、デジタル・チューナ201、制御部202、出力部203、バス・インタフェース(I/F)204、操作部205、入出力(I/O)ポート206、光ディスク・ドライブ207、記憶部208、及び通信部209を備えている。デジタル・チューナ201は外部のアンテナ111に接続され、そのアンテナ111を通してデジタル放送波を受信し、その放送波から所望の情報を復調する。制御部202は、CPU、RAM、及び不揮発性メモリを含む。制御部202は、不揮発性メモリに記憶されたファームウェアをCPUが実行することによって機能し、記録装置110の他の要素を制御する。制御部202は特に、デジタル・チューナ201によって復調された情報から映像コンテンツを復号する。出力部203は外部の表示装置DSPとHDMI(High-Definition Multimedia Interface)ケーブルで接続されている。出力部203は、制御部202によって復号された映像コンテンツをHDMI方式の映像信号/音声信号に変換し、HDMIケーブルを通して表示装置DSPへ送出する。それにより、その映像コンテンツの表す映像がその表示装置DSPの画面に再現される。I/F204は制御部202と他の要素205-209との間でデータを中継する。操作部205は、外部のリモコンRMCから無線信号を受け、又は、記録装置110のフロントパネルに備えられたボタンから、その押下を示す信号を受ける。操作部205は更に、それらの信号の示す機能を解読して、その機能の実行を制御部202に指示する。I/Oポート206は、メモリカード及びUSB(Universal Serial Bus)メモリ等のメモリ装置MCDに対するコネクタであり、それらのメモリ装置MCDとI/F204との間でデータを中継する。光ディスク・ドライブ207は、DVD又はブルーレイ(登録商標)ディスク等の光ディスクDSCの表面にレーザ光を照射し、その反射光量の変化から、その光ディスクDSCに記録されたデータを解読してI/F204へ渡す。記憶部208は、HDD又は半導体メモリ装置等の大容量記憶装置であり、主に、制御部202によって復号された映像コンテンツ、及び、光ディスク・ドライブ207によって光ディスクDSCから読み出された映像コンテンツを格納する。通信部209は、USB若しくはEthernet(登録商標)等の有線方式、又は、WiFi(登録商標)、Bluetooth(登録商標)、若しくはNFC(Near Field Communication)等の無線方式により、転送装置120及びインターネットと通信可能である。 FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the recording apparatus 110 shown in FIG. Referring to FIG. 2, a recording apparatus 110 includes a digital tuner 201, a control unit 202, an output unit 203, a bus interface (I / F) 204, an operation unit 205, an input / output (I / O) port 206, an optical disc. A drive 207, a storage unit 208, and a communication unit 209 are provided. The digital tuner 201 is connected to an external antenna 111, receives a digital broadcast wave through the antenna 111, and demodulates desired information from the broadcast wave. The control unit 202 includes a CPU, a RAM, and a nonvolatile memory. The control unit 202 functions by the CPU executing the firmware stored in the nonvolatile memory, and controls other elements of the recording device 110. In particular, the control unit 202 decodes video content from the information demodulated by the digital tuner 201. The output unit 203 is connected to an external display device DSP via an HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) cable. The output unit 203 converts the video content decoded by the control unit 202 into an HDMI video signal / audio signal, and sends it to the display device DSP through the HDMI cable. Thereby, the video represented by the video content is reproduced on the screen of the display device DSP. The I / F 204 relays data between the control unit 202 and the other elements 205-209. The operation unit 205 receives a radio signal from an external remote controller RMC, or receives a signal indicating that the button has been pressed from a button provided on the front panel of the recording apparatus 110. The operation unit 205 further decodes the function indicated by these signals and instructs the control unit 202 to execute the function. The I / O port 206 is a connector for a memory device MCD such as a memory card and a USB (Universal Serial Bus) memory, and relays data between the memory device MCD and the I / F 204. The optical disc drive 207 irradiates the surface of an optical disc DSC such as a DVD or a Blu-ray (registered trademark) disc with laser light, and decodes data recorded on the optical disc DSC from the change in the amount of reflected light to the I / F 204. hand over. The storage unit 208 is a mass storage device such as an HDD or a semiconductor memory device, and mainly stores the video content decoded by the control unit 202 and the video content read from the optical disc DSC by the optical disc drive 207. To do. The communication unit 209 is connected to the transfer device 120 and the Internet by a wired method such as USB or Ethernet (registered trademark) or a wireless method such as WiFi (registered trademark), Bluetooth (registered trademark), or NFC (Near Field Communication). Communication is possible.
 制御部202は、CPUによって実行されるファームウェアの種類により様々な機能部として動作する。それらの機能部は、録画部221、接続管理部222、転送部223、及び符号化部224を含む。 The control unit 202 operates as various functional units depending on the type of firmware executed by the CPU. These functional units include a recording unit 221, a connection management unit 222, a transfer unit 223, and an encoding unit 224.
 録画部221は、通信部209を通して転送装置120から録画予約情報を受け付ける。録画部221はその他に、デジタル・チューナ201によって復調された情報、又は通信部209を通してインターネットから取得された情報に基づいてEPGを生成し、出力部203を通して表示装置DSPに表示させて、ユーザに録画予約を促す。その場合、録画部221は、操作部205を通してユーザの指示を受け付けて、その指示に従って録画予約情報を生成する。こうして得られた録画予約情報に従い、録画部221は予約録画を行う。具体的には、録画部221は、その録画予約情報の示す時間帯において、デジタル・チューナ201によって復調された情報から、その録画予約情報の示す番組のコンテンツを抽出して記憶部208へ格納する。録画部221はまた、録画予約情報を転送装置120から受け付けた場合には、その転送装置120の識別情報を録画予約情報と共に転送部223へ通知する。一方、録画部221は、録画予約情報を自ら生成した場合には、デフォルトの転送装置の識別情報を録画予約情報と共に転送部223へ通知する。録画部221は更に、予約録画を終えた際に、録画されたコンテンツの識別情報とデータ量とを録画完了通知に設定して、その通知を転送部223へ送信する。 The recording unit 221 receives recording reservation information from the transfer device 120 through the communication unit 209. In addition, the recording unit 221 generates an EPG based on the information demodulated by the digital tuner 201 or the information acquired from the Internet through the communication unit 209, and displays it on the display device DSP through the output unit 203 for the user. Encourage recording reservation. In this case, the recording unit 221 receives a user instruction through the operation unit 205, and generates recording reservation information according to the instruction. According to the recording reservation information thus obtained, the recording unit 221 performs reserved recording. Specifically, the recording unit 221 extracts the content of the program indicated by the recording reservation information from the information demodulated by the digital tuner 201 in the time zone indicated by the recording reservation information, and stores it in the storage unit 208. . When the recording reservation information is received from the transfer device 120, the recording unit 221 notifies the transfer unit 223 of the identification information of the transfer device 120 together with the recording reservation information. On the other hand, when the recording unit 221 generates the recording reservation information itself, it notifies the transfer unit 223 of the identification information of the default transfer device together with the recording reservation information. Further, when the scheduled recording is finished, the recording unit 221 sets the recorded content identification information and the data amount in the recording completion notification, and transmits the notification to the transfer unit 223.
 接続管理部222は、通信部209が転送装置120等、外部の装置との接続を確立する際に、その接続先の装置に関する接続管理情報を記憶部208から読み出して、通信部209に利用させる。接続管理情報は、接続先の装置の識別情報、通信部209とその装置との間の接続履歴、接続方法、及び、通信データを暗号化するための鍵を含む。接続管理部222は更に、通信部209が外部の装置との接続を切断する度に、その接続に関する情報を通信部209から受け付けて、その情報を利用して接続管理情報を更新する。 When the communication unit 209 establishes a connection with an external device such as the transfer device 120, the connection management unit 222 reads connection management information related to the connection destination device from the storage unit 208 and causes the communication unit 209 to use it. . The connection management information includes identification information of a connection destination device, a connection history between the communication unit 209 and the device, a connection method, and a key for encrypting communication data. Further, each time the communication unit 209 disconnects the connection with an external device, the connection management unit 222 receives information about the connection from the communication unit 209 and updates the connection management information using the information.
 転送部223は、録画部221から通知された録画予約情報と転送装置の識別情報との対を記憶部208に格納する。転送部223は更に、録画部221から録画完了通知を受信した場合、その通知の示すコンテンツの識別情報を含む録画予約情報を記憶部208から検索し、その録画予約情報に対応付けられた転送装置の識別情報を特定する。転送部223はその後、その転送装置の識別情報を接続管理部222に利用させて、通信部209がその転送装置との接続を確立したか否かを監視させる。その接続の確立が接続管理部222によって検出された場合、転送部223はその転送装置へ録画完了通知を送信し、その転送装置から転送要求が届くのを待つ。転送要求が届いたとき、転送部223は、その転送要求の示すコンテンツを記憶部208から検索し、そのコンテンツの符号化形式が、その転送要求の示す符号化形式と一致するか否かを判断する。両方の符号化形式が一致した場合、転送部223はそのコンテンツをそのまま、記憶部208から転送装置へ転送する。一方、両方の符号化形式が一致しなかった場合、転送部223は符号化部224にそのコンテンツの符号化形式を、転送要求の示す符号化形式に変換させ、その後、そのコンテンツを転送装置へ転送する。 The transfer unit 223 stores in the storage unit 208 a pair of the recording reservation information notified from the recording unit 221 and the identification information of the transfer device. Further, when receiving a recording completion notification from the recording unit 221, the transfer unit 223 searches the storage unit 208 for recording reservation information including content identification information indicated by the notification, and transfers the transfer device associated with the recording reservation information Identify the identification information. Thereafter, the transfer unit 223 causes the connection management unit 222 to use the identification information of the transfer device to monitor whether the communication unit 209 has established a connection with the transfer device. When establishment of the connection is detected by the connection management unit 222, the transfer unit 223 transmits a recording completion notification to the transfer device and waits for a transfer request from the transfer device. When the transfer request arrives, the transfer unit 223 searches the storage unit 208 for the content indicated by the transfer request, and determines whether the encoding format of the content matches the encoding format indicated by the transfer request. To do. If both encoding formats match, the transfer unit 223 transfers the content as it is from the storage unit 208 to the transfer device. On the other hand, if the two encoding formats do not match, the transfer unit 223 causes the encoding unit 224 to convert the encoding format of the content into the encoding format indicated by the transfer request, and then transfers the content to the transfer device. Forward.
 符号化部224は、記憶部208に格納されたコンテンツの符号化形式を所望の符号化形式に変換する。その変換は、そのコンテンツを所望の符号化形式で符号化し直すことによって実現される。その他に、符号化部224は、所望の符号化形式で符号化されたコンテンツを、インターネット又は光ディスクDSCから取得してもよい。 The encoding unit 224 converts the content encoding format stored in the storage unit 208 into a desired encoding format. The conversion is realized by re-encoding the content in a desired encoding format. In addition, the encoding unit 224 may acquire content encoded in a desired encoding format from the Internet or the optical disc DSC.
  [転送装置の構成] [Transfer device configuration]
 図3は、図1に示されている転送装置120の構成を示すブロック図である。図3を参照するに、転送装置120は、制御部301、I/F302、操作部303、I/Oポート304、記憶部305、及び通信部306を備えている。制御部301は、CPU、RAM、及び不揮発性メモリを含む。制御部301は、不揮発性メモリに記憶されたファームウェアをCPUが実行することによって機能し、転送装置120の他の要素を制御する。制御部301は特に、記憶部305の使用状況、各再生装置131-134の再生履歴、及び、通信部209と各再生装置131-134との間の接続履歴に基づいて、再生装置A131-D134によって復号可能な符号化形式の中から1つ以上の符号化形式を選択する。I/F302は制御部301と他の要素303-306との間でデータを中継する。操作部303は、転送装置120の筐体に備えられたボタン及びタッチパネルから、ユーザの指による押下及び接触を示す信号を受ける。操作部303は更に、それらの信号の示す機能を解読して、その機能の実行を制御部301に指示する。I/Oポート304は、メモリカード及びUSBメモリ等のメモリ装置MCDに対するコネクタであり、それらのメモリ装置MCDとI/F302との間でデータを中継する。記憶部305はHDD又は半導体メモリ装置等の大容量記憶装置であり、記録装置110から各再生装置131-134へ転送されるべき映像コンテンツを格納する。通信部306は、USB若しくはEthernet等の有線方式、又は、WiFi、Bluetooth、若しくはNFC等の無線方式により、記録装置110、再生装置A131-D134、及びインターネットと通信可能である。 FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the transfer device 120 shown in FIG. Referring to FIG. 3, the transfer device 120 includes a control unit 301, an I / F 302, an operation unit 303, an I / O port 304, a storage unit 305, and a communication unit 306. The control unit 301 includes a CPU, a RAM, and a nonvolatile memory. The control unit 301 functions when the CPU executes firmware stored in the nonvolatile memory, and controls other elements of the transfer device 120. In particular, the control unit 301 uses the playback device A131-D134 based on the usage status of the storage unit 305, the playback history of each playback device 131-134, and the connection history between the communication unit 209 and each playback device 131-134. To select one or more encoding formats from among the encoding formats that can be decoded. The I / F 302 relays data between the control unit 301 and the other elements 303-306. The operation unit 303 receives a signal indicating pressing and touching by a user's finger from buttons and a touch panel provided on the housing of the transfer device 120. The operation unit 303 further decodes the functions indicated by these signals and instructs the control unit 301 to execute the functions. The I / O port 304 is a connector for a memory device MCD such as a memory card and a USB memory, and relays data between the memory device MCD and the I / F 302. The storage unit 305 is a mass storage device such as an HDD or a semiconductor memory device, and stores video content to be transferred from the recording device 110 to each of the playback devices 131-134. The communication unit 306 can communicate with the recording device 110, the playback device A131-D134, and the Internet by a wired method such as USB or Ethernet, or a wireless method such as WiFi, Bluetooth, or NFC.
 制御部301は、CPUによって実行されるファームウェアの種類により様々な機能部として動作する。それらの機能部は、接続管理部311、転送部312、及び符号化形式選択部313を含む。 The control unit 301 operates as various functional units depending on the type of firmware executed by the CPU. These functional units include a connection management unit 311, a transfer unit 312, and an encoding format selection unit 313.
 接続管理部311は、通信部306が記録装置110等、外部の装置との接続を確立する際に、その接続先の装置に関する接続管理情報を記憶部305から読み出して、通信部306に利用させる。接続管理部311は更に、通信部306が外部の装置との接続を切断する度に、その接続に関する情報を通信部306から受け付けて、その情報を利用して接続管理情報を更新する。接続管理部311はまた、接続管理情報を利用して、記録装置110及び再生装置A131-D134のそれぞれについて、最新の接続から一定回数前の接続までの履歴を調べ、その履歴から、1週間、1月、又は1年当たりの接続動作の回数を算定する。その回数を接続頻度という。接続頻度は接続管理情報の一部として記憶部305に格納される。 When the communication unit 306 establishes a connection with an external device such as the recording device 110, the connection management unit 311 reads connection management information regarding the connection destination device from the storage unit 305 and causes the communication unit 306 to use the connection management information. . Further, every time the communication unit 306 disconnects from an external device, the connection management unit 311 receives information related to the connection from the communication unit 306 and updates the connection management information using the information. The connection management unit 311 also uses the connection management information to check the history of the recording device 110 and the playback devices A131 to D134 from the latest connection to the connection a certain number of times ago. Calculate the number of connection operations per month or year. The number of times is called connection frequency. The connection frequency is stored in the storage unit 305 as part of the connection management information.
 転送部312は、通信部306が各再生装置131-134との接続を確立する度に、その確立の通知を接続管理部311から受ける。転送部312はその通知に応じて、接続先の再生装置へ録画予約情報と復号可能な符号化形式の一覧とを要求する。転送部312は更に、それらの情報をその再生装置から受信して符号化形式選択部313へ渡す。 The transfer unit 312 receives a notification of establishment from the connection management unit 311 each time the communication unit 306 establishes a connection with each playback device 131-134. In response to the notification, the transfer unit 312 requests recording reservation information and a list of encoding formats that can be decoded from the connected playback device. The transfer unit 312 further receives the information from the playback device and passes the information to the encoding format selection unit 313.
 転送部312は、通信部306が記録装置110との接続を確立したことを接続管理部311から通知された場合、録画予約情報を符号化形式選択部313から取得して、記録装置110へ送信する。続いて、記録装置110から録画完了通知を受信した場合、転送部312はその通知に応じて、符号化形式選択部313に符号化形式の選択を要求する。選択対象の符号化形式は、録画完了通知の示すコンテンツを記録装置110が記憶部305へ転送する際に利用すべきものである。転送部312はまた、録画されたコンテンツの符号化形式とデータ量とを録画完了通知から読み取って符号化形式選択部313へ渡し、符号化形式の選択に利用させる。符号化形式選択部313によって符号化形式が選択された後、転送部312はその符号化形式を転送要求に設定し、その転送要求を記録装置110へ送信する。転送部312は続いて、その転送要求の返信として所望のコンテンツを記録装置110から受信して記憶部305に格納する。 When the connection unit 311 is notified that the communication unit 306 has established a connection with the recording device 110, the transfer unit 312 acquires the recording reservation information from the encoding format selection unit 313 and transmits the recording reservation information to the recording device 110. To do. Subsequently, when a recording completion notification is received from the recording device 110, the transfer unit 312 requests the encoding format selection unit 313 to select an encoding format in response to the notification. The encoding format to be selected should be used when the recording device 110 transfers the content indicated by the recording completion notification to the storage unit 305. The transfer unit 312 also reads the encoded format and data amount of the recorded content from the recording completion notification and passes them to the encoding format selection unit 313 to be used for selecting the encoding format. After the encoding format is selected by the encoding format selection unit 313, the transfer unit 312 sets the encoding format to a transfer request and transmits the transfer request to the recording device 110. Subsequently, the transfer unit 312 receives the desired content from the recording device 110 as a reply to the transfer request and stores it in the storage unit 305.
 その後、転送部312は、通信部306が再生装置A131-D134のいずれかとの接続を確立したことを接続管理部311から通知された際、接続先の再生装置に関する符号化形式管理情報を符号化形式選択部313から取得する。符号化形式管理情報は、各再生装置131-134の識別情報に、その再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式の一覧を対応付けた情報である。転送部312は更に、その符号化形式管理情報に基づいてコンテンツの一覧を生成してその再生装置へ送信する。そのコンテンツの一覧は、記憶部305に格納されたコンテンツのうち、その再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式で符号化されたコンテンツの識別情報を示す。更に、その再生装置から再生要求が返信された場合、転送部312は、その再生要求の示すコンテンツを記憶部305からその再生装置へ転送する。その転送動作の終了後、転送部312は、コンテンツの再生時間、符号化形式、及びデータ量等、転送動作に関する情報を符号化形式選択部313へ通知する。 Thereafter, when the transfer unit 312 is notified from the connection management unit 311 that the communication unit 306 has established a connection with any one of the playback devices A131 to D134, the transfer unit 312 encodes the encoding format management information related to the playback device to which it is connected. Obtained from the format selection unit 313. The encoding format management information is information in which a list of encoding formats that can be decoded by the playback device is associated with the identification information of each playback device 131-134. Further, the transfer unit 312 generates a list of contents based on the encoding format management information and transmits it to the playback device. The list of contents indicates identification information of contents encoded in an encoding format that can be decoded by the playback apparatus, among the contents stored in the storage unit 305. Further, when a playback request is returned from the playback device, the transfer unit 312 transfers the content indicated by the playback request from the storage unit 305 to the playback device. After the end of the transfer operation, the transfer unit 312 notifies the encoding format selection unit 313 of information related to the transfer operation, such as content playback time, encoding format, and data amount.
 符号化形式選択部313は、転送部312がコンテンツを記憶部305からいずれかの再生装置へ転送する度に、転送部312からその転送動作に関する情報を取得し、その情報に基づいて、記憶部305に格納されたその再生装置に関する再生管理情報を更新する。再生管理情報は、通信部306に接続可能な再生装置A131-D134のそれぞれの識別情報に、その再生装置の再生履歴を対応付けた情報である。その再生履歴は、転送装置120がその再生装置に対して行ったコンテンツの転送動作の履歴を表す。符号化形式選択部313はまた、再生管理情報を参照して、各再生装置131-134に対して転送装置120が行った最新の転送動作から一定回数前、例えば10回前の転送動作までの履歴を調べ、その履歴から各再生装置131-134の再生頻度を算定する。再生頻度は、1週間、1月、又は1年当たりの転送動作の回数として表現される。再生頻度は再生管理情報の一部として記憶部305に格納される。 Each time the transfer unit 312 transfers the content from the storage unit 305 to one of the playback devices, the encoding format selection unit 313 acquires information on the transfer operation from the transfer unit 312 and based on the information, the storage unit The playback management information related to the playback device stored in 305 is updated. The reproduction management information is information in which the reproduction history of each reproduction apparatus A131-D134 that can be connected to the communication unit 306 is associated with the reproduction history of the reproduction apparatus. The reproduction history represents a history of content transfer operations performed by the transfer device 120 on the reproduction device. The encoding format selection unit 313 also refers to the reproduction management information to perform a certain number of times before the transfer operation, for example, 10 times before the latest transfer operation performed by the transfer device 120 for each of the reproduction devices 131-134. The history is checked, and the playback frequency of each playback device 131-134 is calculated from the history. The reproduction frequency is expressed as the number of transfer operations per week, January, or year. The reproduction frequency is stored in the storage unit 305 as part of the reproduction management information.
 符号化形式選択部313は、録画予約情報を転送部312から受信した場合、その録画予約情報を記憶部305に格納する。符号化形式選択部313はまた、転送部312からの要求に応じて、所望の録画予約情報を記憶部305から読み出して転送部312へ渡す。一方、符号化形式選択部313は、いずれかの再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式の一覧を転送部312から受信した場合、その一覧に基づいて、記憶部305に格納された符号化形式管理情報を更新する。符号化形式選択部313は更に、その再生装置に関する再生管理情報を参照して、その再生装置に対して転送装置120が行った最新の転送動作から一定回数前、例えば10回前の転送動作までの履歴を調べる。その上で符号化形式選択部313は、その履歴から、その再生装置が1時間当たりに再生する平均的なデータ量を算定して、符号化形式管理情報に組み込む。 When receiving the recording reservation information from the transfer unit 312, the encoding format selection unit 313 stores the recording reservation information in the storage unit 305. The encoding format selection unit 313 also reads out desired recording reservation information from the storage unit 305 and passes it to the transfer unit 312 in response to a request from the transfer unit 312. On the other hand, when the encoding format selection unit 313 receives from the transfer unit 312 a list of encoding formats that can be decoded by any of the playback devices, the encoding format management unit 313 manages the encoding format stored in the storage unit 305 based on the list. Update information. The encoding format selection unit 313 further refers to the reproduction management information related to the reproduction device, and from the latest transfer operation performed by the transfer device 120 to the reproduction device until a certain number of times before the transfer operation, for example, ten times before. Check the history of. Then, the encoding format selection unit 313 calculates an average amount of data that the playback device reproduces per hour from the history and incorporates it in the encoding format management information.
 符号化形式選択部313は記憶部305の使用状況、具体的には、データが記録されている記憶部305の領域、すなわち使用領域の変化を監視する。符号化形式選択部313は更に、転送部312から符号化形式の選択を要求されたとき、記憶部305の使用状況に基づいて使用領域のサイズを算定し、そのサイズを閾値と比較する。例えば記憶部305の容量が10GBである場合、その閾値は7GBに設定される。 The encoding format selection unit 313 monitors the usage status of the storage unit 305, specifically, the area of the storage unit 305 in which data is recorded, that is, the change of the usage area. Further, when the encoding unit selection unit 313 is requested by the transfer unit 312 to select an encoding format, the encoding format selection unit 313 calculates the size of the used area based on the usage status of the storage unit 305 and compares the size with a threshold value. For example, when the capacity of the storage unit 305 is 10 GB, the threshold value is set to 7 GB.
 記憶部305の使用領域のサイズが閾値を超えていない場合、記憶部305の空き容量が十分に大きい。符号化形式選択部313は記憶部305内の接続管理情報を参照して、通信部306との接続頻度が所定値よりも高い再生装置をコンテンツの転送先に設定する。その所定値は、接続頻度が少なくともどの程度であれば、その再生装置をコンテンツの再生に利用する可能性があるかによって決まる。特にその所定値が0である場合、過去に転送装置120と一度でも接続されたことのある再生装置は全て、コンテンツの転送先に設定される。 When the size of the used area of the storage unit 305 does not exceed the threshold, the free capacity of the storage unit 305 is sufficiently large. The encoding format selection unit 313 refers to the connection management information in the storage unit 305 and sets a playback device whose connection frequency with the communication unit 306 is higher than a predetermined value as a content transfer destination. The predetermined value depends on at least how often the connection frequency is likely to be used for reproducing the content. In particular, when the predetermined value is 0, all playback devices that have been connected to the transfer device 120 in the past are set as content transfer destinations.
 記憶部305の使用領域のサイズが閾値を超えている場合、記憶部305の空き容量が不足する可能性が高いので、転送先の再生装置の台数を制限することによって、記憶部305に記録されるべきコンテンツのデータ量を制限する必要がある。符号化形式選択部313はまず、記憶部305内の再生管理情報から各再生装置131-134の再生頻度を取得する。符号化形式選択部313は次に、再生装置A131-D134の中から1台以上を、再生頻度の高い順にコンテンツの転送先として選択する。そのとき、転送先の再生装置の台数は次のように制限される。符号化形式選択部313はまず、記録装置110によって録画されたコンテンツのうち、記憶部305へまだ転送されていないもの(以下、未視聴録画コンテンツという。)を特定する。符号化形式選択部313は次に、転送先の再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式で未視聴録画コンテンツを符号化することによって得られるデータ量を予測する。具体的には、符号化形式選択部313は、録画予約情報からは未視聴録画コンテンツの録画時間を読み取り、符号化形式管理情報からは、転送先の再生装置が1時間当たりに再生する平均的なデータ量を読み取り、その録画時間と平均的なデータ量との積を予測値として計算する。こうして予測されたデータ量が記憶部305の空き容量を超えないように、符号化形式選択部313は転送先の再生装置の台数を制限する。 If the size of the used area of the storage unit 305 exceeds the threshold, there is a high possibility that the free space of the storage unit 305 will be insufficient.Therefore, by limiting the number of transfer destination playback devices, it is recorded in the storage unit 305. There is a need to limit the amount of content data that should be. First, the encoding format selection unit 313 acquires the reproduction frequency of each reproduction device 131-134 from the reproduction management information in the storage unit 305. Next, the encoding format selection unit 313 selects one or more of the playback devices A131 to D134 as content transfer destinations in descending order of playback frequency. At that time, the number of transfer destination playback devices is limited as follows. First, the encoding format selection unit 313 identifies content recorded by the recording device 110 that has not yet been transferred to the storage unit 305 (hereinafter referred to as unviewed recorded content). Next, the encoding format selection unit 313 predicts the amount of data obtained by encoding the unviewed recorded content in an encoding format that can be decoded by the playback apparatus of the transfer destination. Specifically, the encoding format selection unit 313 reads the recording time of the unviewed recorded content from the recording reservation information, and from the encoding format management information, the transfer destination playback device reproduces the average per hour. The data amount is read, and the product of the recording time and the average data amount is calculated as a predicted value. The encoding format selection unit 313 limits the number of transfer destination playback devices so that the predicted data amount does not exceed the free capacity of the storage unit 305.
 符号化形式選択部313は続いて、記憶部305内の符号化形式管理情報を参照し、コンテンツの転送先の再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式を選択候補として特定する。符号化形式選択部313は更に、記憶部305内の再生管理情報が示す再生頻度と再生履歴とから、選択候補の各符号化形式が転送装置120からいずれかの再生装置へのコンテンツの転送に利用された頻度を算定する。その上で符号化形式選択部313は、選択候補の符号化形式の中から1つ以上の符号化形式を、上記の頻度が高い順に選択する。その選択処理では、符号化形式選択部313はまず、選択された符号化形式で所望のコンテンツを符号化することによって得られるデータ量を予測する。その予測処理には、録画完了通知の示すコンテンツの符号化形式とデータ量とが利用される。符号化形式選択部313は次に、予測されたデータ量が記憶部305の空き容量を超えないように、選択される符号化形式の数を制限する。記憶部305の使用領域のサイズが閾値を超えている場合、符号化形式選択部313は、転送先以外の再生装置のみによって復号可能な符号化データを記憶部305から削除する。それにより、符号化形式選択部313は記憶部305の空き容量を可能な限り拡大して、所望のコンテンツを可能な限り多くの符号化形式で記憶部305に記録できるようにする。こうして選択された符号化形式を符号化形式選択部313は、記録装置110が転送装置120へ所望のコンテンツを記録する際に利用すべき符号化形式として決定し、転送部312へ通知する。 Subsequently, the encoding format selection unit 313 refers to the encoding format management information in the storage unit 305, and identifies an encoding format that can be decoded by the playback apparatus of the content transfer destination as a selection candidate. Further, the encoding format selection unit 313 transfers the content from the transfer device 120 to any one of the playback devices based on the playback frequency and playback history indicated by the playback management information in the storage unit 305. Calculate the frequency of use. After that, the encoding format selection unit 313 selects one or more encoding formats from the selection candidate encoding formats in the order of the above-mentioned frequency. In the selection process, the encoding format selection unit 313 first predicts the data amount obtained by encoding the desired content in the selected encoding format. In the prediction process, the content encoding format and the data amount indicated by the recording completion notification are used. Next, the encoding format selection unit 313 limits the number of encoding formats to be selected so that the predicted data amount does not exceed the free capacity of the storage unit 305. When the size of the used area in the storage unit 305 exceeds the threshold, the encoding format selection unit 313 deletes from the storage unit 305 encoded data that can be decoded only by a playback device other than the transfer destination. As a result, the encoding format selection unit 313 expands the free capacity of the storage unit 305 as much as possible so that desired content can be recorded in the storage unit 305 in as many encoding formats as possible. The encoding format selection unit 313 determines the encoding format thus selected as an encoding format to be used when the recording device 110 records desired content on the transfer device 120 and notifies the transfer unit 312 of the encoding format.
  [接続管理情報] [Connection management information]
 図4の(a)は、転送装置120の記憶部305に格納された接続管理情報のデータ構造を示す表である。図4の(a)を参照するに、接続管理情報は、接続対象の装置の識別情報に接続頻度と接続履歴とを対応付けている。接続履歴は、接続対象の装置のそれぞれが転送装置120の通信部306と、現在から所定期間前、例えば1年前までの間に行った接続動作の日付と、その接続が維持された時間との対を示す。例えば図4の(a)によれば、再生装置A131は転送装置120の通信部306との接続を、2月21日に10分間維持し、2月22日に30分間維持し、2月24日に40分間維持している。一方、再生装置B132は転送装置120の通信部306との接続を、1月5日に5分間維持している。接続頻度は、転送装置120の接続管理部311によって、最新の接続から一定回数前、例えば10回前の接続までの履歴から算定される。例えば図4の(a)によれば、再生装置A131は転送装置120の通信部306との最新の接続から10回前の接続までを、平均して週に3回の頻度で行っている。 4A is a table showing the data structure of connection management information stored in the storage unit 305 of the transfer device 120. FIG. Referring to FIG. 4A, in the connection management information, the connection frequency and the connection history are associated with the identification information of the connection target device. The connection history includes the communication unit 306 of the transfer device 120 for each connection target device, the date of the connection operation performed between the present and a predetermined period before, for example, one year ago, and the time that the connection was maintained. A pair of For example, according to FIG. 4A, the playback device A131 maintains the connection with the communication unit 306 of the transfer device 120 for 10 minutes on February 21, 30 minutes on February 22, and 24 February. Maintain 40 minutes a day. On the other hand, the playback apparatus B132 maintains the connection with the communication unit 306 of the transfer apparatus 120 for 5 minutes on January 5. The connection frequency is calculated by the connection management unit 311 of the transfer device 120 from the history up to a certain number of times before the latest connection, for example, the connection 10 times before. For example, according to (a) of FIG. 4, the playback device A 131 performs the average connection from the latest connection with the communication unit 306 of the transfer device 120 to the previous connection 10 times at a frequency of 3 times a week.
  [符号化形式管理情報] [Encoding format management information]
 図4の(b)は、転送装置120の記憶部305に格納された符号化形式管理情報のデータ構造を示す表である。図4の(b)を参照するに、符号化形式管理情報は、再生装置A131-D134のそれぞれの識別情報に、符号化形式のフォーマットと解像度、及び、1時間当たりの平均的なデータ量を対応付けている。符号化形式のフォーマットと解像度とは、対応付けられた再生装置によって復号可能なものを表す。1時間当たりの平均的なデータ量は、対応付けられた再生装置が1時間当たりに再生する平均的なデータ量を表す。例えば、再生装置A131は、MPEG4とH264/AVCとで符号化されたコンテンツを復号可能である。更に、再生装置A131は、MPEG4で符号化されたコンテンツを1時間当たり、平均して500MBずつ再生する。 FIG. 4B is a table showing the data structure of the encoding format management information stored in the storage unit 305 of the transfer device 120. Referring to (b) of FIG. 4, the encoding format management information includes the encoding format and resolution, and the average amount of data per hour in the identification information of each of the playback devices A131 to D134. Corresponds. The format and resolution of the encoding format represent those that can be decoded by the associated playback device. The average data amount per hour represents the average data amount that the associated playback device plays back per hour. For example, the playback device A131 can decode content encoded with MPEG4 and H264 / AVC. Further, the playback device A131 plays back the content encoded in MPEG4 on an average of 500 MB per hour.
  [再生管理情報] [Reproduction management information]
 図4の(c)は、転送装置120の記憶部305に格納された再生管理情報のデータ構造を示す表である。図4の(c)を参照するに、再生管理情報は再生装置A131-D134のそれぞれの識別情報に、その再生装置の再生頻度と再生履歴とを対応付けている。 (C) of FIG. 4 is a table showing a data structure of the reproduction management information stored in the storage unit 305 of the transfer device 120. Referring to (c) of FIG. 4, in the reproduction management information, the reproduction frequency and reproduction history of the reproduction device are associated with the identification information of each of the reproduction devices A131 to D134.
 再生履歴は、日付、再生時間、符号化形式、及びデータ量を項目として含む。「日付」は、転送装置120が現在から所定期間前、例えば1年前までの間に、再生装置A131-D134へコンテンツを転送した日付を表す。「再生時間」は、再生装置A131-D134へ転送されたコンテンツが再生された時間を表す。転送がストリーミング方式であれば、再生時間は転送時間に等しく、ダウンロード方式であれば、再生時間は、コンテンツのうち、転送された部分の再生時間を示す。「符号化形式」は、転送されたコンテンツの符号化形式を表す。「データ量」は、転送されたコンテンツのデータ量を表す。例えば図4の(c)によれば、再生装置A131は転送装置120から、1月5日に再生時間50分のコンテンツを受け、2月1日に再生時間30分のコンテンツを受け、2月8日に再生時間20分のコンテンツを受け、2月15日に再生時間30分のコンテンツを受けている。一方、再生装置B132は現在から所定期間前までの間に、転送装置120からコンテンツを一度も受けていない。更に、再生装置A131が1月5日に転送装置120から受けたコンテンツはMPEG4 720pで符号化され、データ量は400MBである。 The playback history includes items such as date, playback time, encoding format, and data volume. “Date” represents the date when the transfer device 120 transferred the content to the playback devices A 131 to D 134 before a predetermined period from the present, for example, one year ago. “Reproduction time” represents the time when the content transferred to the reproduction devices A131 to D134 was reproduced. If the transfer is a streaming system, the playback time is equal to the transfer time. If the transfer is a download system, the playback time indicates the playback time of the transferred part of the content. The “encoding format” represents the encoding format of the transferred content. “Data amount” represents the data amount of the transferred content. For example, according to FIG. 4C, the playback device A131 receives content of 50 minutes playback time on January 5 from the transfer device 120, and receives content of 30 minutes playback time on February 1. Receiving content with a playback time of 20 minutes on the 8th, receiving content with a playback time of 30 minutes on February 15. On the other hand, the playback device B132 has not received any content from the transfer device 120 between now and a predetermined period. Furthermore, the content received by the playback device A131 from the transfer device 120 on January 5 is encoded by MPEG4 720p, and the data amount is 400 MB.
 再生頻度は、再生装置A131-D134のそれぞれに対して転送装置120が行った最新の転送動作から一定回数前、例えば10回前の転送動作までの履歴から算定される。例えば図4の(c)によれば、再生装置A131は転送装置120からコンテンツを、平均して週に1回の頻度で受けている。また、符号化形式「MPEG4 720p」は、平均して1月に3回の頻度で、転送装置120から再生装置A131へのコンテンツの転送に利用されている。 The reproduction frequency is calculated from the history up to a certain number of times before the latest transfer operation performed by the transfer device 120 for each of the reproduction devices A131 to D134, for example, up to 10 times before the transfer operation. For example, according to FIG. 4C, the playback device A131 receives the content from the transfer device 120 on an average once a week. Also, the encoding format “MPEG4 720p” is used for transferring content from the transfer device 120 to the playback device A131 with an average of three times a month.
  [再生装置の構成] [Configuration of playback device]
 図5は、図1に示されている各再生装置131-134に共通する構成を示すブロック図である。図5を参照するに、再生装置130は、デジタル・チューナ501、制御部502、表示部503、I/F504、操作部505、I/Oポート506、及び通信部507を備えている。デジタル・チューナ501は、再生装置130の外部のアンテナANT、又は再生装置130に内蔵のアンテナに接続され、そのアンテナANTを通してデジタル放送波を受信し、その放送波から所望の情報を復調する。制御部502は、CPU、RAM、及び不揮発性メモリを含む。制御部502は、不揮発性メモリに記憶されたファームウェアをCPUが実行することによって機能し、再生装置130の他の要素を制御する。制御部502は特に、デジタル・チューナ501によって復調された情報、及び転送装置120から転送されたデータから、映像コンテンツを復号する。表示部503は表示パネルを含み、制御部502によって復号された映像コンテンツの表す映像をその表示パネルに再現する。I/F504は制御部502と他の要素505-507との間でデータを中継する。操作部505は、外部のリモコンRMCから無線信号を受け、又は、再生装置130のフロントパネルに備えられたボタンから、その押下を示す信号を受ける。操作部505は更に、それらの信号の示す機能を解読して、その機能の実行を制御部502に指示する。I/Oポート506は、メモリカード又はUSBメモリ等のメモリ装置MCDに対するコネクタであり、それらのメモリ装置MCDとI/F504との間でデータを中継する。通信部507は、USB若しくはEthernet等の有線方式、又は、WiFi、Bluetooth、若しくはNFC等の無線方式により、転送装置120及びインターネットと通信可能である。 FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a configuration common to the playback devices 131-134 shown in FIG. Referring to FIG. 5, the playback device 130 includes a digital tuner 501, a control unit 502, a display unit 503, an I / F 504, an operation unit 505, an I / O port 506, and a communication unit 507. The digital tuner 501 is connected to an antenna ANT external to the playback device 130 or an antenna built in the playback device 130, receives a digital broadcast wave through the antenna ANT, and demodulates desired information from the broadcast wave. The control unit 502 includes a CPU, a RAM, and a nonvolatile memory. The control unit 502 functions when the CPU executes the firmware stored in the nonvolatile memory, and controls other elements of the playback device 130. In particular, the control unit 502 decodes video content from the information demodulated by the digital tuner 501 and the data transferred from the transfer device 120. The display unit 503 includes a display panel, and reproduces the video represented by the video content decoded by the control unit 502 on the display panel. The I / F 504 relays data between the control unit 502 and other elements 505-507. The operation unit 505 receives a radio signal from the external remote controller RMC, or receives a signal indicating that the button is pressed from a button provided on the front panel of the playback device 130. The operation unit 505 further decodes the function indicated by these signals and instructs the control unit 502 to execute the function. The I / O port 506 is a connector for a memory device MCD such as a memory card or a USB memory, and relays data between the memory device MCD and the I / F 504. The communication unit 507 can communicate with the transfer device 120 and the Internet by a wired method such as USB or Ethernet, or a wireless method such as WiFi, Bluetooth, or NFC.
 制御部502は、CPUによって実行されるファームウェアの種類により様々な機能部として動作する。それらの機能部は、再生部521、録画予約部522、及び接続管理部523を含む。 The control unit 502 operates as various functional units depending on the type of firmware executed by the CPU. These functional units include a playback unit 521, a recording reservation unit 522, and a connection management unit 523.
 再生部521は、デジタル・チューナ501によって復調された映像コンテンツを復号する。再生部521はまた、通信部507を通して転送装置120から転送された映像コンテンツを復号する。再生部521は更に、復号後の映像コンテンツを表示部503へ送信して、その映像コンテンツの表す映像を表示部503に再生させる。特に、転送装置120から転送されたコンテンツを表示部503に再生させる場合、再生部521はまず、転送装置120からコンテンツの一覧を受信して表示部503に表示させ、ユーザに再生対象のコンテンツの指定を促す。その後、操作部505がユーザの指示に従って再生対象のコンテンツの識別情報を特定した場合、再生部521はその識別情報を再生要求に設定して、通信部507にその再生要求を転送装置120へ送信させる。再生部521は続いて、その再生要求に応じて転送装置120から通信部507へ転送されるコンテンツを復号し、表示部503に再生させる。その再生処理は、ストリーミング方式で行われても、ダウンロード方式で行われてもよい。 The playback unit 521 decodes the video content demodulated by the digital tuner 501. The playback unit 521 also decodes the video content transferred from the transfer device 120 through the communication unit 507. The playback unit 521 further transmits the decoded video content to the display unit 503, and causes the display unit 503 to play back the video represented by the video content. In particular, when the content transferred from the transfer device 120 is played back on the display unit 503, the playback unit 521 first receives a list of content from the transfer device 120 and displays it on the display unit 503, and allows the user to select the content to be played back. Prompt for specification. After that, when the operation unit 505 identifies the identification information of the content to be played according to the user's instruction, the playback unit 521 sets the identification information as a playback request and transmits the playback request to the communication unit 507 to the transfer device 120. Let Subsequently, the playback unit 521 decrypts the content transferred from the transfer device 120 to the communication unit 507 in response to the playback request, and causes the display unit 503 to play back the content. The reproduction process may be performed by a streaming method or a download method.
 再生部521はその他に、復号可能な符号化形式の一覧を保持している。通信部507が転送装置120との接続を確立したことを接続管理部523から通知された際に、再生部521はその一覧を転送装置120へ送信する。 In addition, the playback unit 521 holds a list of encoding formats that can be decoded. When the communication unit 507 is notified from the connection management unit 523 that the connection with the transfer device 120 has been established, the playback unit 521 transmits the list to the transfer device 120.
 録画予約部522は、デジタル・チューナ501によって復調された情報、又は通信部507を通してインターネットから取得された情報に基づいてEPGを生成し、表示部503に表示させて、ユーザに録画予約を促す。録画予約部522は更に、操作部505を通してユーザの指示を受け付けて、その指示に従って録画予約情報を生成する。録画予約部522は更に、通信部507が転送装置120との間に接続を確立した際に、録画予約情報を転送装置120へ送信する。 The recording reservation unit 522 generates an EPG based on information demodulated by the digital tuner 501 or information acquired from the Internet through the communication unit 507 and displays it on the display unit 503 to prompt the user to make a recording reservation. The recording reservation unit 522 further receives a user instruction through the operation unit 505, and generates recording reservation information according to the instruction. The recording reservation unit 522 further transmits recording reservation information to the transfer device 120 when the communication unit 507 establishes a connection with the transfer device 120.
 接続管理部523は、通信部507が転送装置120等、外部の装置との接続を確立する際に、その接続先の装置に関する接続管理情報を通信部507に利用させる。接続管理部523は更に、通信部507が外部の装置との接続を切断する度に、その接続に関する情報を通信部507から受け付けて、その情報を利用して接続管理情報を更新する。 The connection management unit 523 causes the communication unit 507 to use connection management information regarding the connection destination device when the communication unit 507 establishes a connection with an external device such as the transfer device 120. Further, each time the communication unit 507 disconnects the connection with an external device, the connection management unit 523 receives information regarding the connection from the communication unit 507 and updates the connection management information using the information.
  [コンテンツの一覧を利用した再生対象のコンテンツの指定] [Specify the content to be played using the content list]
 図6の(a)は、再生装置130の表示部503によって表示されたコンテンツの一覧の一例を示す模式図である。図6の(a)を参照するに、コンテンツの一覧は、コンテンツのタイトル、録画の日付、及び録画時間を項目として含む。「コンテンツのタイトル」は、転送装置120の記憶部305に格納されたコンテンツのうち、再生装置130の再生部521によって復号可能な符号化形式で符号化されたコンテンツのタイトルを示す。ユーザはこの一覧を見ながらリモコンを操作し、例えば番組「ドラマ2」に関する項目にカーソルを合わせて決定ボタンを押す。図6の(a)に示されている斜線部はカーソルを表す。再生装置130の操作部505はリモコンからの信号に基づいて、番組「ドラマ2」の識別情報を特定する。再生部521はその識別情報を再生要求に設定する。 (A) of FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a list of contents displayed by the display unit 503 of the playback device 130. Referring to FIG. 6A, the content list includes the content title, the recording date, and the recording time as items. “Content title” indicates a title of content encoded in an encoding format that can be decoded by the playback unit 521 of the playback device 130 among the content stored in the storage unit 305 of the transfer device 120. The user operates the remote controller while viewing this list, for example, moves the cursor to an item related to the program “Drama 2” and presses the enter button. A hatched portion shown in FIG. 6A represents a cursor. The operation unit 505 of the playback device 130 identifies the identification information of the program “Drama 2” based on the signal from the remote controller. The playback unit 521 sets the identification information in the playback request.
  [EPGを利用した録画予約] [Recording reservation using EPG]
 図6の(b)は、再生装置130の表示部503によって表示されたEPGの一例を示す模式図である。図6の(b)に示されているEPGは、○月×日の19時から23時までの放送番組の一覧を表している。ユーザはこのEPGを見ながらリモコンを操作し、例えばA放送局が20時から21時までに放送する予定の番組「ドラマ1」を示す項目にカーソルを合わせて決定ボタンを押す。図6の(b)に示されている斜線部はカーソルを表す。再生装置130の操作部505はリモコンからの信号に基づいて、番組「ドラマ1」の識別情報を特定する。録画予約部522は、その識別情報を用いてEPGから番組「ドラマ1」に関する情報を検索し、その情報に基づいて録画予約情報を生成する。その録画予約情報は、A放送局の識別情報、番組「ドラマ1」の識別情報、録画開始時刻「○月×日20:00」、録画時間「60分」、録画の画質、及び再生装置130の識別情報を含む。 FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of an EPG displayed by the display unit 503 of the playback device 130. The EPG shown in (b) of FIG. 6 represents a list of broadcast programs from 19:00 to 23:00 on the month and day. The user operates the remote controller while viewing this EPG, for example, moves the cursor to the item indicating the program “Drama 1” that is scheduled to be broadcast from the 20:00 to 21:00, and presses the enter button. A hatched portion shown in FIG. 6B represents a cursor. The operation unit 505 of the playback device 130 specifies identification information of the program “Drama 1” based on a signal from the remote controller. The recording reservation unit 522 searches the EPG for information relating to the program “Drama 1” using the identification information, and generates recording reservation information based on the information. The recording reservation information includes the identification information of the broadcasting station A, the identification information of the program “drama 1”, the recording start time “○ month × day 20:00”, the recording time “60 minutes”, the image quality of recording, and the playback device 130. Including identification information.
  [コンテンツの記録再生処理] [Content recording / playback processing]
 図7は、図1に示されているシステムによるコンテンツの記録再生処理のフローチャートである。この処理は、転送装置120が再生装置A131-D134のいずれかに接続されたときに開始される。 FIG. 7 is a flowchart of content recording / playback processing by the system shown in FIG. This process is started when the transfer device 120 is connected to one of the playback devices A131 to D134.
 ステップS701では、転送装置120に接続された再生装置130の再生部521が転送装置120へ、復号可能な符号化形式の一覧を送信する。更に、その再生装置130の録画予約部522が録画予約情報を転送装置120へ送信する。転送装置120はそれらの情報を記憶部305へ格納する。ここで、その再生装置130に関する符号化形式管理情報が転送装置120の記憶部305に既に格納されていれば、その再生装置130の再生部521は、復号可能な符号化形式の一覧を改めて送信しなくてもよい。その後、処理はステップS702へ進む。 In step S701, the playback unit 521 of the playback device 130 connected to the transfer device 120 transmits a list of encoding formats that can be decoded to the transfer device 120. Further, the recording reservation unit 522 of the playback device 130 transmits the recording reservation information to the transfer device 120. The transfer device 120 stores the information in the storage unit 305. Here, if the encoding format management information regarding the playback device 130 is already stored in the storage unit 305 of the transfer device 120, the playback unit 521 of the playback device 130 transmits a list of encoding formats that can be decoded again. You don't have to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.
 ステップS702では、転送装置120の通信部306が記録装置110との接続を確立した際、転送装置120の転送部312が記録装置110へ録画予約情報を転送する。そのとき、記録装置110では、録画部221がその録画予約情報を受け付けて、転送装置120の識別情報と共に転送部223へ通知する。転送部223はその通知に応じて、録画予約情報と転送装置120の識別情報との対を記憶部208に格納する。その後、処理はステップS703へ進む。 In step S702, when the communication unit 306 of the transfer device 120 establishes a connection with the recording device 110, the transfer unit 312 of the transfer device 120 transfers the recording reservation information to the recording device 110. At that time, in the recording device 110, the recording unit 221 accepts the recording reservation information and notifies the transfer unit 223 together with the identification information of the transfer device 120. In response to the notification, the transfer unit 223 stores the pair of the recording reservation information and the identification information of the transfer device 120 in the storage unit 208. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S703.
 ステップS703では、記録装置110の録画部221が、記憶部208に格納された録画予約情報に従って予約録画を行う。その予約録画が完了したとき、録画部221は録画完了通知を記録装置110の転送部223へ送信する。転送部223はその通知に応じて、その通知の示すコンテンツの識別情報を含む録画予約情報を記憶部208から検索し、その録画予約情報に対応付けられた転送装置120の識別情報を特定する。転送部223は更に、その識別情報を接続管理部222に利用させて、通信部209がその転送装置120との接続を確立したか否かを監視させる。その接続の確立が接続管理部222によって検出された場合、転送部223はその転送装置120へ録画完了通知を送信する。その後、処理はステップS704へ進む。 In step S703, the recording unit 221 of the recording apparatus 110 performs reserved recording according to the recording reservation information stored in the storage unit 208. When the reserved recording is completed, the recording unit 221 transmits a recording completion notification to the transfer unit 223 of the recording device 110. In response to the notification, the transfer unit 223 searches the storage unit 208 for recording reservation information including the content identification information indicated by the notification, and identifies the identification information of the transfer device 120 associated with the recording reservation information. The transfer unit 223 further causes the connection management unit 222 to use the identification information to monitor whether the communication unit 209 has established a connection with the transfer device 120. When the establishment of the connection is detected by the connection management unit 222, the transfer unit 223 transmits a recording completion notification to the transfer device 120. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S704.
 ステップS704では、転送装置120の転送部312が記録装置110から録画完了通知を受信した際、符号化形式選択部313に符号化形式の選択を要求する。符号化形式選択部313はその要求に応じて符号化形式を選択する。その選択処理の詳細については後述する。その選択処理の後、転送部312は、選択された符号化形式を転送要求に設定して、その転送要求を記録装置110へ送信する。その後、処理はステップS705へ進む。 In step S704, when the transfer unit 312 of the transfer device 120 receives the recording completion notification from the recording device 110, it requests the encoding format selection unit 313 to select the encoding format. The encoding format selection unit 313 selects an encoding format according to the request. Details of the selection process will be described later. After the selection process, the transfer unit 312 sets the selected encoding format as a transfer request, and transmits the transfer request to the recording device 110. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S705.
 ステップS705では、記録装置110の転送部223が転送要求に応じて、その転送要求の示すコンテンツを記憶部208から検索し、そのコンテンツの符号化形式が、その転送要求の示す符号化形式と一致するか否かを判断する。両方の符号化形式が一致した場合、転送部223はそのコンテンツをそのまま、記憶部208から転送装置120へ転送する。一方、両方の符号化形式が一致しなかった場合、転送部223は符号化部224にそのコンテンツの符号化形式を、転送要求の示す符号化形式に変換させ、その後、そのコンテンツを転送装置120へ転送する。転送装置120の転送部312はそのコンテンツを受信して記憶部305に格納する。その後、処理はステップS706へ進む。 In step S705, the transfer unit 223 of the recording apparatus 110 searches the storage unit 208 for the content indicated by the transfer request in response to the transfer request, and the encoding format of the content matches the encoding format indicated by the transfer request. Judge whether to do. If both encoding formats match, the transfer unit 223 transfers the content as it is from the storage unit 208 to the transfer device 120. On the other hand, if the two encoding formats do not match, the transfer unit 223 causes the encoding unit 224 to convert the encoding format of the content into the encoding format indicated by the transfer request, and then transfers the content to the transfer device 120. Forward to. The transfer unit 312 of the transfer device 120 receives the content and stores it in the storage unit 305. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S706.
 ステップS706では、転送装置120の通信部306が再生装置A131-D134のいずれかとの接続を確立した際、その転送装置120の転送部312が接続先の再生装置の識別情報に基づいて、その再生装置に関する符号化形式管理情報を参照する。転送部312は更に、その符号化形式管理情報に基づいてコンテンツの一覧を生成してその再生装置へ送信する。その後、処理はステップS707へ進む。 In step S706, when the communication unit 306 of the transfer device 120 establishes a connection with one of the playback devices A131 to D134, the transfer unit 312 of the transfer device 120 performs the playback based on the identification information of the playback device connected to the transfer device 120. Reference is made to encoding format management information related to the device. Further, the transfer unit 312 generates a list of contents based on the encoding format management information and transmits it to the playback device. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S707.
 ステップS707では、再生装置130の再生部521がコンテンツの一覧を転送装置120から受信して表示部503に表示させ、ユーザに再生対象のコンテンツの指定を促す。再生装置130の操作部505がユーザの指示を受け付けて、その指示に従って再生対象のコンテンツの識別情報を特定する。再生装置130の再生部521はその識別情報を再生要求に設定して、通信部507にその再生要求を転送装置120へ送信させる。その後、処理はステップS708へ進む。 In step S707, the playback unit 521 of the playback device 130 receives the content list from the transfer device 120 and displays it on the display unit 503 to prompt the user to specify the content to be played back. The operation unit 505 of the playback device 130 receives an instruction from the user, and specifies identification information of content to be played back according to the instruction. The playback unit 521 of the playback device 130 sets the identification information as a playback request, and causes the communication unit 507 to transmit the playback request to the transfer device 120. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S708.
 ステップS708では、転送装置120の転送部312は、再生装置130から再生要求が返信された際、その再生要求の示すコンテンツを記憶部305からその再生装置130へ転送する。再生装置130の再生部521は、通信部507によって受信されたコンテンツを復号し、表示部503に再生させる。一方、転送装置120の符号化形式選択部313は、そのコンテンツの転送が完了したときに再生管理情報を更新する。その後、処理は終了する。 In step S708, when the playback request is returned from the playback device 130, the transfer unit 312 of the transfer device 120 transfers the content indicated by the playback request from the storage unit 305 to the playback device 130. The playback unit 521 of the playback device 130 decrypts the content received by the communication unit 507 and causes the display unit 503 to play back the content. On the other hand, the encoding format selection unit 313 of the transfer device 120 updates the reproduction management information when the transfer of the content is completed. Thereafter, the process ends.
  [転送装置の符号化形式選択部の構成] [Configuration of transfer device encoding format selection unit]
 図8は、図3に示されている転送装置120の符号化形式選択部313の構成を示すブロック図である。図8を参照するに、符号化形式選択部313は、監視部801、録画予約管理部802、履歴管理部803、符号化形式管理部804、データ量予測部805、及び決定部806を含む。これらの機能部801-806は、制御部301内のCPUが所定のファームウェアを実行することによって動作する。 FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the encoding format selection unit 313 of the transfer apparatus 120 shown in FIG. Referring to FIG. 8, the encoding format selection unit 313 includes a monitoring unit 801, a recording reservation management unit 802, a history management unit 803, an encoding format management unit 804, a data amount prediction unit 805, and a determination unit 806. These functional units 801 to 806 operate when a CPU in the control unit 301 executes predetermined firmware.
 監視部801は転送装置120の記憶部305の使用状況を監視する。監視部801は更に、決定部806からの問い合わせに応じて、記憶部305の使用状況に基づいて使用領域のサイズを算定し、そのサイズを閾値と比較する。その比較結果は、問い合わせの返信として決定部806へ通知される。 The monitoring unit 801 monitors the usage status of the storage unit 305 of the transfer device 120. Further, in response to the inquiry from the determination unit 806, the monitoring unit 801 calculates the size of the usage area based on the usage status of the storage unit 305, and compares the size with a threshold value. The comparison result is notified to the determination unit 806 as a reply to the inquiry.
 録画予約管理部802は、録画予約情報を転送装置120の転送部312から受信した場合、その録画予約情報を記憶部305に格納する。録画予約管理部802はまた、転送部312からの要求に応じて、所望の録画予約情報を記憶部305から読み出して転送部312に渡す。そのとき、録画予約管理部802は、記憶部305に格納された録画予約情報のそれぞれについて、その録画予約情報が記録装置110へ既に転送されたか否かを識別するための情報を更新する。録画予約管理部802は更に、転送部312が記録装置110から記憶部305へコンテンツを転送する度に、そのコンテンツの録画を記録装置110に対して指示する際に利用された録画予約情報を記憶部305から検索する。それにより、録画予約管理部802は、記憶部305に格納された録画予約情報のそれぞれについて、その録画予約情報の示すコンテンツが記録装置110から記憶部305へ既に転送されたか否かを識別するための情報を管理する。 When the recording reservation management unit 802 receives the recording reservation information from the transfer unit 312 of the transfer device 120, the recording reservation information is stored in the storage unit 305. In response to a request from the transfer unit 312, the recording reservation management unit 802 reads desired recording reservation information from the storage unit 305 and passes it to the transfer unit 312. At that time, the recording reservation management unit 802 updates information for identifying whether or not the recording reservation information has already been transferred to the recording device 110 for each of the recording reservation information stored in the storage unit 305. The recording reservation management unit 802 further stores recording reservation information used when the transfer unit 312 transfers content from the recording device 110 to the storage unit 305 and instructs the recording device 110 to record the content. Search from part 305. Thereby, the recording reservation management unit 802 identifies, for each recording reservation information stored in the storage unit 305, whether or not the content indicated by the recording reservation information has already been transferred from the recording device 110 to the storage unit 305. Manage information.
 録画予約管理部802はデータ量予測部805からの要求に応じて、記録装置110によって録画されたコンテンツのうち、記憶部305へまだ転送されていないものの間での録画時間の合計を次のように算定する。データ量予測部805はまず、記憶部305に格納された録画予約情報の中から次のものを検索する:その録画予約情報は記録装置110へ既に転送され、その録画予約情報の示す録画開始時刻は既に過ぎているが、その録画予約情報の示すコンテンツは記録装置110から記憶部305へまだ転送されていない。録画予約管理部802は次に、検索された録画予約情報の全体で録画時間を合計し、得られた値をデータ量予測部805へ渡す。 In response to a request from the data amount prediction unit 805, the recording reservation management unit 802 calculates the total recording time between the contents recorded by the recording device 110 but not yet transferred to the storage unit 305 as follows: To calculate. First, the data amount prediction unit 805 searches the recording reservation information stored in the storage unit 305 for the following: the recording reservation information has already been transferred to the recording device 110, and the recording start time indicated by the recording reservation information Has already passed, but the content indicated by the recording reservation information has not yet been transferred from the recording device 110 to the storage unit 305. Next, the recording reservation management unit 802 adds up the recording time with the entire searched recording reservation information, and passes the obtained value to the data amount prediction unit 805.
 履歴管理部803は、転送部312がコンテンツを記憶部305からいずれかの再生装置へ転送する度に、転送部312からその転送動作に関する情報を取得し、その情報に基づいて、記憶部305に格納されたその再生装置に関する再生管理情報を更新する。履歴管理部803はまた、再生管理情報を参照して、各再生装置131-134に対して転送装置120が行った最新の転送動作から一定回数前、例えば10回前の転送動作までの履歴を調べ、その履歴から各再生装置131-134の再生頻度を算定する。履歴管理部803はその再生頻度を再生管理情報の一部に組み込む。履歴管理部803は更に、決定部806からの要求に応じて、記憶部305内の再生管理情報から各再生装置131-134の再生頻度を読み取って決定部806へ渡す。 Each time the transfer unit 312 transfers content from the storage unit 305 to one of the playback devices, the history management unit 803 acquires information regarding the transfer operation from the transfer unit 312 and stores the information in the storage unit 305 based on the information. The stored reproduction management information relating to the reproduction apparatus is updated. The history management unit 803 also refers to the reproduction management information, and records the history from the latest transfer operation performed by the transfer device 120 to each of the playback devices 131 to 134 a certain number of times before, for example, the transfer operation 10 times before. The reproduction frequency of each reproduction device 131-134 is calculated from the history. The history management unit 803 incorporates the reproduction frequency into a part of the reproduction management information. Further, in response to a request from the determination unit 806, the history management unit 803 reads the reproduction frequency of each reproduction device 131-134 from the reproduction management information in the storage unit 305 and passes it to the determination unit 806.
 符号化形式管理部804は、いずれかの再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式の一覧を転送部312から受信した場合、その一覧に基づいて、記憶部305に格納された符号化形式管理情報を更新する。符号化形式管理部804は更に、その再生装置に関する再生管理情報を参照して、その再生装置に対して転送装置120が行った最新の転送動作から一定回数前、例えば10回前の転送動作までの履歴を調べる。その上で符号化形式選択部313は、その履歴から、その再生装置が1時間当たりに再生する平均的なデータ量を算定して、符号化形式管理情報に組み込む。符号化形式管理部804はまた、データ量予測部805又は決定部806からの要求に応じて符号化形式管理情報を記憶部305から読み出し、データ量予測部805又は決定部806へ渡す。 When the encoding format management unit 804 receives a list of encoding formats that can be decoded by any of the playback devices from the transfer unit 312, the encoding format management unit 804 stores the encoding format management information stored in the storage unit 305 based on the list. Update. The encoding format management unit 804 further refers to the playback management information related to the playback device, and from the latest transfer operation performed by the transfer device 120 to the playback device, for example, up to a transfer operation 10 times before, for example, Check the history of. Then, the encoding format selection unit 313 calculates an average amount of data that the playback device reproduces per hour from the history and incorporates it in the encoding format management information. The encoding format management unit 804 also reads encoding format management information from the storage unit 305 in response to a request from the data amount prediction unit 805 or the determination unit 806, and passes it to the data amount prediction unit 805 or the determination unit 806.
 データ量予測部805は決定部806からの要求に応じて、記録装置110によって録画されたコンテンツを特定の符号化形式で符号化することによって得られるデータ量を、次の2通りの方法のいずれかで予測する。 In response to a request from the determining unit 806, the data amount predicting unit 805 determines the data amount obtained by encoding the content recorded by the recording device 110 in a specific encoding format using any of the following two methods. Predict.
 第1の方法では、データ量予測部805はまず、未視聴録画コンテンツの録画時間を録画予約管理部802から取得する。その一方で、データ量予測部805は、各再生装置131-134に関する符号化形式管理情報を符号化形式管理部804から取得して、その符号化形式管理情報から、各再生装置131-134が1時間当たりに再生する平均的なデータ量を読み取る。データ量予測部805は次に、特定の再生装置が1時間当たりに再生する平均的なデータ量と、未視聴録画コンテンツの録画時間との積を予測値として計算する。 In the first method, the data amount prediction unit 805 first acquires the recording time of unviewed recorded content from the recording reservation management unit 802. On the other hand, the data amount prediction unit 805 obtains the encoding format management information related to each reproduction device 131-134 from the encoding format management unit 804, and each reproduction device 131-134 obtains the encoding format management information from the encoding format management information. Read the average amount of data to be played back per hour. Next, the data amount prediction unit 805 calculates, as a predicted value, the product of the average data amount that the specific playback device plays back per hour and the recording time of unviewed recorded content.
 第2の方法では、データ量予測部805はまず、転送部312が記録装置110から受信した録画完了通知からコンテンツの符号化形式とデータ量とを読み取る。データ量予測部805は次に、録画完了通知の示す符号化形式を特定の符号化形式へ変換する際のデータ量の変化率から、録画完了通知の示すデータ量のコンテンツを特定の符号化形式へ変換することによって得られるデータ量を予測値として計算する。ここで、データ量予測部805は予め、符号化形式の様々な対について、一方を他方へ変換する際のデータ量の変化率を記憶している。 In the second method, the data amount prediction unit 805 first reads the content encoding format and the data amount from the recording completion notification received by the transfer unit 312 from the recording device 110. Next, the data amount prediction unit 805 converts the content of the data amount indicated by the recording completion notification into the specific encoding format from the change rate of the data amount when the encoding format indicated by the recording completion notification is converted into the specific encoding format. The amount of data obtained by converting to is calculated as a predicted value. Here, the data amount prediction unit 805 stores in advance the rate of change of the data amount when converting one of the various pairs of encoding formats into the other.
 第1の方法は第2の方法よりも計算量が少ないので、予測値の計算が速い。一方、第2の方法は転送前のコンテンツのデータ量を予測に利用するので、第1の方法よりも正確な予測値を求めることができる。 The first method has a smaller amount of calculation than the second method, so the calculation of the predicted value is faster. On the other hand, since the second method uses the data amount of the content before transfer for prediction, a more accurate predicted value than that of the first method can be obtained.
 決定部806は、転送部312からの要求に応じて符号化形式を下記のように選択する。決定部806は更に、選択された符号化形式を、録画完了通知の示す転送対象のコンテンツを記録装置110が転送装置120へ転送する際に利用すべき符号化形式として決定し、転送部312へ通知する。 The determination unit 806 selects an encoding format as follows in response to a request from the transfer unit 312. The determination unit 806 further determines the selected encoding format as an encoding format to be used when the recording device 110 transfers the content to be transferred indicated by the recording completion notification to the transfer device 120, and sends it to the transfer unit 312. Notice.
 決定部806はまず、記憶部305の使用領域のサイズが閾値を超えているか否かを監視部801へ問い合わせる。使用領域のサイズが閾値を超えていない場合、決定部806は記憶部305内の接続管理情報を参照して、通信部306との接続頻度が0よりも高い再生装置をコンテンツの転送先に設定する。一方、使用領域のサイズが閾値を超えている場合、決定部806は、履歴管理部803から各再生装置131-134の再生頻度を取得して、再生装置A131-D134の中から1台以上を、再生頻度の高い順にコンテンツの転送先として選択する。そのとき、転送先の再生装置の台数は次のように制限される。決定部806はまず、転送先の再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式で未視聴録画コンテンツを符号化することによって得られるデータ量を、データ量予測部805に第1の方法で予測させる。決定部806は次に、予測されたデータ量が記憶部305の空き容量を超えないように、転送先の再生装置の台数を制限する。 First, the determination unit 806 inquires of the monitoring unit 801 whether or not the size of the used area of the storage unit 305 exceeds the threshold value. When the size of the used area does not exceed the threshold, the determination unit 806 refers to the connection management information in the storage unit 305 and sets a playback device having a connection frequency with the communication unit 306 higher than 0 as the content transfer destination To do. On the other hand, when the size of the used area exceeds the threshold, the determination unit 806 acquires the playback frequency of each playback device 131-134 from the history management unit 803, and selects one or more of the playback devices A131-D134. The content is selected as a transfer destination in descending order of reproduction frequency. At that time, the number of transfer destination playback devices is limited as follows. First, the determination unit 806 causes the data amount prediction unit 805 to predict the data amount obtained by encoding the unviewed recorded content in an encoding format that can be decoded by the transfer destination playback device using the first method. Next, the determination unit 806 limits the number of transfer destination playback devices so that the predicted data amount does not exceed the free capacity of the storage unit 305.
 決定部806は次に、転送先の再生装置に関する符号化形式管理情報を符号化形式管理部804から取得し、その符号化形式管理情報に基づいて、それらの再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式を選択候補として特定する。決定部806は続いて、録画完了通知の示す転送対象のコンテンツを選択候補の符号化形式で符号化することによって得られるデータ量を、データ量予測部805に第2の方法で予測させる。決定部806は更に、履歴管理部803から再生管理情報を取得し、その再生管理情報の示す再生頻度と再生履歴とから、選択候補の符号化形式のそれぞれが転送装置120から再生装置A131-D134のいずれかへのコンテンツの転送に利用された頻度を算定する。決定部806はその後、選択候補の符号化形式に対して、算定された頻度が高い順に優先順位を付け、選択候補の符号化形式から1つ以上の符号化形式を優先順位に従って選択する。そのとき、決定部806は、選択された符号化形式で転送対象のコンテンツを符号化することによって得られるデータ量が記憶部305の空き容量を超えないように、選択される符号化形式の数を制限する。決定部806はまた、記憶部305の使用領域のサイズが閾値を超えている場合、転送先以外の再生装置のみによって復号可能な符号化データを記憶部305から削除する。その際、削除対象の符号化データは、現時点までに再生に利用されたことがないもの及び古いもの等、再生に利用される可能性が低いものから順に、記憶部305の空き容量が転送対象のコンテンツのデータ量を超えるように選択される。それらの符号化データの削除により、決定部806は記憶部305の空き容量を可能な限り増大させ、転送対象のコンテンツを可能な限り多くの符号化形式で記憶部305に記録することができるようにする。 Next, the determination unit 806 obtains the encoding format management information related to the playback device at the transfer destination from the encoding format management unit 804, and based on the encoding format management information, the encoding format that can be decoded by these playback devices Are identified as selection candidates. Subsequently, the determination unit 806 causes the data amount prediction unit 805 to predict the data amount obtained by encoding the transfer target content indicated by the recording completion notification in the encoding format of the selection candidate by the second method. Further, the determination unit 806 acquires the reproduction management information from the history management unit 803, and from the reproduction frequency and the reproduction history indicated by the reproduction management information, each encoding format of the selection candidate is transferred from the transfer device 120 to the reproduction devices A131 to D134. Calculate the frequency used to transfer content to any of the above. The determination unit 806 then prioritizes the selection candidate encoding formats in descending order of the calculated frequency, and selects one or more encoding formats from the selection candidate encoding formats according to the priority order. At that time, the determination unit 806 determines the number of encoding formats to be selected so that the amount of data obtained by encoding the content to be transferred in the selected encoding format does not exceed the free capacity of the storage unit 305. Limit. The determining unit 806 also deletes, from the storage unit 305, encoded data that can be decoded only by a playback device other than the transfer destination when the size of the use area of the storage unit 305 exceeds the threshold value. At that time, the free data in the storage unit 305 is transferred in order from the data that is not likely to be used for playback, such as data that has not been used for playback and old data that has not been used for playback so far. It is selected so as to exceed the amount of content data. By deleting those encoded data, the determination unit 806 can increase the free capacity of the storage unit 305 as much as possible, and can record the content to be transferred in the storage unit 305 in as many encoding formats as possible. To.
  [転送装置による符号化形式の選択処理] [Encoding format selection process by transfer device]
 図9、10は、図7に示されているステップS704、すなわち、転送装置120による符号化形式の選択処理のフローチャートである。この処理は、転送装置120の転送部312が記録装置110から録画完了通知を受信することによって開始される。 9 and 10 are flowcharts of step S704 shown in FIG. 7, that is, the encoding format selection processing by the transfer apparatus 120. This process is started when the transfer unit 312 of the transfer device 120 receives a recording completion notification from the recording device 110.
 ステップS901では、転送部312が、記録装置110からの録画完了通知に応じて、符号化形式選択部313に符号化形式の選択を要求する。符号化形式選択部313では、決定部806が転送部312からの要求に応じて、記憶部305の使用領域のサイズを閾値と比較した結果を監視部801へ問い合わせる。その後、処理はステップS902へ進む。 In step S901, the transfer unit 312 requests the encoding format selection unit 313 to select an encoding format in response to the recording completion notification from the recording device 110. In the encoding format selection unit 313, in response to a request from the transfer unit 312, the determination unit 806 inquires of the monitoring unit 801 about the result of comparing the size of the used area of the storage unit 305 with the threshold value. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S902.
 ステップS902では、監視部801が決定部806からの問い合わせに応じて記憶部305の使用領域のサイズを算定し、そのサイズを閾値と比較した結果を決定部806へ通知する。使用領域のサイズが閾値を超えていない場合、処理はステップS903へ進む。使用領域のサイズが閾値を超えている場合、処理はステップS1001へ進む。 In step S902, the monitoring unit 801 calculates the size of the used area of the storage unit 305 in response to the inquiry from the determination unit 806, and notifies the determination unit 806 of the result of comparing the size with the threshold value. If the size of the used area does not exceed the threshold, the process proceeds to step S903. If the size of the used area exceeds the threshold, the process proceeds to step S1001.
 ステップS903では、使用領域のサイズが閾値を超えていないので、記憶部305の空き容量が十分に大きい。決定部806は記憶部305内の接続管理情報を参照して、通信部306との接続頻度が0よりも高い再生装置をコンテンツの転送先に設定する。それにより、接続履歴のある再生装置は全て転送先に設定される。その後、処理はステップS904へ進む。 In step S903, since the size of the used area does not exceed the threshold value, the free space in the storage unit 305 is sufficiently large. The determination unit 806 refers to the connection management information in the storage unit 305, and sets a playback device having a connection frequency with the communication unit 306 higher than 0 as a content transfer destination. As a result, all playback devices having a connection history are set as transfer destinations. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S904.
 ステップS904では、決定部806がまず、転送先の再生装置に関する符号化形式管理情報を符号化形式管理部804から取得し、その符号化形式管理情報に基づいて、それらの再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式を選択候補として特定する。決定部806は次に、録画完了通知の示す転送対象のコンテンツを選択候補の符号化形式で符号化することによって得られるデータ量を第2の方法で予測するように、データ量予測部805に要求する。データ量予測部805はその要求に応じて、録画完了通知の示す符号化形式を選択候補の符号化形式のそれぞれへ変換する際のデータ量の変化率と、録画完了通知の示すデータ量とから、予測値を計算する。その後、処理はステップS905へ進む。 In step S904, the determination unit 806 first acquires the encoding format management information related to the transfer destination playback device from the encoding format management unit 804, and can be decoded by those playback devices based on the encoding format management information. An encoding format is specified as a selection candidate. Next, the determination unit 806 instructs the data amount prediction unit 805 to predict the data amount obtained by encoding the transfer target content indicated by the recording completion notification in the encoding format of the selection candidate by the second method. Request. In response to the request, the data amount predicting unit 805 uses the data amount change rate when converting the encoding format indicated by the recording completion notification to each encoding format of the selection candidate and the data amount indicated by the recording completion notification. Calculate the predicted value. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S905.
 ステップS905では、決定部806はまず、履歴管理部803から再生管理情報を取得し、その再生管理情報の示す再生頻度と再生履歴とを用いて、選択候補の符号化形式のそれぞれが転送装置120から再生装置A131-D134のいずれかへのコンテンツの転送に利用された頻度を算定する。決定部806は次に、選択候補の符号化形式に対して、算定された頻度が高い順に優先順位を付ける。その後、処理はステップS906へ進む。 In step S905, the determination unit 806 first obtains the reproduction management information from the history management unit 803, and uses the reproduction frequency and the reproduction history indicated by the reproduction management information to indicate that each of the encoding formats of the selection candidates is the transfer device 120. The frequency used to transfer the content from one to the playback devices A131 to D134 is calculated. Next, the determination unit 806 gives priorities to the selection candidate encoding formats in descending order of the calculated frequency. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S906.
 ステップS906では、決定部806はまず、監視部801から記憶部305の空き容量を取得する。決定部806は次に、選択候補の符号化形式から1つ以上の符号化形式を優先順位に従って選択する。決定部806は次に、選択された符号化形式で転送対象のコンテンツを符号化することによって得られるデータ量の予測値をデータ量予測部805から取得して、記憶部305の空き容量と比較する。その予測値が空き容量を超えていなければ、決定部806は残りの選択候補から新たな符号化形式を優先順位に従って選択する。このように、決定部806は、予測値と記憶部305の空き容量とを比較しながら符号化形式の選択を繰り返すことにより、予測値が記憶部305の空き容量を超えない範囲で、可能な限り多くの符号化形式を選択する。その後、処理はステップS907へ進む。 In step S906, the determination unit 806 first acquires the free capacity of the storage unit 305 from the monitoring unit 801. Next, the determination unit 806 selects one or more encoding formats according to the priority order from the encoding formats of the selection candidates. Next, the determination unit 806 obtains a predicted value of the data amount obtained by encoding the content to be transferred in the selected encoding format from the data amount prediction unit 805 and compares it with the free capacity of the storage unit 305. To do. If the predicted value does not exceed the free space, the determination unit 806 selects a new encoding format from the remaining selection candidates according to the priority order. In this way, the determination unit 806 can select the encoding value while comparing the predicted value with the free space in the storage unit 305, thereby allowing the predicted value not to exceed the free space in the storage unit 305. Select as many encoding formats as possible. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S907.
 ステップS907では、決定部806が、選択された符号化形式を、記録装置110が転送装置120へのコンテンツの転送に利用すべき符号化形式として決定して、転送部312へ通知する。こうして、符号化形式の選択処理が終了する。その後、処理は、図7に示されているステップS705へ進む。 In step S907, the determination unit 806 determines the selected encoding format as the encoding format that the recording device 110 should use to transfer the content to the transfer device 120, and notifies the transfer unit 312 of it. Thus, the encoding format selection process ends. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S705 shown in FIG.
 ステップS1001では、記憶部305の使用領域のサイズが閾値を超えているので、記憶部305の空き容量が不足する可能性が高い。従って、決定部806はまず、履歴管理部803から再生管理情報を取得して、その再生管理情報に基づいて、再生履歴のない再生装置を特定する。決定部806は次に、特定された再生装置のみによって復号可能な符号化データを記憶部305から削除する。それにより、決定部806は記憶部305の空き容量を増大させる。その後、処理はステップS1002へ進む。 In step S1001, since the size of the used area of the storage unit 305 exceeds the threshold value, there is a high possibility that the free capacity of the storage unit 305 is insufficient. Therefore, the determination unit 806 first obtains the reproduction management information from the history management unit 803, and identifies a reproduction device without a reproduction history based on the reproduction management information. Next, the determination unit 806 deletes from the storage unit 305 encoded data that can be decoded only by the specified playback device. Thereby, the determination unit 806 increases the free capacity of the storage unit 305. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1002.
 ステップS1002では、決定部806は再生管理情報から各再生装置131-134の再生頻度を取得して、再生装置A131-D134の中からN台(文字Nは1以上の整数を表す。)を、再生頻度の高い順にコンテンツの転送先として選択する。そのとき、決定部806は、転送先の再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式で未視聴録画コンテンツを符号化することによって得られるデータ量をデータ量予測部805に第1の方法で予測させ、そのデータ量が記憶部305の空き容量を超えないように、転送先の再生装置の台数Nを制限する。この選択処理の詳細については後述する。その後、処理はステップS1003へ進む。 In step S1002, the determination unit 806 acquires the playback frequency of each playback device 131-134 from the playback management information, and determines N units (the letter N represents an integer of 1 or more) from the playback devices A131-D134. Select content transfer destinations in descending order of playback frequency. At that time, the determining unit 806 causes the data amount predicting unit 805 to predict the data amount obtained by encoding the unviewed recorded content in an encoding format that can be decoded by the transfer destination playback device, using the first method, The number N of transfer destination playback devices is limited so that the amount of data does not exceed the free capacity of the storage unit 305. Details of this selection process will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1003.
 ステップS1003では、決定部806がステップS904と同様に動作する。すなわち、決定部806は、転送先の再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式を選択候補として特定し、録画完了通知の示す転送対象のコンテンツを選択候補の符号化形式で符号化することによって得られるデータ量を、データ量予測部805に第2の方法で予測させる。その後、処理はステップS1004へ進む。 In step S1003, the determination unit 806 operates in the same manner as in step S904. That is, the determination unit 806 is obtained by specifying an encoding format that can be decoded by the playback apparatus as the transfer destination as a selection candidate, and encoding the transfer target content indicated by the recording completion notification in the selection candidate encoding format. The data amount prediction unit 805 is made to predict the data amount by the second method. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1004.
 ステップS1004では、決定部806が監視部801から記憶部305の空き容量を取得し、ステップS1003でデータ量予測部805に予測させたデータ量をその空き容量と比較する。空き容量がそのデータ量以下である場合、処理はステップS1005へ進む。空き容量がそのデータ量よりも大きい場合、処理はステップS1009へ進む。 In step S1004, the determination unit 806 acquires the free capacity of the storage unit 305 from the monitoring unit 801, and compares the data amount predicted by the data amount prediction unit 805 in step S1003 with the free capacity. If the free capacity is equal to or less than the data amount, the process proceeds to step S1005. If the free capacity is larger than the data amount, the process proceeds to step S1009.
 ステップS1005では、記憶部305の空き容量がデータ量の予測値以下である。従って、決定部806は、転送先以外の再生装置のみによって復号可能な符号化データが記憶部305に残っているか否かを確認する。それらの符号化データが残っている場合、処理はステップS1006へ進む。それらの符号化データが残っていない場合、処理はステップS1007へ進む。 In step S1005, the free capacity of the storage unit 305 is equal to or less than the predicted value of the data amount. Therefore, the determination unit 806 checks whether or not the encoded data that can be decoded only by the playback device other than the transfer destination remains in the storage unit 305. If such encoded data remains, the process proceeds to step S1006. If such encoded data does not remain, the process proceeds to step S1007.
 ステップS1006では、転送先以外の再生装置のみによって復号可能な符号化データが、記憶部305に残っている。そこで、決定部806は、それらの符号化データの中で最も古いものを記憶部305から削除する。その後、処理はステップS1004から繰り返される。ステップS1004-S1006のループ処理は、記憶部305の空き容量がデータ量の予測値を超えるまで、又は、転送先以外の再生装置のみによって復号可能な符号化データが全て記憶部305から削除されるまで繰り返される。 In step S1006, encoded data that can be decoded only by a playback device other than the transfer destination remains in the storage unit 305. Therefore, the determination unit 806 deletes the oldest encoded data from the storage unit 305. Thereafter, the process is repeated from step S1004. In the loop processing in steps S1004 to S1006, all the encoded data that can be decoded by the playback device other than the transfer destination is deleted from the storage unit 305 until the free space in the storage unit 305 exceeds the predicted value of the data amount Repeat until.
 ステップS1007では、決定部806はステップS905と同様にして、選択候補の符号化形式のそれぞれが転送装置120から再生装置A131-D134のいずれかへのコンテンツの転送に利用された頻度を算定し、選択候補の符号化形式に対して、算定された頻度が高い順に優先順位を付ける。その後、処理はステップS1008へ進む。 In step S1007, the determination unit 806 calculates the frequency at which each of the selection candidate encoding formats was used to transfer the content from the transfer device 120 to any one of the playback devices A131 to D134 in the same manner as in step S905. Priorities are assigned to the selection candidate encoding formats in descending order of the calculated frequency. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S1008.
 ステップS1008では、決定部806がステップS906と同様にして、選択候補の符号化形式から可能な限り多くの符号化形式を優先順位に従って選択する。その後、処理はステップS907へ進む。 In step S1008, the determination unit 806 selects as many encoding formats as possible from the encoding formats of the selection candidates according to the priority order in the same manner as in step S906. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S907.
 ステップS1009では、転送対象のコンテンツを選択候補の符号化形式の全てで符号化することによって得られるデータ量が記憶部305の空き容量よりも小さい。従って、決定部806は選択候補の符号化形式を全て選択する。その後、処理はステップS907へ進む。 In step S1009, the amount of data obtained by encoding the content to be transferred with all the encoding formats of the selection candidates is smaller than the free capacity of the storage unit 305. Therefore, the determination unit 806 selects all the encoding formats of selection candidates. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S907.
  [転送装置による転送先の再生装置の選択処理] [Transfer device selection process for transfer device]
 図11は、図10に示されているステップS1002、すなわち、転送装置120による転送先の再生装置の選択処理のフローチャートである。この処理では、転送装置120が、図8に示されている符号化形式選択部313の要素を以下のように動作させる。 FIG. 11 is a flowchart of step S1002 shown in FIG. 10, that is, a transfer destination playback device selection process by the transfer device 120. In this process, the transfer apparatus 120 operates the elements of the encoding format selection unit 313 shown in FIG. 8 as follows.
 ステップS1101では、録画予約管理部802が録画予約情報に基づいて未視聴録画コンテンツを特定し、その未視聴録画コンテンツの録画時間TRTを録画予約情報から読み取ってデータ量予測部805に渡す。ここで、未視聴録画コンテンツが複数存在する場合、録画予約管理部802は各未視聴録画コンテンツの録画時間を合計し、その合計値をデータ量予測部805に渡す。その後、処理はステップS1102へ進む。 In step S1101, the recording reservation management unit 802 identifies unviewed recording content based on the recording reservation information, reads the recording time TRT of the unviewed recording content from the recording reservation information, and passes it to the data amount prediction unit 805. Here, when there are a plurality of unviewed recorded contents, the recording reservation management unit 802 sums the recording times of the unviewed recorded contents and passes the total value to the data amount prediction unit 805. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1102.
 ステップS1102では、データ量予測部805は、再生装置A131-D134に関する符号化形式管理情報を符号化形式管理部804から取得して、それらの符号化形式管理情報から、各再生装置131-134が1時間当たりに再生する平均的なデータ量PTHを読み取る。その後、処理はステップS1103へ進む。 In step S1102, the data amount prediction unit 805 acquires the encoding format management information regarding the reproducing devices A131-D134 from the encoding format management unit 804, and each reproducing device 131-134 uses the encoding format management information. Read the average amount of data PTH reproduced per hour. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1103.
 ステップS1103では、決定部806が、履歴管理部803から各再生装置131-134の再生頻度を取得すると共に、変数Nを1に初期化する。その後、処理はステップS1104へ進む。 In step S1103, the determination unit 806 acquires the playback frequency of each playback device 131-134 from the history management unit 803 and initializes the variable N to 1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1104.
 ステップS1104では、決定部806がまず、再生装置A131-D134の中からN台の再生装置を、再生頻度の高い順に選択し、それらN台の再生装置の識別情報をデータ量予測部805に通知する。データ量予測部805はその通知に応じて、N台の再生装置について、それぞれが1時間当たりに再生する平均的なデータ量PTHを合計する。その後、処理はステップS1105へ進む。 In step S1104, the determination unit 806 first selects N playback devices from the playback devices A131 to D134 in descending order of playback frequency, and notifies the data amount prediction unit 805 of the identification information of these N playback devices. To do. In response to the notification, the data amount prediction unit 805 adds up the average data amount PTH that is reproduced per hour for each of the N playback devices. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1105.
 ステップS1105では、データ量予測部805が、ステップS1104で算定した平均的なデータ量PTHの合計と、未視聴録画コンテンツの録画時間TRTとの積を計算し、その積を予測値として決定部806へ渡す。決定部806は監視部801から記憶部305の空き容量を取得し、データ量予測部805から受け取った予測値をその空き容量と比較する。その予測値が空き容量よりも小さい場合、処理はステップS1106へ進む。その予測値が空き容量以上である場合、処理はステップS1107へ進む。 In step S1105, the data amount prediction unit 805 calculates the product of the total of the average data amount PTH calculated in step S1104 and the recording time TRT of the unviewed recorded content, and determines that product as a predicted value. To pass. The determination unit 806 acquires the free capacity of the storage unit 305 from the monitoring unit 801, and compares the predicted value received from the data amount prediction unit 805 with the free capacity. If the predicted value is smaller than the free space, the process proceeds to step S1106. If the predicted value is greater than or equal to the free capacity, the process proceeds to step S1107.
 ステップS1106では、予測値が記憶部305の空き容量よりも小さいので、N台の再生装置とは別の再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式で未視聴録画コンテンツを更に記憶部305に記録できるかも知れない。従って、決定部806は変数Nを1だけ増やす。その後、処理はステップS1104から繰り返される。 In step S1106, since the predicted value is smaller than the free capacity of the storage unit 305, unviewed recorded content may be further recorded in the storage unit 305 in an encoding format that can be decoded by a playback device different from the N playback devices. I don't know. Therefore, the determination unit 806 increases the variable N by 1. Thereafter, the process is repeated from step S1104.
 ステップS1107では、予測値が記憶部305の空き容量以上であるので、N台の再生装置の全てによって復号可能な符号化形式で未視聴録画コンテンツを記憶部305に記録することはできない。従って、決定部806は変数Nを1だけ減らす。その後、処理はステップS1108へ進む。 In step S1107, since the predicted value is equal to or larger than the free capacity of the storage unit 305, the unviewed recorded content cannot be recorded in the storage unit 305 in an encoded format that can be decoded by all N playback devices. Accordingly, the determination unit 806 decreases the variable N by 1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1108.
 ステップS1108では、決定部806が、再生装置A131-D134の中からN台の再生装置を、再生頻度の高い順に選択し、それらN台の再生装置をコンテンツの転送先として設定する。こうして、転送先の再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式で未視聴録画コンテンツを符号化することによって得られるデータ量の予測値が記憶部305の空き容量を超えないように、転送先の再生装置の台数Nが制限される。その後、処理はステップS1003へ進む。 In step S1108, the determination unit 806 selects N playback devices from the playback devices A131 to D134 in descending order of playback frequency, and sets these N playback devices as content transfer destinations. In this way, the transfer destination playback device prevents the predicted value of the data amount obtained by encoding the unviewed recorded content in an encoding format decodable by the transfer destination playback device from exceeding the free capacity of the storage unit 305. The number N is limited. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1003.
  [転送装置の記憶部に格納されるコンテンツの変化] [Changes in content stored in storage unit of transfer device]
   <記憶部の使用領域のサイズが閾値よりも小さい場合> <When the size of the used area of the storage unit is smaller than the threshold>
 図12の(a)は、転送装置120の記憶部305の使用状況の一例を示す模式図である。図12の(a)に示されている大きい矩形1201は記憶部305の記憶領域を表し、小さい矩形1202は、コンテンツを特定の符号化形式で符号化することによって得られたデータを表す。また、各矩形1201、1202の縦辺の長さはデータ量を表す。図12の(a)を参照するに、記憶部305は2種類の映像コンテンツ「スポーツ1」、「ドラマ1」を格納している。各コンテンツは、再生装置A131-D134のそれぞれによって復号可能な符号化形式で符号化されている。例えば「スポーツ1;A」は、再生装置A131によって復号可能な符号化形式で「スポーツ1」を符号化することによって得られたデータである。図4の(b)によれば、その符号化形式はMPEG4である。図12の(a)を更に参照するに、記憶部305の記憶領域のうち、コンテンツが記録されている部分、すなわち使用領域のサイズUSAは閾値THRよりも小さい。 (A) of FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a usage state of the storage unit 305 of the transfer device 120. A large rectangle 1201 shown in FIG. 12A represents the storage area of the storage unit 305, and a small rectangle 1202 represents data obtained by encoding the content in a specific encoding format. Further, the length of the vertical side of each of the rectangles 1201 and 1202 represents the data amount. Referring to (a) of FIG. 12, the storage unit 305 stores two types of video contents “sport 1” and “drama 1”. Each content is encoded in an encoding format that can be decoded by each of the playback devices A131 to D134. For example, “sport 1; A” is data obtained by encoding “sport 1” in an encoding format that can be decoded by the playback device A131. According to FIG. 4B, the encoding format is MPEG4. Further referring to FIG. 12A, the size USA of the portion where the content is recorded in the storage area of the storage unit 305, that is, the size USA of the use area is smaller than the threshold THR.
 ここで、記録装置110が、転送装置120から受信した録画予約情報に従って2種類のコンテンツ「ドラマ2」、「スポーツ2」を録画した場合を想定する。記録装置110は転送装置120に接続された際、「ドラマ2」と「スポーツ2」とに関する録画完了通知を転送装置120へ送信する。その通知に応じて、転送装置120の符号化形式選択部313はまず、記憶部305の使用領域のサイズを算定して、そのサイズを閾値と比較する。図12の(a)に示されている例では、記憶部305の使用領域のサイズUSAは閾値THRよりも小さい。従って、符号化形式選択部313は接続管理情報に基づいて、過去に転送装置120と一度でも接続されたことのある再生装置を全て、コンテンツの転送先に設定する。図4の(a)によれば、再生装置A131-D134はいずれも、過去に転送装置120と接続されたことがある。それ故、再生装置A131-D134の全てがコンテンツの転送先に設定される。符号化形式選択部313は次に、転送先の再生装置A131-D134によって復号可能な符号化形式の中から1つ以上の符号化形式を、記憶部305から再生装置A131-D134のいずれかへのコンテンツの転送に利用された頻度が高い順に選択する。符号化形式選択部313は更に、選択された符号化形式で「ドラマ2」と「スポーツ2」とを符号化することによって得られるデータ量を第2の方法で予測し、予測値が記憶部305の空き容量を超えないように、選択される符号化形式の数を制限する。 Here, it is assumed that the recording device 110 records two types of contents “drama 2” and “sport 2” in accordance with the recording reservation information received from the transfer device 120. When the recording device 110 is connected to the transfer device 120, the recording device 110 transmits a recording completion notification regarding “drama 2” and “sport 2” to the transfer device 120. In response to the notification, the encoding format selection unit 313 of the transfer device 120 first calculates the size of the used area in the storage unit 305 and compares the size with a threshold value. In the example shown in FIG. 12A, the size USA of the used area of the storage unit 305 is smaller than the threshold value THR. Accordingly, based on the connection management information, the encoding format selection unit 313 sets all the playback devices that have been connected to the transfer device 120 in the past as content transfer destinations. According to FIG. 4A, all of the playback devices A131-D134 have been connected to the transfer device 120 in the past. Therefore, all of the playback devices A131 to D134 are set as content transfer destinations. Next, the encoding format selection unit 313 selects one or more encoding formats from among the encoding formats that can be decoded by the playback device A131-D134 as the transfer destination, and transfers them from the storage unit 305 to one of the playback devices A131-D134. Are selected in descending order of frequency of use. The encoding format selection unit 313 further predicts the data amount obtained by encoding “drama 2” and “sport 2” with the selected encoding format by the second method, and the predicted value is stored in the storage unit. The number of encoding formats to be selected is limited so as not to exceed 305 free space.
 図12の(b)は、再生装置A131-D134によって復号可能な符号化形式で「ドラマ2」と「スポーツ2」とを符号化することによって得られるデータを示す模式図である。図12の(b)に示されている各矩形は、特定の符号化形式で「ドラマ2」又は「スポーツ2」を符号化することによって得られるデータを表す。例えば「ドラマ2;A」は、再生装置A131によって復号可能な符号化形式で「ドラマ2」を符号化することによって得られるデータを表す。また、各矩形の縦辺の長さは、データ量予測部805によるデータ量の予測値を表す。 (B) of FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing data obtained by encoding “drama 2” and “sport 2” in an encoding format decodable by the playback devices A131-D134. Each rectangle shown in (b) of FIG. 12 represents data obtained by encoding “Drama 2” or “Sport 2” in a specific encoding format. For example, “Drama 2; A” represents data obtained by encoding “Drama 2” in an encoding format that can be decoded by the playback device A131. Further, the length of the vertical side of each rectangle represents the predicted value of the data amount by the data amount prediction unit 805.
 図4の(c)に示されている例では、再生頻度が再生装置A131、C133、D134、B132の順に高い。従って、符号化形式選択部313は、再生装置A131によって復号可能な符号化形式、再生装置C133によって復号可能な符号化形式、再生装置D134によって復号可能な符号化形式、再生装置B132によって復号可能な符号化形式の順に優先順位を付ける。図12の(b)に示されている矩形の表す符号化データは上から順に、符号化形式の優先順位が高い。図12の(a)、(b)を参照するに、再生装置A131-D134によって復号可能な符号化形式で「ドラマ2」と「スポーツ2」とを符号化することによって得られるデータ量の予測値、すなわち、「ドラマ2;A」、「スポーツ2;A」、「ドラマ2;C」、…、「スポーツ2;B」の全体のデータ量の予測値CTSは、記憶部305の容量TTLから使用領域のサイズUSAを除いた値、すなわち空き容量SPA=TTL-USAよりも小さい。従って、符号化形式選択部313は、転送先の再生装置A131-D134によって復号可能な符号化形式を全て選択する。 In the example shown in FIG. 4C, the reproduction frequency is higher in the order of the reproduction apparatuses A131, C133, D134, and B132. Therefore, the encoding format selection unit 313 can encode the encoding format decodable by the reproducing device A131, the encoding format decodable by the reproducing device C133, the encoding format decodable by the reproducing device D134, and decodable by the reproducing device B132. Prioritize in order of encoding format. The encoded data represented by the rectangle shown in (b) of FIG. 12 has the highest priority in the encoding format in order from the top. Referring to (a) and (b) of FIG. 12, the prediction of the amount of data obtained by encoding “drama 2” and “sport 2” in an encoding format that can be decoded by the playback devices A131-D134. Value, that is, the predicted value CTS of the total data amount of “Drama 2; A”, “Sport 2; A”, “Drama 2; C”,..., “Sport 2; B” is the capacity TTL of the storage unit 305. Is a value obtained by removing the size USA of the used area, that is, the free space SPA = TTL−USA. Accordingly, the encoding format selection unit 313 selects all encoding formats that can be decoded by the playback apparatuses A131 to D134 as transfer destinations.
 尚、再生装置A131-D134によって復号可能な符号化形式で「ドラマ2」と「スポーツ2」とを符号化することによって得られるデータ量の予測値が、図12の(b)に示されている値CTSとは異なり、記憶部305の空き容量SPAを超えている場合、符号化形式選択部313は、優先順位が最も低い符号化形式から順に選択から外す。図12の(b)に示されている例では、最も下の矩形が表す符号化データ「スポーツ2;B」から順に削除されるように、選択される符号化形式が制限される。 A predicted value of the data amount obtained by encoding “Drama 2” and “Sport 2” in an encoding format that can be decoded by the playback devices A131 to D134 is shown in FIG. Unlike the existing value CTS, when the free space SPA of the storage unit 305 is exceeded, the encoding format selection unit 313 sequentially deselects from the encoding format with the lowest priority. In the example shown in FIG. 12B, the selected encoding format is limited so that the encoded data “sport 2; B” represented by the lowermost rectangle is deleted in order.
 図12の(c)は、(b)に示されているコンテンツが記録装置110から転送装置120へ転送された後における転送装置120の記憶部305の使用状況を示す模式図である。図12の(c)では(a)と同様に、大きい矩形は記憶部305の記憶領域を表し、小さい矩形は、コンテンツを特定の符号化形式で符号化することによって得られたデータを表す。符号化形式選択部313によって選択された符号化形式は転送要求によって、転送装置120から記録装置110へ通知される。その転送要求に応じて、記録装置110は「ドラマ2」と「スポーツ2」とを、転送要求の示す符号化形式で符号化して転送装置120の記憶部305へ転送する。その結果、図12の(c)に示されているとおり、4種類のコンテンツ「スポーツ1」、「ドラマ1」、「ドラマ2」、及び「スポーツ2」のいずれについても、転送先の再生装置A131-D134によって復号可能な符号化データが記憶部305に記録される。従って、転送装置120は、転送先の再生装置A131-D134のいずれへ送信するコンテンツの一覧にも、「スポーツ1」、「ドラマ1」、「ドラマ2」、及び「スポーツ2」の識別情報を記載する。 (C) of FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing a usage state of the storage unit 305 of the transfer device 120 after the content shown in (b) is transferred from the recording device 110 to the transfer device 120. In FIG. 12C, as in FIG. 12A, the large rectangle represents the storage area of the storage unit 305, and the small rectangle represents data obtained by encoding the content in a specific encoding format. The encoding format selected by the encoding format selection unit 313 is notified from the transfer device 120 to the recording device 110 by a transfer request. In response to the transfer request, the recording device 110 encodes “drama 2” and “sport 2” in the encoding format indicated by the transfer request and transfers them to the storage unit 305 of the transfer device 120. As a result, as shown in FIG. 12 (c), the playback device as the transfer destination for any of the four types of content “sport 1”, “drama 1”, “drama 2”, and “sport 2” Encoded data that can be decoded by A131-D134 is recorded in the storage unit 305. Accordingly, the transfer device 120 includes identification information of “sport 1”, “drama 1”, “drama 2”, and “sport 2” in the list of contents to be transmitted to any of the playback devices A131 to D134 as the transfer destination. Describe.
 図12の(d)は、転送装置120から受信されたコンテンツの一覧に従って再生装置の画面に表示されるコンテンツの一覧を示す模式図である。転送先の再生装置A131-D134はいずれも、図12の(d)に示されているコンテンツの一覧を画面に表示する。従って、いずれの再生装置のユーザも、「スポーツ1」、「ドラマ1」、「ドラマ2」、及び「スポーツ2」の中から再生対象のコンテンツを選択することができる。 (D) of FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing a list of contents displayed on the screen of the playback apparatus in accordance with the list of contents received from the transfer apparatus 120. Each of the transfer destination playback devices A131 to D134 displays a list of contents shown in FIG. 12D on the screen. Therefore, the user of any playback device can select the content to be played back from “Sport 1”, “Drama 1”, “Drama 2”, and “Sport 2”.
   <記憶部の使用領域のサイズが閾値を超えている場合> <When the size of the used area of the storage unit exceeds the threshold>
 図13の(a)は、転送装置120の記憶部305の使用状況の別例を示す模式図である。図13の(a)に示されている大きい矩形1301は記憶部305の記憶領域を表し、小さい矩形1302は、コンテンツを特定の符号化形式で符号化することによって得られたデータを表す。また、各矩形1301、1302の縦辺の長さはデータ量を表す。図13の(a)を参照するに、記憶部305は2種類の映像コンテンツ「スポーツ1」、「ドラマ1」を格納している。各コンテンツは、再生装置A131-D134のそれぞれによって復号可能な符号化形式で符号化されている。図13の(a)を更に参照するに、記憶部305の使用領域のサイズUSAは閾値THRを超えている。 (A) of FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing another example of the usage status of the storage unit 305 of the transfer device 120. A large rectangle 1301 shown in FIG. 13A represents a storage area of the storage unit 305, and a small rectangle 1302 represents data obtained by encoding the content in a specific encoding format. The length of the vertical side of each of the rectangles 1301 and 1302 represents the data amount. Referring to (a) of FIG. 13, the storage unit 305 stores two types of video contents “sport 1” and “drama 1”. Each content is encoded in an encoding format that can be decoded by each of the playback devices A131 to D134. Further referring to FIG. 13A, the size USA of the used area of the storage unit 305 exceeds the threshold value THR.
 ここで、記録装置110が、転送装置120から受信した録画予約情報に従って2種類のコンテンツ「ドラマ2」、「スポーツ2」を録画した場合を想定する。記録装置110は転送装置120に接続された際、「ドラマ2」と「スポーツ2」とに関する録画完了通知を転送装置120へ送信する。その通知に応じて、転送装置120の符号化形式選択部313はまず、記憶部305の使用領域のサイズを算定して、そのサイズを閾値と比較する。図13の(a)に示されている例では、記憶部305の使用領域のサイズUSAは閾値THRを超えている。従って、符号化形式選択部313はまず、再生管理情報に基づいて、再生履歴のない再生装置を特定する。図4の(b)に示されている例では、再生管理情報が再生装置B132に関する再生履歴を含まないので、再生装置Bが特定される。符号化形式選択部313は次に、再生装置Bのみによって復号可能な符号化データを記憶部305から削除する。図13の(a)には、削除対象のデータ、すなわち、再生装置Bのみによって復号可能な符号化データ「スポーツ1;B」と「ドラマ1;B」とが斜線で強調されている。図13の(b)は、再生履歴のない再生装置のみによって復号可能な符号化データを記憶部305から削除した後における記憶部305の使用状況を示す模式図である。図13の(b)に示されている各矩形1301、1302は、図13の(a)に示されているものと同様である。図13の(a)に斜線で示されている符号化データが記憶部305から削除されることにより、記憶部305の空き容量が、図13の(a)に示されている値SPAから、(b)に示されている値SPBまで増大する。 Here, it is assumed that the recording device 110 records two types of contents “drama 2” and “sport 2” in accordance with the recording reservation information received from the transfer device 120. When the recording device 110 is connected to the transfer device 120, the recording device 110 transmits a recording completion notification regarding “drama 2” and “sport 2” to the transfer device 120. In response to the notification, the encoding format selection unit 313 of the transfer device 120 first calculates the size of the used area in the storage unit 305 and compares the size with a threshold value. In the example shown in FIG. 13A, the size USA of the used area of the storage unit 305 exceeds the threshold value THR. Therefore, the encoding format selection unit 313 first identifies a playback device without a playback history based on the playback management information. In the example shown in FIG. 4B, the playback management information does not include the playback history related to the playback device B132, so the playback device B is specified. Next, the encoding format selection unit 313 deletes the encoded data that can be decoded only by the reproducing apparatus B from the storage unit 305. In FIG. 13A, the data to be deleted, that is, the encoded data “sport 1; B” and “drama 1; B”, which can be decoded only by the playback device B, are highlighted with diagonal lines. FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram illustrating a usage state of the storage unit 305 after the encoded data that can be decoded only by a playback device having no playback history is deleted from the storage unit 305. The rectangles 1301 and 1302 shown in FIG. 13B are the same as those shown in FIG. Since the encoded data indicated by the oblique lines in FIG. 13A is deleted from the storage unit 305, the free capacity of the storage unit 305 is calculated from the value SPA shown in FIG. Increase to the value SPB shown in (b).
 符号化形式選択部313は続いて、各再生装置131-134によって復号可能な符号化形式で未視聴録画コンテンツ、すなわち「ドラマ2」と「スポーツ2」とを符号化することによって得られるデータ量を第1の方法で予測する。符号化形式選択部313は更に、再生管理情報から各再生装置131-134の再生頻度を取得し、再生装置A131-D134のうち、再生頻度の高いものから順にN台をコンテンツの転送先として選択する。その上で符号化形式選択部313は、転送先の再生装置のそれぞれについて予測されたデータ量の合計が記憶部305の空き容量を超えないように、転送先の再生装置の台数Nを制限する。図4の(c)に示されている例では、再生頻度は、再生装置A131、C133、D134、B132の順に高い。符号化形式選択部313は更に、予測されたデータ量の合計が記憶部305の空き容量を超えないという条件から、コンテンツの転送先を再生装置A131と再生装置C133との2台に制限する。 Subsequently, the encoding format selection unit 313 encodes unviewed recorded content, that is, “drama 2” and “sport 2” in an encoding format that can be decoded by each playback device 131-134. Is predicted by the first method. The encoding format selection unit 313 further acquires the playback frequency of each playback device 131-134 from the playback management information, and selects N playback devices A131-D134 in descending order of playback frequency as content transfer destinations. To do. The encoding format selection unit 313 then limits the number N of transfer destination playback devices so that the total amount of data predicted for each transfer destination playback device does not exceed the free capacity of the storage unit 305. . In the example shown in FIG. 4C, the reproduction frequency is higher in the order of the reproduction apparatuses A131, C133, D134, and B132. The encoding format selection unit 313 further restricts the content transfer destinations to two units, ie, the reproduction device A131 and the reproduction device C133, on the condition that the total of the predicted data amount does not exceed the free capacity of the storage unit 305.
 符号化形式選択部313は次に、転送先の再生装置A131、C133によって復号可能な符号化形式の中から1つ以上の符号化形式を、記憶部305から再生装置A131-D134のいずれかへのコンテンツの転送に利用された頻度が高い順に選択する。符号化形式選択部313は更に、選択された符号化形式で「ドラマ2」と「スポーツ2」とを符号化することによって得られるデータ量が記憶部305の空き容量を超えないように、選択される符号化形式の数を制限する。 Next, the encoding format selection unit 313 selects one or more encoding formats from among the encoding formats that can be decoded by the playback apparatuses A131 and C133 that are the transfer destinations, and transfers them from the storage unit 305 to any one of the playback apparatuses A131 to D134. Are selected in descending order of frequency of use. The encoding format selection unit 313 further selects the data amount obtained by encoding “drama 2” and “sport 2” in the selected encoding format so that it does not exceed the free capacity of the storage unit 305. Limit the number of encoding formats to be played.
 図13の(c)は、再生装置A131、C133のそれぞれによって復号可能な符号化形式で「ドラマ2」と「スポーツ2」とを符号化することによって得られるデータを示す模式図である。図13の(c)に示されている各矩形は、コンテンツを特定の符号化形式で符号化することによって得られたデータを表し、その矩形の縦辺の長さは、データ量予測部805によるデータ量の予測値を表す。 (C) of FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing data obtained by encoding “Drama 2” and “Sport 2” in an encoding format that can be decoded by each of the playback devices A131 and C133. Each rectangle shown in (c) of FIG. 13 represents data obtained by encoding the content in a specific encoding format, and the length of the vertical side of the rectangle is the data amount prediction unit 805. Represents the predicted value of the data volume.
 再生装置A131の再生頻度は再生装置C133の再生頻度よりも高い。従って、符号化形式選択部313は、再生装置A131によって復号可能な符号化形式に、再生装置C133によって復号可能な符号化形式よりも高い優先順位を付ける。図13の(c)に示されている矩形の表す符号化データは上から順に、符号化形式の優先順位が高い。図13の(b)、(c)を参照するに、再生装置A131、C133によって復号可能な符号化形式で「ドラマ2」と「スポーツ2」とを符号化することによって得られるデータ量の予測値、すなわち、「ドラマ2;A」、「スポーツ2;A」、「ドラマ2;C」、及び「スポーツ2;C」の全体のデータ量の予測値CTSは、記憶部305の空き容量SPBよりも小さい。従って、符号化形式選択部313は、転送先の再生装置A131、C133によって復号可能な符号化形式を全て選択する。 The playback frequency of the playback device A131 is higher than the playback frequency of the playback device C133. Therefore, the encoding format selection unit 313 gives higher priority to the encoding format that can be decoded by the reproducing device A131 than the encoding format that can be decoded by the reproducing device C133. The encoded data represented by the rectangle shown in (c) of FIG. 13 has the highest priority in the encoding format in order from the top. Referring to (b) and (c) of FIG. 13, the prediction of the data amount obtained by encoding “drama 2” and “sport 2” in an encoding format decodable by the playback devices A131 and C133. Value, that is, the predicted value CTS of the total data amount of “drama 2; A”, “sport 2; A”, “drama 2; C”, and “sport 2; C” is the free space SPB of the storage unit 305 Smaller than. Accordingly, the encoding format selection unit 313 selects all encoding formats that can be decoded by the playback apparatuses A131 and C133 as transfer destinations.
 尚、転送先の再生装置A131、C133によって復号可能な符号化形式で「ドラマ2」と「スポーツ2」とを符号化することによって得られるデータ量の予測値が、図13の(c)に示されている値CTSとは異なり、記憶部305の空き容量SPBを超えている場合、符号化形式選択部313はまず、転送先以外の再生装置のみによって復号可能な符号化データを古いものから順に、記憶部305から削除する。それにより、符号化形式選択部313は記憶部305の空き容量を可能な限り拡大する。図13の(b)に示されている例では、転送先以外の再生装置である再生装置D134のみによって復号可能な符号化データ「ドラマ2;D」、「スポーツ2;D」が記憶部305に記録されている。従って、符号化形式選択部313はこれらの符号化データを記憶部305から削除する。転送先以外の再生装置のみによって復号可能な符号化データが全て記憶部305から削除されても、上記の予測値が記憶部305の空き容量を超えている場合、符号化形式選択部313は次に、優先順位が最も低い符号化形式から順に選択から外す。図13の(c)に示されている例では、最も下の矩形が表すデータ「スポーツ2;C」から順に削除されるように、選択される符号化形式が制限される。 Note that the predicted value of the data amount obtained by encoding “drama 2” and “sport 2” in an encoding format decodable by the playback apparatuses A131 and C133 at the transfer destination is shown in FIG. Unlike the value CTS shown, when the free space SPB of the storage unit 305 is exceeded, the encoding format selection unit 313 first selects encoded data that can be decoded only by a playback device other than the transfer destination from the oldest one. In order, they are deleted from the storage unit 305. Thereby, the encoding format selection unit 313 expands the free space of the storage unit 305 as much as possible. In the example shown in FIG. 13B, the encoded data “drama 2; D” and “sport 2; D” that can be decoded only by the playback device D134, which is a playback device other than the transfer destination, are stored in the storage unit 305. Is recorded. Therefore, the encoding format selection unit 313 deletes these encoded data from the storage unit 305. Even if all the encoded data that can be decoded only by the playback device other than the transfer destination is deleted from the storage unit 305, if the predicted value exceeds the free capacity of the storage unit 305, the encoding format selection unit 313 In addition, the encoding format with the lowest priority is removed from the selection in order. In the example shown in FIG. 13C, the selected encoding format is limited so that data “sport 2; C” represented by the lowermost rectangle is deleted in order.
 図14は、転送先の再生装置の選択処理において予測されるデータ量の変化を示す模式図である。図14の(a)、(b)、(c)に示されている大きい矩形1401、1402、1403の縦辺の長さがそれぞれ、転送先の再生装置の台数Nが1、2、3である場合に予測されるデータ量を表す。 FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing a change in the amount of data predicted in the selection process of the transfer destination playback device. The lengths of the vertical sides of the large rectangles 1401, 1402, and 1403 shown in FIGS. 14A, 14B, and 14C are 1, 2, and 3, respectively. This represents the amount of data expected in some cases.
 台数Nが1である場合、決定部806は転送先の再生装置として、再生頻度が最も高い再生装置A131を選択する。図14の(a)を参照するに、小さい矩形1411の縦辺の長さは、再生装置A131が1時間当たりに再生する平均的なデータ量PTHAを表す。そのデータ量PTHAと未視聴録画コンテンツの録画時間TRTとの積PTHA×TRTがデータ量の予測値として算定される。この予測値PTHA×TRTは、図13の(b)に示されている記憶部305の空き容量SPBよりも小さいので、決定部806は台数N=1を2に増やす。 When the number N is 1, the determination unit 806 selects the playback device A131 having the highest playback frequency as the playback device of the transfer destination. Referring to FIG. 14A, the length of the vertical side of the small rectangle 1411 represents the average data amount PTHA that the playback device A131 plays back per hour. The product PTHA × TRT of the data amount PTHA and the recording time TRT of the unviewed recorded content is calculated as a predicted value of the data amount. Since the predicted value PTHA × TRT is smaller than the free space SPB of the storage unit 305 shown in FIG. 13B, the determination unit 806 increases the number N = 1 to 2.
 台数Nが2である場合、決定部806は転送先の再生装置として、再生頻度が最も高い再生装置A131と、2番目に高い再生装置C133とを選択する。図14の(b)を参照するに、小さい矩形1411、1412の縦辺の長さはそれぞれ、再生装置A131、C133が1時間当たりに再生する平均的なデータ量PTHA、PTHCを表す。それらのデータ量の合計PTHA+PTHCと未視聴録画コンテンツの録画時間TRTとの積(PTHA+PTHC)×TRTがデータ量の予測値として算定される。この予測値(PTHA+PTHC)×TRTも記憶部305の空き容量SPBよりも小さいので、決定部806は台数N=2を3に増やす。 When the number N is 2, the determination unit 806 selects the playback device A131 having the highest playback frequency and the playback device C133 having the second highest playback frequency as playback devices to be transferred. Referring to FIG. 14B, the lengths of the vertical sides of the small rectangles 1411 and 1412 represent the average data amounts PTHA and PTHC reproduced by the playback devices A131 and C133, respectively, per hour. The product (PTHA + PTHC) × TRT of the total PTHA + PTHC of these data amounts and the recording time TRT of the unviewed recorded content is calculated as a predicted value of the data amount. Since this predicted value (PTHA + PTHC) × TRT is also smaller than the free capacity SPB of the storage unit 305, the determination unit 806 increases the number N = 2 to 3.
 台数Nが3である場合、決定部806は転送先の再生装置として、再生頻度が高い順に、再生装置A131、C133、D134を選択する。図14の(c)を参照するに、小さい矩形1411、1412、1413の縦辺の長さはそれぞれ、再生装置A131、C133、D134が1時間当たりに再生する平均的なデータ量PTHA、PTHC、PTHDを表す。それらのデータ量の合計PTHA+PTHC+PTHDと未視聴録画コンテンツの録画時間TRTとの積(PTHA+PTHC+PTHD)×TRTがデータ量の予測値として算定される。この予測値(PTHA+PTHC+PTHD)×TRTは記憶部305の空き容量SPBよりも大きいので、決定部806は台数N=3を2に戻し、転送先の再生装置を再生装置A131、C133に決定する。 When the number N is 3, the determination unit 806 selects the playback devices A131, C133, and D134 as the transfer destination playback devices in descending order of playback frequency. Referring to FIG. 14C, the lengths of the vertical sides of the small rectangles 1411, 1412, 1413 are respectively the average data amounts PTHA, PTHC, Represents PTHD. The product (PTHA + PTHC + PTHD) × TRT of the total PTHA + PTHC + PTHD of the data amount and the recording time TRT of the unviewed recorded content is calculated as a predicted value of the data amount. Since this predicted value (PTHA + PTHC + PTHD) × TRT is larger than the free capacity SPB of the storage unit 305, the determination unit 806 returns the number N = 3 to 2, and determines the playback device as the transfer device A131, C133.
 図15の(a)は、図13の(c)に示されているコンテンツが記録装置110から転送装置120へ転送された後における転送装置120の記憶部305の使用状況を示す模式図である。図15の(a)では図13の(b)と同様に、大きい矩形1501は記憶部305の記憶領域を表し、小さい矩形1502は、コンテンツを特定の符号化形式で符号化することによって得られたデータを表す。符号化形式選択部313によって選択された符号化形式は転送要求によって、転送装置120から記録装置110へ通知される。その要求に応じて、記録装置110は「ドラマ2」と「スポーツ2」とを、転送要求の示す符号化形式で符号化して、転送装置120の記憶部305へ転送する。図15の(a)を参照するに、記憶部305に既に記録されていたコンテンツ「スポーツ1」と「ドラマ1」とについては、再生履歴のない再生装置B132以外の再生装置、A131、C133、及びD134によって復号可能な符号化データのみが記憶部305に残されている。一方、記録装置110から転送装置120へ新たに転送されたコンテンツ「ドラマ2」と「スポーツ2」とについては、再生装置A131とC133とによって復号可能な符号化データのみが記憶部305に記録されている。従って、転送装置120は、再生装置A131とC133とへ送信するコンテンツの一覧には、「スポーツ1」、「ドラマ1」、「ドラマ2」、及び「スポーツ2」の全ての識別情報を記載し、再生装置D134へ送信するコンテンツの一覧には「スポーツ1」と「ドラマ1」との識別情報を記載する。一方、再生装置B132へ送信するコンテンツの一覧にはいずれのコンテンツの識別情報も記載されない。 FIG. 15A is a schematic diagram showing a usage state of the storage unit 305 of the transfer device 120 after the content shown in FIG. 13C is transferred from the recording device 110 to the transfer device 120. . In FIG. 15A, as in FIG. 13B, the large rectangle 1501 represents the storage area of the storage unit 305, and the small rectangle 1502 is obtained by encoding the content in a specific encoding format. Data. The encoding format selected by the encoding format selection unit 313 is notified from the transfer device 120 to the recording device 110 by a transfer request. In response to the request, the recording apparatus 110 encodes “drama 2” and “sport 2” in the encoding format indicated by the transfer request, and transfers them to the storage unit 305 of the transfer apparatus 120. Referring to (a) of FIG. 15, for the contents “sport 1” and “drama 1” already recorded in the storage unit 305, playback devices other than the playback device B132 having no playback history, A131, C133, Only the encoded data that can be decoded by D134 remains in the storage unit 305. On the other hand, for the contents “drama 2” and “sport 2” newly transferred from the recording device 110 to the transfer device 120, only encoded data that can be decoded by the playback devices A131 and C133 is recorded in the storage unit 305. ing. Accordingly, the transfer device 120 describes all identification information of “sport 1”, “drama 1”, “drama 2”, and “sport 2” in the list of contents to be transmitted to the playback devices A131 and C133. In the list of contents to be transmitted to the playback device D134, identification information for “sport 1” and “drama 1” is described. On the other hand, the identification information of any content is not described in the content list transmitted to the playback device B132.
 図15の(b)は、転送装置120から受信されたコンテンツの一覧に従って再生装置A131とC133との画面に表示されるコンテンツの一覧を示す模式図である。図15の(a)に示されているとおり、記憶部305は、「スポーツ1」、「ドラマ1」、「ドラマ2」、及び「スポーツ2」のいずれについても、再生装置A131とC133とによって復号可能な符号化データを格納している。従って、図15の(b)に示されているとおり、画面に表示されたコンテンツの一覧は、「スポーツ1」、「ドラマ1」、「ドラマ2」、及び「スポーツ2」をいずれも含む。それ故、再生装置A131とC133とのユーザは、「スポーツ1」、「ドラマ1」、「ドラマ2」、及び「スポーツ2」の中から再生対象のコンテンツを選択することができる。 (B) of FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram showing a list of contents displayed on the screens of the reproducing apparatuses A131 and C133 according to the list of contents received from the transfer apparatus 120. As shown in FIG. 15 (a), the storage unit 305 uses the playback devices A131 and C133 for "sport 1", "drama 1", "drama 2", and "sport 2". Decoded encoded data is stored. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 15B, the list of contents displayed on the screen includes all of “sport 1”, “drama 1”, “drama 2”, and “sport 2”. Therefore, the users of the playback devices A131 and C133 can select the content to be played back from “Sport 1”, “Drama 1”, “Drama 2”, and “Sport 2”.
 図15の(c)は、転送装置120から受信されたコンテンツの一覧に従って再生装置B132の画面に表示されるコンテンツの一覧を示す模式図である。図15の(a)に示されているとおり、記憶部305は、再生装置Bのみによって復号可能な符号化データを格納していない。従って、図15の(c)に示されているとおり、画面には、再生装置Bで再生可能なコンテンツが存在しない旨のメッセージが表示される。従って、再生装置B132のユーザは、「スポーツ1」、「ドラマ1」、「ドラマ2」、及び「スポーツ2」のいずれのコンテンツも視聴することができない。 (C) of FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram showing a list of contents displayed on the screen of the playback apparatus B 132 in accordance with the list of contents received from the transfer apparatus 120. As illustrated in FIG. 15A, the storage unit 305 does not store encoded data that can be decoded only by the playback apparatus B. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 15C, a message indicating that there is no content that can be played back by the playback device B is displayed on the screen. Therefore, the user of the playback device B132 cannot view any content of “Sport 1”, “Drama 1”, “Drama 2”, and “Sport 2”.
 図15の(d)は、転送装置120から受信されたコンテンツの一覧に従って再生装置D134の画面に表示されるコンテンツの一覧を示す模式図である。図15の(a)に示されているとおり、記憶部305に格納されたコンテンツの符号化データのうち、再生装置Dのみによって復号可能な符号化データは「スポーツ1;D」と「ドラマ1;D」との2種類のみである。従って、図15の(d)に示されているとおり、画面に表示されたコンテンツの一覧は「スポーツ1」と「ドラマ1」とのみを含む。それ故、再生装置D134のユーザは「スポーツ1」と「ドラマ1」とのいずれかしか、視聴することができない。 (D) of FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram showing a list of contents displayed on the screen of the reproducing apparatus D134 in accordance with the list of contents received from the transfer apparatus 120. As shown in FIG. 15A, among the encoded data of the content stored in the storage unit 305, the encoded data that can be decoded only by the playback device D are “sport 1; D” and “drama 1”. Only "D". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 15D, the list of contents displayed on the screen includes only “sport 1” and “drama 1”. Therefore, the user of the playback device D134 can view only “Sport 1” or “Drama 1”.
  [実施形態1による転送装置の利点] [Advantages of transfer device according to embodiment 1]
 転送装置120は、記録装置110に記憶部305へ所望のコンテンツを転送するように要求する際、その転送に利用されるべき符号化形式を、再生装置A131-D134によって復号可能な符号化形式の中から選択する。そのとき、選択される符号化形式の数は、それらの符号化形式で所望のコンテンツを符号化することによって得られるデータの全体が記憶部305に記録されるように制限される。従って、記憶部305の空き容量が不足する場合、再生装置A131-D134によって復号可能な符号化形式の全てを選択することができない。そこで、転送装置120は符号化形式を、記憶部305から再生装置A131-D134のいずれかへのコンテンツの転送に利用された頻度が高い順に選択する。この頻度が高い符号化形式のコンテンツほど、再生装置A131-D134のいずれかによって再生される可能性が高い。それ故、記憶部305には、再生される可能性の高い符号化形式で所望のコンテンツを符号化することによって得られるデータが優先的に記録される。このように、転送装置120は、記憶部305の空き容量が不足する場合、コンテンツの符号化形式を適切に選択することができる。 When the transfer device 120 requests the recording device 110 to transfer the desired content to the storage unit 305, the transfer device 120 determines the encoding format to be used for the transfer in an encoding format that can be decoded by the playback devices A131 to D134. Choose from. At that time, the number of encoding formats to be selected is limited so that the entire data obtained by encoding the desired content in these encoding formats is recorded in the storage unit 305. Therefore, when the free space in the storage unit 305 is insufficient, it is not possible to select all the encoding formats that can be decoded by the playback devices A131 to D134. Therefore, the transfer device 120 selects an encoding format in descending order of frequency of use for transferring content from the storage unit 305 to any one of the playback devices A131 to D134. The more frequently encoded content is more likely to be played back by one of the playback devices A131-D134. Therefore, the storage unit 305 preferentially records data obtained by encoding desired content in an encoding format that is highly likely to be reproduced. As described above, the transfer device 120 can appropriately select the content encoding format when the storage unit 305 has insufficient free space.
 転送装置120は更に、記憶部305の使用領域のサイズが閾値を超えているか否かを確認する。記憶部305の使用領域のサイズが閾値を超えている場合、優先順位の低い符号化形式のコンテンツを記録するための領域を記憶部305内に確保することができない可能性が高い。従って、使用領域のサイズが閾値を超えていない場合と同様に、再生頻度の低い再生装置についてまで、その再生装置のみによって復号可能な符号化形式で所望のコンテンツを符号化することによって得られるデータ量を予測しなくてもよい可能性が高い。そこで、使用領域のサイズが閾値を超えている場合、転送装置120は符号化形式の選択処理(S1003-S1009)に先立って転送先の再生装置の選択処理(S1002)を行い、再生頻度の高い再生装置を優先的に転送先として設定する。それにより、符号化形式の選択候補の数が減少するので、選択候補別のデータ量の予測処理(S1003)によって転送装置120にかかる負担が軽減される。更に、転送先の再生装置の選択処理ではデータ量の予測に、第2の方法よりも簡便な第1の方法が利用される。従って、符号化形式の選択処理の全体(S1001-S1009)を通して、転送装置120にかかる負担は軽い。 The transfer device 120 further checks whether or not the size of the used area in the storage unit 305 exceeds the threshold value. When the size of the use area of the storage unit 305 exceeds the threshold value, there is a high possibility that an area for recording content in a low-priority encoding format cannot be secured in the storage unit 305. Accordingly, similarly to the case where the size of the used area does not exceed the threshold value, data obtained by encoding desired content in an encoding format that can be decoded only by the playback device up to a playback device with low playback frequency. There is a high probability that the amount does not have to be predicted. Therefore, when the size of the used area exceeds the threshold, the transfer device 120 performs the transfer destination playback device selection processing (S1002) prior to the encoding format selection processing (S1003-S1009), and the playback frequency is high. A playback device is preferentially set as a transfer destination. As a result, the number of encoding format selection candidates decreases, so that the burden on the transfer apparatus 120 is reduced by the data amount prediction processing for each selection candidate (S1003). Further, in the selection process of the transfer destination playback apparatus, the first method, which is simpler than the second method, is used for predicting the data amount. Therefore, the burden on the transfer device 120 is light throughout the entire encoding format selection process (S1001-S1009).
 《変形例》 <Modification>
 (A)本発明の実施形態1による記録再生システムは、記録装置110によって録画された放送番組を再生装置A131-D134への転送対象のコンテンツとして扱う。この記録再生システムはその他に、記録装置110によって、光ディスク又はメモリカード等の可搬性記録媒体から読み出されたコンテンツ、又はネットワークからダウンロードされたコンテンツを転送対象として扱ってもよい。その場合、転送対象のコンテンツは動画コンテンツの他に静止画又は音声コンテンツであってもよく、ラジオの放送番組、ホームビデオ、写真、楽曲、講演・講義、並びに市販のコンテンツの複製等を含む。また、記録装置110は、放送番組の録画機能を持つ電子機器の他に、光ディスク・レコーダ、デジタル・ビデオ・カメラ、デジタル・スチル・カメラ、オーディオ・レコーダ、及びICレコーダ等であってもよい。一方、再生装置は、動画の再生機能を持つ電子機器の他に、オーディオ・プレーヤ、サラウンド・システム、及びプリンタであってもよい。 (A) The recording / playback system according to the first embodiment of the present invention treats a broadcast program recorded by the recording device 110 as content to be transferred to the playback devices A131-D134. In addition, the recording / reproducing system may treat content read from a portable recording medium such as an optical disk or a memory card, or content downloaded from a network by the recording device 110 as a transfer target. In this case, the content to be transferred may be a still image or audio content in addition to the moving image content, and includes a radio broadcast program, a home video, a photograph, a song, a lecture / lecture, and a copy of commercially available content. The recording device 110 may be an optical disc recorder, a digital video camera, a digital still camera, an audio recorder, an IC recorder, or the like in addition to an electronic device having a broadcast program recording function. On the other hand, the playback device may be an audio player, a surround system, and a printer in addition to an electronic device having a video playback function.
 (B)本発明の実施形態1による記録再生システムでは、録画予約情報、及び復号可能な符号化形式の一覧が、各再生装置131-134から転送装置120を経由して記録装置110へ伝達される。その他に、録画予約情報等が各再生装置131-134から、ホーム・ネットワーク又はインターネット等のネットワークを経由して記録装置110へ伝達されてもよい。その場合でも、録画されたコンテンツは、記録装置110から転送装置120を経由して各再生装置131-134へ転送される。それにより、コンテンツの転送に起因するネットワーク・トラフィックの過剰な増大を防止することができる。 (B) In the recording / reproducing system according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the recording reservation information and the list of decodable encoding formats are transmitted from each reproducing device 131-134 to the recording device 110 via the transfer device 120. The In addition, the recording reservation information or the like may be transmitted from each playback device 131-134 to the recording device 110 via a home network or a network such as the Internet. Even in this case, the recorded content is transferred from the recording device 110 via the transfer device 120 to each playback device 131-134. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an excessive increase in network traffic due to the transfer of content.
 (C)本発明の実施形態1による転送装置120は、記録装置110からのコンテンツの転送、及び再生装置A131-D134へのコンテンツの転送を、有線又は無線で行う。その他に、記録装置110が転送対象のコンテンツを、メモリカード及びUSBメモリ等のメモリ装置へ書き込み、転送装置120がそのメモリ装置からそのコンテンツを読み出してもよい。また、転送装置120が転送対象のコンテンツをメモリ装置へ書き込み、再生装置A131-D134がそのメモリ装置からそのコンテンツを読み出してもよい。 (C) The transfer device 120 according to the first embodiment of the present invention transfers the content from the recording device 110 and the content to the playback devices A131 to D134 by wire or wirelessly. In addition, the recording device 110 may write the content to be transferred to a memory device such as a memory card or a USB memory, and the transfer device 120 may read the content from the memory device. Further, the transfer device 120 may write the content to be transferred to the memory device, and the playback devices A131 to D134 may read the content from the memory device.
 (D)本発明の実施形態1による転送装置120は、再生装置A131-D134へのコンテンツの転送にのみ利用される。その他に、転送装置120が、スマートフォン及びタブレット型コンピュータ等、映像再生機能を搭載した電子機器である場合、再生装置の1つとして兼用されてもよい。 (D) The transfer device 120 according to the first embodiment of the present invention is used only for transferring content to the playback devices A131 to D134. In addition, when the transfer device 120 is an electronic device equipped with a video playback function, such as a smartphone and a tablet computer, the transfer device 120 may be used as one of the playback devices.
 (E)図2に示されている記録装置110の録画部221と符号化部224とは、制御部202がCPUによって特定のファームウェアを実行することで動作する。その他に、録画部と符号化部とが専用のハードウェアで構成されていてもよい。 (E) The recording unit 221 and the encoding unit 224 of the recording apparatus 110 shown in FIG. 2 operate when the control unit 202 executes specific firmware by the CPU. In addition, the recording unit and the encoding unit may be configured by dedicated hardware.
 (F)転送装置120の符号化形式選択部313は、記憶部305の使用領域のサイズを所定の閾値と比較し、記憶部305の使用領域のサイズがその閾値を超えている場合に、転送先の再生装置の台数を制限する。符号化形式選択部313はその他に、記憶部305の空き容量、又は記憶部305の容量に対する使用領域のサイズの比を所定の閾値と比較し、その空き容量が閾値を下回っている場合、又はその比が閾値を超えている場合に、転送先の再生装置の台数を制限してもよい。 (F) The encoding format selection unit 313 of the transfer device 120 compares the size of the used area of the storage unit 305 with a predetermined threshold, and transfers the transfer if the size of the used area of the storage unit 305 exceeds the threshold. Limit the number of previous playback devices. In addition, the encoding format selection unit 313 compares the free capacity of the storage unit 305 or the ratio of the size of the used area to the capacity of the storage unit 305 with a predetermined threshold, and the free capacity is below the threshold, or When the ratio exceeds the threshold, the number of transfer destination playback devices may be limited.
 (G)符号化形式選択部313は、再生管理情報の示す履歴から各再生装置131-134の再生頻度を算定して再生管理情報に組み込む。符号化形式選択部313はその他に、再生管理情報の示す履歴から、符号化形式の各種類について、いずれかの再生装置へのコンテンツの転送に利用された頻度を算定して再生管理情報に組み込んでもよい。 (G) The encoding format selection unit 313 calculates the reproduction frequency of each reproduction apparatus 131-134 from the history indicated by the reproduction management information and incorporates it in the reproduction management information. In addition, the encoding format selection unit 313 calculates the frequency used for transferring content to one of the playback devices for each type of encoding format from the history indicated by the playback management information, and incorporates it in the playback management information. But you can.
 (H)符号化形式選択部313は、転送部312がコンテンツをいずれかの再生装置へ転送する度に、その再生装置に関する再生管理情報を参照して、その再生装置が1時間当たりに再生する平均的なデータ量を算定する。符号化形式選択部313はその他に、各再生装置が1時間当たりに再生する平均的なデータ量を、その再生装置又は記録装置110から取得してもよい。また、各再生装置が1時間当たりに再生するデータ量として標準的な値が予め符号化形式管理情報に組み込まれていてもよい。 (H) Whenever the transfer unit 312 transfers the content to any one of the playback devices, the encoding format selection unit 313 refers to the playback management information regarding the playback device, and the playback device plays back per hour. Calculate the average amount of data. In addition, the encoding format selection unit 313 may acquire an average amount of data that each playback device plays back per hour from the playback device or the recording device 110. In addition, a standard value may be incorporated in advance in the encoding format management information as the amount of data that each playback device plays back per hour.
 (I)符号化形式選択部313は、転送先の再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式に対して、各符号化形式が転送装置120から再生装置A131-D134のいずれかへのコンテンツの転送に利用された頻度の順に優先順位を付ける。それにより、その頻度が高い符号化形式ほど、転送装置120から再生装置A131-D134のいずれかへのコンテンツの転送に利用される可能性が高いとみなされる。符号化形式選択部313はその他に、再生頻度又は接続頻度が高い再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式に対して、高い優先順位を付けてもよい。その場合、再生頻度又は接続頻度が高い再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式は、転送装置120から再生装置A131-D134のいずれかへのコンテンツの転送に利用される可能性が高いとみなされる。 (I) The encoding format selection unit 313 transfers the content from the transfer device 120 to any one of the playback devices A131 to D134 with respect to the encoding format that can be decoded by the transfer destination playback device. Prioritize in order of frequency used. Accordingly, it is considered that an encoding format having a higher frequency is more likely to be used for transferring content from the transfer device 120 to any one of the playback devices A131 to D134. In addition, the encoding format selection unit 313 may assign a higher priority to an encoding format that can be decoded by a playback device having a high playback frequency or connection frequency. In that case, it is considered that an encoding format that can be decoded by a playback device having a high playback frequency or connection frequency is likely to be used for transferring content from the transfer device 120 to any one of the playback devices A131 to D134.
 (J)符号化形式選択部313は、記憶部305の使用領域のサイズが閾値を超えている場合、転送先の再生装置の台数制限に再生頻度を利用する。符号化形式選択部313はその他に、接続頻度を利用してもよい。また、転送先の再生装置の台数が、ユーザによって設定されても、デフォルトの値に設定されてもよい。 (J) When the size of the used area of the storage unit 305 exceeds the threshold, the (J) encoding format selection unit 313 uses the reproduction frequency to limit the number of reproduction apparatuses as transfer destinations. In addition, the encoding format selection unit 313 may use connection frequency. Further, the number of transfer destination playback devices may be set by a user or set to a default value.
 (K)符号化形式選択部313は、記憶部305の使用領域のサイズが閾値を超えている場合、未視聴録画コンテンツの全てについて、転送先の再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式でそれらのコンテンツを符号化することによって得られるデータ量を予測する。符号化形式選択部313はその他に、データ量の予測対象を、未視聴録画コンテンツのうち、現時点から所定期間前まで、例えば1週間前までに録画されたものに制限してもよい。 (K) When the size of the used area of the storage unit 305 exceeds the threshold value, the encoding format selection unit 313 converts all of the unviewed recorded content in an encoding format that can be decoded by the playback device of the transfer destination. The amount of data obtained by encoding the content is predicted. In addition, the encoding format selection unit 313 may limit the data amount prediction target to unrecorded recorded content recorded from the present time to a predetermined period before, for example, one week before.
 (L)符号化形式選択部313は、記憶部305の使用領域のサイズが閾値を超えている場合、記憶部305に保存されている符号化データのうち、再生に利用される可能性が低いものを、必要な量だけ記憶部305から自動的に削除する。符号化形式選択部313はその他に、記憶部305に保存されているコンテンツの中から削除対象のコンテンツをユーザに選択させてもよい。 (L) When the size of the used area of the storage unit 305 exceeds the threshold value, the encoding format selection unit 313 is less likely to be used for reproduction out of the encoded data stored in the storage unit 305. The necessary amount is automatically deleted from the storage unit 305. In addition, the encoding format selection unit 313 may cause the user to select content to be deleted from the content stored in the storage unit 305.
 《実施形態2》 << Embodiment 2 >>
 本発明の実施形態2による記録再生システムは、実施形態1によるシステムとは、転送装置120が、記録装置110からコンテンツを転送する時期を、電力が確保可能な時期に制限する点で異なる。その他の構成及び機能は実施形態1によるシステムの構成及び機能と同様であるので、それら同様な構成及び機能については実施形態1についての説明を援用する。 The recording / reproducing system according to the second embodiment of the present invention differs from the system according to the first embodiment in that the transfer device 120 restricts the time when the content is transferred from the recording device 110 to a time when power can be secured. Since other configurations and functions are the same as those of the system according to the first embodiment, the description of the first embodiment is used for the similar configurations and functions.
 転送装置120はモバイル機器であるので、通常は内蔵の電池から電力供給を受ける。しかし、記録装置110から転送装置120へのコンテンツの転送は処理時間が長く、かつ消費電力が大きいので、処理の途中で電池切れが生じる危険性がある。そこで、本発明の実施形態2による転送装置120は以下に述べるように、外部電源から電力供給を受けた履歴に基づいて、外部電源から電力供給を受けることができる状況にあるとみなせる場合に、記録装置110からコンテンツを転送する。それにより、コンテンツの転送処理による電池切れの危険性を抑制することができる。 Since the transfer device 120 is a mobile device, it normally receives power from a built-in battery. However, transfer of content from the recording device 110 to the transfer device 120 takes a long time and consumes a large amount of power, so there is a risk that the battery will run out during the processing. Therefore, as described below, when the transfer device 120 according to the second embodiment of the present invention can be regarded as being in a state where it can receive power supply from the external power supply based on the history of receiving power supply from the external power supply, The content is transferred from the recording device 110. Thereby, the risk of running out of battery due to the content transfer process can be suppressed.
  [転送装置の構成] [Transfer device configuration]
 図16は、本発明の実施形態2による転送装置120の構成を示すブロック図である。図16を参照するに、転送装置120は、図3に示されている要素に加えて、GPS(Global Positioning System)部1601と電源制御部1602とを備えている。それらの要素1601、1602はI/F204を通して、制御部301とデータ交換可能である。GPS部1601は、少なくとも3つのGPS衛星が発信した電波を受信し、それらの電波が示す時刻と、それらの電波を受信した時刻との差から、転送装置120と各GPS衛星との間の距離を計算する。GPS部1601は更に、計算された距離から転送装置120の緯度と経度とを算定する。電源制御部1602は、外部電源を利用して、転送装置120に内蔵の電池を充電する処理を制御する。 FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the transfer apparatus 120 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. Referring to FIG. 16, transfer device 120 includes a GPS (Global Positioning System) unit 1601 and a power supply control unit 1602 in addition to the elements shown in FIG. 3. These elements 1601 and 1602 can exchange data with the control unit 301 through the I / F 204. The GPS unit 1601 receives radio waves transmitted by at least three GPS satellites, and determines the distance between the transfer device 120 and each GPS satellite from the difference between the time indicated by those radio waves and the time when these radio waves are received. Calculate The GPS unit 1601 further calculates the latitude and longitude of the transfer device 120 from the calculated distance. The power control unit 1602 controls processing for charging a battery built in the transfer device 120 using an external power source.
 図17は、図16に示されている符号化形式選択部313の構成を示すブロック図である。図17を参照するに、符号化形式選択部313は、図8に示されている機能部801-806に加えて、電力監視部1701、位置検出部1702、及び転送時期決定部1703を含む。これらの機能部1701-1703も他の機能部801-806と同様に、制御部301内のCPUが所定のファームウェアを実行することによって動作する。 FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the encoding format selection unit 313 shown in FIG. Referring to FIG. 17, the encoding format selection unit 313 includes a power monitoring unit 1701, a position detection unit 1702, and a transfer time determination unit 1703 in addition to the function units 801-806 shown in FIG. Similar to the other function units 801-806, these function units 1701-1703 operate by the CPU in the control unit 301 executing predetermined firmware.
 電力監視部1701は電源制御部1602を通して、転送装置120が外部電源から電力供給を受けているか否かを監視し、その電力供給の開始と終了とを転送時期決定部1703へ通知する。 The power monitoring unit 1701 monitors whether or not the transfer device 120 is supplied with power from an external power source through the power control unit 1602 and notifies the transfer timing determination unit 1703 of the start and end of the power supply.
 位置検出部1702はGPS部1601を利用して転送装置120の緯度と経度とを監視し、転送時期決定部1703からの要求に応じて、現時点での緯度と経度とを転送時期決定部1703へ通知する。 The position detection unit 1702 uses the GPS unit 1601 to monitor the latitude and longitude of the transfer device 120, and in response to a request from the transfer time determination unit 1703, the current latitude and longitude are transferred to the transfer time determination unit 1703. Notice.
 転送時期決定部1703は、電力監視部1701と位置検出部1702とからの通知を利用して、電力供給情報を生成する。電力供給情報は、転送装置120が外部電源から電力供給を受けた履歴である。転送時期決定部1703は更に、電力供給情報を利用して、電力保障期間と電力保障領域との対を設定する。電力保障期間と電力保障領域とはそれぞれ、転送装置120が外部電源から電力供給を受ける可能性が所定のレベルよりも高い時間帯、及び緯度と経度との範囲を表す。転送装置120がいずれかの電力保障期間中に、その電力保障期間と対を成す電力保障領域の中に位置する場合、外部電源から電力供給を受けることができる状況に転送装置120はあるとみなすことができる。従って、転送時期決定部1703は、決定部806が転送部312から符号化形式の選択を要求されたとき、まず、現在の時刻がいずれかの電力保障期間に属し、かつ、その電力保障期間と対を成す電力保障領域に現時点での転送装置120の緯度と経度とが属しているか否かを判断する。その判断が肯定的であった場合、転送時期決定部1703は転送部312に、記録装置110から記憶部305へのコンテンツの転送を許可する。一方、その判断が否定的であった場合、転送時期決定部1703は電力監視部1701に、転送装置120が外部電源に接続されているか否かを監視させる。その後、転送装置120が外部電源に接続されたことを電力監視部1701が検出した時点で、転送時期決定部1703は転送部312に、記録装置110から記憶部305へのコンテンツの転送を許可する。 The transfer time determination unit 1703 generates power supply information using notifications from the power monitoring unit 1701 and the position detection unit 1702. The power supply information is a history that the transfer device 120 has received power supply from an external power source. The transfer time determination unit 1703 further sets a pair of a power guarantee period and a power guarantee area using the power supply information. The power guarantee period and the power guarantee area respectively represent a time zone in which the possibility that the transfer device 120 receives power supply from the external power source is higher than a predetermined level, and a range of latitude and longitude. If the transfer device 120 is located in any power guarantee area that is paired with any power guarantee period, the transfer device 120 is considered to be in a situation where it can receive power from an external power source. be able to. Accordingly, when the determination unit 806 is requested by the transfer unit 312 to select an encoding format, the transfer time determination unit 1703 firstly belongs to one of the power guarantee periods, and the power guarantee period It is determined whether or not the current latitude and longitude of the transfer device 120 belong to a pair of power security areas. If the determination is affirmative, the transfer time determination unit 1703 allows the transfer unit 312 to transfer the content from the recording device 110 to the storage unit 305. On the other hand, if the determination is negative, the transfer timing determination unit 1703 causes the power monitoring unit 1701 to monitor whether or not the transfer device 120 is connected to an external power source. Thereafter, when the power monitoring unit 1701 detects that the transfer device 120 is connected to the external power supply, the transfer time determination unit 1703 allows the transfer unit 312 to transfer the content from the recording device 110 to the storage unit 305. .
  [電力保障期間/領域の設定] [Electricity guarantee period / area setting]
 図18は、電力供給情報の一例を示す表である。図18を参照するに、電力供給情報は1つの項目に、開始時刻、供給時間、及び位置の組み合わせを含む。「開始時刻」は、転送装置120が外部電源から電力供給を受け始めた日付と時刻とを表す。転送時期決定部1703は、電力監視部1701から電力供給の開始を通知された時刻を開始時刻として記録する。「供給時間」は、転送装置120が外部電源から電力供給を受けていた時間を表す。転送時期決定部1703は、電力監視部1701から電力供給の終了を通知された時刻と開始時刻との差を供給時間として記録する。「位置」は、転送装置120が外部電源から電力供給を受けていた期間中に位置していた緯度と経度とを表す。転送時期決定部1703は、電力監視部1701から電力供給の開始を通知されたとき、位置検出部1702から転送装置120の緯度と経度とを取得して、転送装置120の位置として記録する。 FIG. 18 is a table showing an example of power supply information. Referring to FIG. 18, the power supply information includes a combination of start time, supply time, and position in one item. The “start time” represents the date and time when the transfer device 120 starts to receive power supply from the external power supply. The transfer time determination unit 1703 records the time when the start of power supply is notified from the power monitoring unit 1701 as the start time. “Supply time” represents a time during which the transfer device 120 was supplied with power from an external power source. The transfer time determination unit 1703 records the difference between the time when the end of power supply is notified from the power monitoring unit 1701 and the start time as the supply time. “Position” represents the latitude and longitude that the transfer device 120 was located during the period when it was supplied with power from the external power supply. When notified of the start of power supply from the power monitoring unit 1701, the transfer time determination unit 1703 acquires the latitude and longitude of the transfer device 120 from the position detection unit 1702 and records them as the position of the transfer device 120.
 転送時期決定部1703は電力供給情報から電力保障期間/領域を次のように設定する。転送時期決定部1703はまず、電力供給情報の項目の中から、GPSの精度、例えば100mの精度で一致する位置を示す項目を抽出する。転送時期決定部1703は次に、抽出された項目のそれぞれが示す開始時刻と供給時間とから、少なくとも2つの項目間で、転送装置120が外部電源から電力供給を受けていた時間帯が重複する部分を探す。転送時期決定部1703は続いて、発見された部分のそれぞれについて、1週間等、所定期間当たりに電力供給情報に記録された頻度を求める。その頻度が所定のレベル、例えば1週間当たりに1回を超える時間帯が電力保障期間として設定され、その時間帯における転送装置120の位置とGPSの精度で一致する緯度と経度との範囲が電力保障領域として設定される。 The transfer time determination unit 1703 sets the power guarantee period / area from the power supply information as follows. First, the transfer time determination unit 1703 extracts an item indicating a matching position with GPS accuracy, for example, 100 m accuracy, from the items of power supply information. Next, the transfer time determination unit 1703 overlaps at least two items from the start time and the supply time indicated by each of the extracted items in the time period during which the transfer device 120 was supplied with power from the external power supply. Find the part. Subsequently, the transfer time determination unit 1703 obtains the frequency recorded in the power supply information per predetermined period, such as one week, for each discovered part. A time zone in which the frequency exceeds a predetermined level, for example, once per week, is set as a power guarantee period, and the range of latitude and longitude that matches the position of the transfer device 120 in the time zone with the accuracy of GPS is power. Set as security area.
 図18に示されている表では、第1、3、4行の項目の示す位置が一致している。従って、転送時期決定部1703は、第1、3、4行の項目のそれぞれが示す開始時刻と供給時間とから、それらの項目の少なくとも2つの間で重複する時間帯を探す。第1行の項目が示す期間は「21:00~24:00」であり、第3行の項目が示す時間帯は「22:00~23:00」であり、第4行の項目が示す時間帯は「23:00~4:00」である。従って、第1行の項目と第3行の項目との間では「22:00~23:00」が重複し、第1行の項目と第4行の項目との間では「23:00~24:00」が重複している。更に、それらの重複する時間帯はいずれも、電力供給情報に記録されている頻度が4日間に2回であり、1週間当たりに1回の頻度よりも高い。それ故、転送時期決定部1703は「22:00~24:00」を電力保障期間として設定し、その時間帯における転送装置120の位置(北緯34度78分46.77秒、東経135度63分10.35秒)を中心とする半径100m以内の範囲を電力保障領域として設定する。 In the table shown in FIG. 18, the positions indicated by the items in the first, third, and fourth rows match. Therefore, the transfer time determination unit 1703 searches for a time zone overlapping between at least two of the items from the start time and the supply time indicated by the items in the first, third, and fourth rows. The period indicated by the item in the first row is “21:00 to 24:00”, the time zone indicated by the item in the third row is “22:00 to 23:00”, and the item in the fourth row indicates The time zone is “23:00 to 4:00”. Accordingly, “22:00 to 23:00” overlaps between the items in the first row and the items in the third row, and “23:00 to“ from the items in the first row to the items in the fourth row. 24:00 "is duplicated. Furthermore, in any of these overlapping time zones, the frequency recorded in the power supply information is twice every four days, which is higher than the frequency once per week. Therefore, the transfer timing determination unit 1703 sets “22:00 to 24:00” as the power guarantee period, and the position of the transfer device 120 in that time zone (34 degrees 78 minutes 46.77 seconds north, 135 degrees 63 east longitude). A range within a radius of 100 m centered on the minute (10.35 seconds) is set as the power guarantee region.
  [記録装置からコンテンツを転送する時期の適否を判断する処理] [Processing to determine the appropriateness of the timing for transferring content from the recording device]
 図19は、転送装置120が記録装置110からコンテンツを現時点で転送することが適切であるか否かを転送時期決定部1703が判断する処理のフローチャートである。この処理は、決定部806が転送部312から符号化形式の選択を要求されたとき、転送時期決定部1703に合図を送ることによって開始される。 FIG. 19 is a flowchart of processing in which the transfer time determination unit 1703 determines whether it is appropriate for the transfer device 120 to transfer content from the recording device 110 at this time. This processing is started by sending a signal to the transfer time determination unit 1703 when the determination unit 806 is requested by the transfer unit 312 to select an encoding format.
 ステップS1901では、転送時期決定部1703が、現在の時刻を取得すると共に、位置検出部1702に、現時点での転送装置120の位置を通知するように要求する。位置検出部1702はその要求に応じて、GPS部1601によって計測された現時点での緯度と経度とを転送時期決定部1703へ通知する。その後、処理はステップS1902へ進む。 In step S1901, the transfer timing determination unit 1703 acquires the current time and requests the position detection unit 1702 to notify the current position of the transfer device 120. In response to the request, the position detection unit 1702 notifies the transfer time determination unit 1703 of the current latitude and longitude measured by the GPS unit 1601. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S1902.
 ステップS1902では、転送時期決定部1703は電力供給情報を利用して、電力保障期間と電力保障領域とを設定する。その後、処理はステップS1903へ進む。 In step S1902, the transfer timing determination unit 1703 uses the power supply information to set a power security period and a power security area. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S1903.
 ステップS1903では、転送時期決定部1703が、ステップS1902において電力保障期間と電力保障領域との両方の設定に成功したか否かを確認する。それら両方の設定が成功した場合、処理はステップS1904へ進み、少なくともいずれかの設定が失敗した場合、処理はステップS1906へ進む。 In step S1903, the transfer time determination unit 1703 confirms whether or not both the power security period and the power security area have been successfully set in step S1902. If both of these settings have succeeded, the process proceeds to step S1904. If at least one of the settings has failed, the process proceeds to step S1906.
 ステップS1904では、電力保障期間の設定が成功している。転送時期決定部1703は、現在の時刻がいずれかの電力保障期間に属しているか否かを判断する。現在の時刻がいずれかの電力保障期間に属している場合、処理はステップS1905へ進み、いずれの電力保障期間にも属していない場合、処理はステップS1906へ進む。 In step S1904, the power guarantee period is successfully set. The transfer time determination unit 1703 determines whether or not the current time belongs to any power guarantee period. If the current time belongs to any power guarantee period, the process proceeds to step S1905. If the current time does not belong to any power guarantee period, the process proceeds to step S1906.
 ステップS1905では、電力保障領域の設定が成功している。また、現在の時刻がいずれかの電力保障期間に属している。転送時期決定部1703は、その電力保障期間と対を成す電力保障領域に現時点での転送装置120の位置が属しているか否かを判断する。その電力保障領域に現時点での位置が属している場合、処理はステップS1907へ進み、属していない場合、処理はステップS1906へ進む。 In step S1905, the power security area has been successfully set. Further, the current time belongs to one of the power guarantee periods. The transfer timing determination unit 1703 determines whether or not the current position of the transfer device 120 belongs to the power guarantee area that forms a pair with the power guarantee period. If the current position belongs to the power guarantee area, the process proceeds to step S1907. If not, the process proceeds to step S1906.
 ステップS1906では、転送装置120が、外部電源から電力供給を受けることができるか否かが不明である。従って、転送時期決定部1703は電力監視部1701に、転送装置120が外部電源に接続されているか否かを問い合わせる。転送装置120が外部電源に接続されたことを電力監視部1701が検出した場合、処理はステップS1907へ進み、その検出がされるまでは、処理がステップS1906を繰り返す。 In step S1906, it is unknown whether the transfer device 120 can receive power from an external power source. Accordingly, the transfer time determination unit 1703 inquires of the power monitoring unit 1701 whether or not the transfer device 120 is connected to an external power source. If the power monitoring unit 1701 detects that the transfer device 120 is connected to the external power supply, the process proceeds to step S1907, and the process repeats step S1906 until the detection is detected.
 ステップS1907では、転送装置120が電力保障期間中に、対応する電力保障領域の中に位置しているので、転送装置120は、外部電源から電力供給を受けることができる状況にあるとみなすことができる。又は、転送装置120が実際に外部電源に接続されて、そこから電力供給を受けている。従って、転送時期決定部1703は、転送部312に記録装置110から記憶部305へのコンテンツの転送を許可する。その後、処理は終了する。 In step S1907, since the transfer device 120 is located in the corresponding power guarantee area during the power guarantee period, the transfer device 120 can be regarded as being in a state where it can receive power supply from an external power source. it can. Alternatively, the transfer device 120 is actually connected to an external power source and supplied with power therefrom. Therefore, the transfer time determination unit 1703 permits the transfer unit 312 to transfer content from the recording device 110 to the storage unit 305. Thereafter, the process ends.
  [実施形態2による転送装置の利点] [Advantages of transfer device according to embodiment 2]
 上記のとおり、本発明の実施形態2による転送装置120は、記録装置110からコンテンツを転送する際に、まず、現在の時刻がいずれかの電力保障期間に属し、かつ、その電力保障期間と対を成す電力保障領域に現時点での転送装置120の緯度と経度とが属しているかを判断する。その判断が肯定的であった場合、転送装置120は、実際には外部電源に接続されていなくても、外部電源から電力供給を受けることができる状況にあるとみなすことができる。従って、転送装置120が、実際には外部電源に接続されていない状態で記録装置110からのコンテンツの転送を直ちに開始し、その結果、その転送が完了するよりも前に電池切れが生じそうになったとしても、ユーザが速やかに転送装置120を外部電源に接続して電池切れを避ける可能性が十分に高い。こうして、転送装置120は、「記録装置110からコンテンツを転送する度に転送装置120を外部電源に接続させる」という手間をユーザにかけさせることなく、記録装置110からのコンテンツの転送処理による電池切れの危険性を抑制することができる。 As described above, when transferring a content from the recording device 110, the transfer device 120 according to the second embodiment of the present invention first has a current time that belongs to any one of the power guarantee periods, and is compatible with the power guarantee period. It is determined whether the latitude and longitude of the transfer device 120 at the present time belong to the power security area. If the determination is affirmative, the transfer device 120 can be regarded as being in a state where it can receive power supply from the external power supply even though it is not actually connected to the external power supply. Therefore, the transfer device 120 immediately starts transferring content from the recording device 110 in a state where it is not actually connected to an external power supply, and as a result, the battery is likely to run out before the transfer is completed. Even if this happens, there is a high possibility that the user will quickly connect the transfer device 120 to an external power source to avoid running out of the battery. In this way, the transfer device 120 does not require the user to connect the transfer device 120 to an external power source every time content is transferred from the recording device 110, and the battery is exhausted due to the transfer processing of the content from the recording device 110. Risk can be suppressed.
 《変形例》 <Modification>
 (M)図16に示されている転送装置120はGPS部1601によって位置を計測する。転送装置120はその他に、無線通信機能を利用して、位置が固定された基地局から受信される電波の強度に基づいて位置を計測してもよい。 (M) The transfer device 120 shown in FIG. 16 measures the position by the GPS unit 1601. In addition, the transfer device 120 may measure the position based on the intensity of the radio wave received from the base station whose position is fixed using the wireless communication function.
 (N)電力供給情報から電力保障期間/領域を設定する方法は、上記の方法には限られない。例えば、電力供給情報に含まれる項目間で重複する時間帯がまず検索され、その後、検索された時間帯における転送装置120の位置がGPSの精度で一致する頻度が算定されてもよい。また、転送時期決定部1703がユーザに電力保障期間/領域を設定させてもよい。 (N) The method of setting the power guarantee period / area from the power supply information is not limited to the above method. For example, a time zone that overlaps between items included in the power supply information may be searched first, and then the frequency with which the position of the transfer device 120 in the searched time zone matches with the accuracy of GPS may be calculated. Further, the transfer time determination unit 1703 may allow the user to set the power guarantee period / area.
 《実施形態3》 << Embodiment 3 >>
  [システムの概要] [System overview]
 本発明の実施形態3による映像コンテンツの記録再生システムは、実施形態1によるシステムとは、主に次の2点で異なる:(1)転送装置に代えて可搬性記録媒体が記録装置から再生装置へのコンテンツの転送に利用される。(2)転送装置に代えて記録装置が、可搬性記録媒体にコンテンツを記録する際の符号化形式を選択する。その他の構成及び機能は実施形態1によるシステムの構成及び機能と同様であるので、それら同様な構成及び機能については実施形態1についての説明を援用する。 The video content recording / playback system according to the third embodiment of the present invention differs from the system according to the first embodiment mainly in the following two points: (1) A portable recording medium is transferred from the recording device to the playback device instead of the transfer device. Used to transfer content to (2) A recording device, instead of the transfer device, selects an encoding format for recording content on a portable recording medium. Since other configurations and functions are the same as those of the system according to the first embodiment, the description of the first embodiment is used for the similar configurations and functions.
 図20は、本発明の実施形態3による可搬性記録媒体2000のデータ記録領域2010の構造を示す模式図である。この可搬性記録媒体2000はSDカード等のメモリカードである。その他に、USBメモリ、光ディスク、又はリムーバブルHDDであってもよい。メモリカード2000は、本発明の実施形態3によるシステムの含む記録装置と再生装置とのいずれにも接続可能である。図20を参照するに、メモリカード2000のデータ記録領域2010は6つの領域2001-2006を含む。第1領域2001には録画予約情報が記録される。第2領域2002には接続管理情報A-Dが記録される。接続管理情報A、B、C、Dはそれぞれ、メモリカード2000と4台の再生装置A、B、C、Dとの間の接続に関する接続管理情報である。第3領域2003には符号化形式管理情報A-Dが記録される。符号化形式管理情報A、…、Dはそれぞれ、再生装置A、…、Dによって復号可能な符号化形式に関する符号化形式管理情報である。第4領域2004には再生管理情報A-Dが記録される。再生管理情報A、…、Dはそれぞれ、再生装置A、…、Dがメモリカード2000に対して行った再生処理に関する再生管理情報である。第5領域2005には、記録装置から再生装置A-Dへ転送されるべきコンテンツとして、コンテンツ1;A-D及びコンテンツ2;A-Dが記録される。コンテンツ1;A、…、Dはそれぞれ、再生装置A、…、Dによって復号可能な符号化形式で同じコンテンツ1を符号化することによって得られたデータである。コンテンツ2;A-Dも同様である。第6領域2006には、第5領域2005に記録されたコンテンツのうち、再生装置A-Dのそれぞれによって再生可能なコンテンツの一覧が記録される。 FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the data recording area 2010 of the portable recording medium 2000 according to the third embodiment of the present invention. This portable recording medium 2000 is a memory card such as an SD card. In addition, a USB memory, an optical disk, or a removable HDD may be used. The memory card 2000 can be connected to both the recording device and the playback device included in the system according to the third embodiment of the present invention. Referring to FIG. 20, data recording area 2010 of memory card 2000 includes six areas 2001-2006. In the first area 2001, recording reservation information is recorded. In the second area 2002, connection management information AD is recorded. The connection management information A, B, C, and D are connection management information related to the connection between the memory card 2000 and the four playback devices A, B, C, and D, respectively. In the third area 2003, encoding format management information AD is recorded. Encoding format management information A,..., D is encoding format management information related to an encoding format that can be decoded by the playback devices A,. In the fourth area 2004, reproduction management information AD is recorded. Reproduction management information A,..., D is reproduction management information related to reproduction processing performed by the reproduction apparatuses A,. In the fifth area 2005, content 1; AD and content 2; AD are recorded as content to be transferred from the recording device to the playback device AD. Content 1; A,..., D are data obtained by encoding the same content 1 in an encoding format decodable by the playback devices A,. The same applies to content 2; AD. In the sixth area 2006, a list of contents that can be reproduced by each of the reproduction apparatuses AD among the contents recorded in the fifth area 2005 is recorded.
 図21は、本発明の実施形態3による映像コンテンツの記録再生システムを示す模式図である。図21に示されている矢印は、記録装置2110から再生装置A131-D134へ転送される際における映像コンテンツの動きを表している。それらの矢印が示すように、転送対象のコンテンツは、まず、記録装置2110によってメモリカード2000に書き込まれる。その後、メモリカード2000はユーザによって記録装置2110から取り外され、再生装置A131-D134のいずれかに接続される。それにより、転送対象のコンテンツは接続先の再生装置によってメモリカード2000から再生される。 FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram showing a video content recording / playback system according to Embodiment 3 of the present invention. The arrows shown in FIG. 21 represent the movement of video content when transferred from the recording device 2110 to the playback devices A131-D134. As indicated by the arrows, the content to be transferred is first written into the memory card 2000 by the recording device 2110. Thereafter, the memory card 2000 is removed from the recording device 2110 by the user and connected to one of the reproducing devices A131 to D134. As a result, the content to be transferred is reproduced from the memory card 2000 by the connected reproduction device.
 メモリカード2000が記録装置2110に接続されたとき、記録装置2110はまず、メモリカード2000から録画予約情報を読み出す。記録装置2110は次に、その録画予約情報に従って予約録画を行う。ここで、その予約録画が完了するまでの間に、メモリカード2000は一旦、記録装置2110から取り外されてもよい。予約録画が完了した後、メモリカード2000が記録装置2110に接続されたとき、記録装置2110はまず、メモリカード2000から、接続管理情報A-D、符号化形式管理情報A-D、及び再生管理情報A-Dを読み出す。記録装置2110は次に、読み出した管理情報に基づいて、再生装置A131-D134によって復号可能な符号化形式の中から1つ以上の符号化形式を選択し、録画したコンテンツをそれらの符号化形式で符号化してメモリカード2000に書き込む。符号化形式の選択処理では、メモリカード2000のデータ記録領域2010の使用状況、各再生装置131-134の再生履歴、及び、メモリカード2000と各再生装置131-134との間の接続履歴が参照される。その結果、メモリカード2000から再生装置A131-D134のいずれかへのコンテンツの転送に利用された頻度が高い符号化形式で符号化されたデータから順に、メモリカード2000に書き込まれる。その上、選択された符号化形式で転送対象のコンテンツを符号化することによって得られるデータの全体がメモリカード2000に記録されるように、選択される符号化形式の数が制限される。記録装置2110は更に、メモリカード2000に格納されたコンテンツのうち、各再生装置131-134によって復号可能な符号化形式で符号化されたコンテンツの一覧を生成して、メモリカード2000に書き込む。 When the memory card 2000 is connected to the recording device 2110, the recording device 2110 first reads the recording reservation information from the memory card 2000. Next, the recording device 2110 performs reserved recording according to the recording reservation information. Here, the memory card 2000 may be temporarily removed from the recording device 2110 until the scheduled recording is completed. When the memory card 2000 is connected to the recording device 2110 after the scheduled recording is completed, the recording device 2110 first starts from the memory card 2000 with connection management information AD, encoding format management information AD, and reproduction management. Read information AD. Next, the recording apparatus 2110 selects one or more encoding formats from among the encoding formats that can be decoded by the reproducing apparatuses A131 to D134 based on the read management information, and records the recorded content in those encoding formats. Is encoded and written to the memory card 2000. In the encoding format selection process, the usage status of the data recording area 2010 of the memory card 2000, the playback history of each playback device 131-134, and the connection history between the memory card 2000 and each playback device 131-134 are referred to. Is done. As a result, data encoded in the encoding format having a high frequency used for transferring contents from the memory card 2000 to any one of the playback devices A131 to D134 is written in the memory card 2000 in order. In addition, the number of encoding formats to be selected is limited so that the entire data obtained by encoding the content to be transferred in the selected encoding format is recorded on the memory card 2000. The recording device 2110 further generates a list of content encoded in an encoding format that can be decoded by each of the playback devices 131 to 134 out of the content stored in the memory card 2000, and writes the list to the memory card 2000.
 メモリカード2000が各再生装置131-134に接続されたとき、その再生装置は録画予約情報をメモリカード2000に書き込む。その再生装置は更に、必要に応じて、メモリカード2000に格納された自身に関する符号化形式管理情報を更新する。その一方で、各再生装置131-134はメモリカード2000からコンテンツの一覧を読み出して画面に表示する。続いて、ユーザから再生対象のコンテンツが指定された場合、各再生装置131-134はそのコンテンツをメモリカード2000から読み出して再生する。その再生処理が完了したとき、各再生装置131-134は、メモリカード2000に格納された自身に関する再生管理情報を更新する。その後、ユーザからメモリカード2000の取り外しが指示されたとき、各再生装置131-134は、メモリカード2000に格納された自身に関する接続管理情報を更新して、メモリカード2000との接続を遮断する。 When the memory card 2000 is connected to each playback device 131-134, the playback device writes the recording reservation information to the memory card 2000. The playback apparatus further updates the encoding format management information related to itself stored in the memory card 2000 as necessary. On the other hand, each playback device 131-134 reads a list of contents from the memory card 2000 and displays it on the screen. Subsequently, when content to be played is designated by the user, each playback device 131-134 reads the content from the memory card 2000 and plays it. When the playback processing is completed, each playback device 131-134 updates the playback management information related to itself stored in the memory card 2000. Thereafter, when the user instructs removal of the memory card 2000, each of the playback devices 131-134 updates the connection management information regarding itself stored in the memory card 2000, and disconnects the connection with the memory card 2000.
 上記のとおり、本発明の実施形態3による記録再生システムでは、記録装置2110から各再生装置131-134へコンテンツを転送するのにメモリカード2000が利用される。それにより、記録装置2110へ直に接続することができない再生装置A131-D134にも、記録装置2110によって録画されたコンテンツを再生させることができる。更に、記録装置2110は、再生装置A131-D134によって復号可能な符号化形式の中から、記録装置110がメモリカード2000へ所望のコンテンツを書き込む際に利用すべき符号化形式を選択する。そのとき、選択される符号化形式の数は、それらの符号化形式で所望のコンテンツを符号化することによって得られるデータの全体がメモリカード2000に記録されるように制限される。従って、メモリカード2000の空き容量が不足する場合、再生装置A131-D134によって復号可能な符号化形式の全てを選択することができない。しかし、記録装置2110は符号化形式を、メモリカード2000から再生装置A131-D134のいずれかへのコンテンツの転送に利用された頻度が高い順に選択する。この頻度が高い符号化形式のコンテンツほど、再生装置A131-D134のいずれかによって再生される可能性が高い。従って、メモリカード2000には、再生される可能性の高い符号化形式で所望のコンテンツを符号化することによって得られるデータが優先的に記録される。このように、記録装置2110は、メモリカード2000の空き容量が不足する場合、コンテンツの符号化形式を適切に選択することができる。 As described above, in the recording / reproducing system according to the third embodiment of the present invention, the memory card 2000 is used to transfer content from the recording device 2110 to each of the reproducing devices 131-134. As a result, the content recorded by the recording device 2110 can be reproduced by the reproducing devices A131 to D134 that cannot be directly connected to the recording device 2110. Further, the recording device 2110 selects an encoding format to be used when the recording device 110 writes desired content to the memory card 2000 from among encoding formats that can be decoded by the reproducing devices A131 to D134. At that time, the number of encoding formats to be selected is limited so that the entire data obtained by encoding the desired content in these encoding formats is recorded in the memory card 2000. Therefore, when the free space of the memory card 2000 is insufficient, it is not possible to select all of the encoding formats that can be decoded by the playback devices A131 to D134. However, the recording device 2110 selects the encoding format in descending order of frequency of use for transferring contents from the memory card 2000 to any one of the playback devices A131 to D134. The more frequently encoded content is more likely to be played back by one of the playback devices A131-D134. Accordingly, the memory card 2000 preferentially records data obtained by encoding desired content in an encoding format that is highly likely to be reproduced. As described above, the recording device 2110 can appropriately select the content encoding format when the free space of the memory card 2000 is insufficient.
  [記録装置の構成] [Recording device configuration]
 図22は、図21に示されている記録装置2110の構成を示すブロック図である。図22に示されている記録装置2110は、図2に示されている記録装置110とは、制御部202が符号化形式選択部2210を更に含む点で異なる。その他の要素については、図22に示されている記録装置2110は、図2に示されている記録装置110と同様である。従って、それら同様な要素の詳細については、実施形態1での説明を援用する。 FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the recording apparatus 2110 shown in FIG. The recording apparatus 2110 shown in FIG. 22 is different from the recording apparatus 110 shown in FIG. 2 in that the control unit 202 further includes an encoding format selection unit 2210. Regarding other elements, the recording apparatus 2110 shown in FIG. 22 is the same as the recording apparatus 110 shown in FIG. Therefore, for the details of these similar elements, the description in Embodiment 1 is incorporated.
 制御部202は、CPUによって実行されるファームウェアの種類により様々な機能部として動作する。それらの機能部は、図2に示されている録画部221、接続管理部222、転送部223、及び符号化部224に加えて、符号化形式選択部2210を更に含む。 The control unit 202 operates as various functional units depending on the type of firmware executed by the CPU. These functional units further include an encoding format selection unit 2210 in addition to the recording unit 221, the connection management unit 222, the transfer unit 223, and the encoding unit 224 shown in FIG.
 録画部221は、I/Oポート206を通してメモリカード2000から録画予約情報を読み出す。録画部221はその他に、ユーザの指示に従って録画予約情報を生成する。こうして得られた録画予約情報に従い、録画部221は予約録画を行う。録画部221はまた、録画予約情報をメモリカード2000から読み出した場合には、そのメモリカード2000の識別情報を録画予約情報と共に転送部223へ通知する。一方、録画部221は、録画予約情報を自ら生成した場合には、デフォルトの記録媒体の識別情報を録画予約情報と共に転送部223へ通知する。録画部221は更に、予約録画を終えた際に、録画されたコンテンツの識別情報とデータ量とを録画完了通知に設定して、その通知を転送部223へ送信する。 The recording unit 221 reads recording reservation information from the memory card 2000 through the I / O port 206. In addition, the recording unit 221 generates recording reservation information in accordance with a user instruction. According to the recording reservation information thus obtained, the recording unit 221 performs reserved recording. When the recording reservation information is read from the memory card 2000, the recording unit 221 notifies the transfer unit 223 of the identification information of the memory card 2000 together with the recording reservation information. On the other hand, when the recording unit 221 generates the recording reservation information itself, it notifies the transfer unit 223 of the default recording medium identification information together with the recording reservation information. Further, when the scheduled recording is finished, the recording unit 221 sets the recorded content identification information and the data amount in the recording completion notification, and transmits the notification to the transfer unit 223.
 接続管理部222は、I/Oポート206がメモリカード2000との接続を確立する際に、そのメモリカード2000に関する接続管理情報を記憶部208から読み出して、I/Oポート206に利用させる。接続管理部222は更に、I/Oポート206がメモリカード2000との接続を切断する度に、その接続に関する情報をI/Oポート206から受け付けて、その情報を利用して接続管理情報を更新する。 When the I / O port 206 establishes a connection with the memory card 2000, the connection management unit 222 reads connection management information related to the memory card 2000 from the storage unit 208 and causes the I / O port 206 to use it. Further, each time the I / O port 206 disconnects from the memory card 2000, the connection management unit 222 receives information related to the connection from the I / O port 206 and updates the connection management information using the information. To do.
 転送部223は、録画部221から通知された録画予約情報と記録媒体の識別情報との対を記憶部208に格納する。転送部223は更に、録画部221から録画完了通知を受信した場合、その通知の示すコンテンツの識別情報を含む録画予約情報を記憶部208から検索し、その録画予約情報に対応付けられた記録媒体の識別情報を特定する。転送部223はその後、その記録媒体の識別情報を接続管理部222に利用させて、I/Oポート206がその記録媒体との接続を確立したか否かを監視させる。I/Oポート206とメモリカード2000との接続の確立が接続管理部222によって検出された場合、転送部223は、接続管理情報、再生管理情報、及び符号化形式管理情報をメモリカード2000から読み出して符号化形式選択部2210へ渡すと共に、符号化形式選択部2210に符号化形式の選択を要求する。選択対象の符号化形式は、録画完了通知の示すコンテンツを転送部223がメモリカード2000へ転送する際に利用すべきものである。転送部223はまた、録画されたコンテンツの符号化形式とデータ量とを録画完了通知から読み取って符号化形式選択部2210へ渡し、符号化形式の選択に利用させる。符号化形式選択部2210によって符号化形式が選択された後、転送部223は、その符号化形式が、録画されたコンテンツの符号化形式と一致するか否かを判断する。両方の符号化形式が一致した場合、転送部223はそのコンテンツをそのまま、記憶部208からメモリカード2000へ転送する。一方、両方の符号化形式が一致しなかった場合、転送部223は符号化部224にそのコンテンツの符号化形式を、符号化形式選択部2210によって選択された符号化形式に変換させ、その後、そのコンテンツをメモリカード2000へ書き込む。 The transfer unit 223 stores the pair of the recording reservation information notified from the recording unit 221 and the identification information of the recording medium in the storage unit 208. Further, when receiving a recording completion notification from the recording unit 221, the transfer unit 223 searches the storage unit 208 for recording reservation information including content identification information indicated by the notification, and a recording medium associated with the recording reservation information Identify the identification information. Thereafter, the transfer unit 223 causes the connection management unit 222 to use the identification information of the recording medium to monitor whether the I / O port 206 has established a connection with the recording medium. When the connection management unit 222 detects that the connection between the I / O port 206 and the memory card 2000 is established, the transfer unit 223 reads the connection management information, the reproduction management information, and the encoding format management information from the memory card 2000. To the encoding format selection unit 2210 and requests the encoding format selection unit 2210 to select the encoding format. The encoding format to be selected should be used when the transfer unit 223 transfers the content indicated by the recording completion notification to the memory card 2000. The transfer unit 223 also reads the recording format and the data amount of the recorded content from the recording completion notification and passes them to the encoding format selection unit 2210 to be used for selection of the encoding format. After the encoding format is selected by the encoding format selection unit 2210, the transfer unit 223 determines whether the encoding format matches the encoding format of the recorded content. If both encoding formats match, the transfer unit 223 transfers the content as it is from the storage unit 208 to the memory card 2000. On the other hand, if both encoding formats do not match, the transfer unit 223 causes the encoding unit 224 to convert the encoding format of the content into the encoding format selected by the encoding format selection unit 2210, and then The content is written to the memory card 2000.
 転送部223は続いて、符号化形式管理情報を符号化形式選択部2210から取得し、その符号化形式管理情報に基づいてコンテンツの一覧を生成する。そのコンテンツの一覧は、メモリカード2000に格納されたコンテンツのうち、各再生装置131-134によって復号可能な符号化形式で符号化されたコンテンツの識別情報を示す。転送部223は更に、そのコンテンツの一覧をメモリカード2000へ書き込む。 Subsequently, the transfer unit 223 acquires the encoding format management information from the encoding format selection unit 2210, and generates a list of contents based on the encoding format management information. The list of contents indicates identification information of contents encoded in an encoding format that can be decoded by each of the playback devices 131 to 134 among the contents stored in the memory card 2000. The transfer unit 223 further writes the list of contents into the memory card 2000.
 符号化形式選択部2210は、各再生装置131-134に関する再生管理情報を参照して、その再生装置がメモリカード2000に対して行った最新の転送動作から一定回数前、例えば10回前の転送動作までの履歴を調べる。符号化形式選択部2210は更に、その履歴から、その再生装置が1時間当たりに再生する平均的なデータ量を算定して、符号化形式管理情報に組み込む。 The encoding format selection unit 2210 refers to the playback management information regarding each playback device 131-134, and transfers a certain number of times before the latest transfer operation performed by the playback device to the memory card 2000, for example, 10 times before. Check the history up to the operation. The encoding format selection unit 2210 further calculates an average amount of data that the playback device reproduces per hour from the history and incorporates it in the encoding format management information.
 符号化形式選択部2210はメモリカード2000の使用状況、具体的には、データ記録領域の中で実際に使用されている領域の変化を監視する。符号化形式選択部2210は更に、転送部223から符号化形式の選択を要求されたとき、メモリカード2000の使用状況に基づいて使用領域のサイズを算定し、そのサイズを閾値と比較する。 The encoding format selection unit 2210 monitors the usage status of the memory card 2000, specifically, changes in the area actually used in the data recording area. Further, when the encoding format selection unit 2210 is requested by the transfer unit 223 to select an encoding format, the encoding format selection unit 2210 calculates the size of the usage area based on the usage status of the memory card 2000 and compares the size with a threshold value.
 メモリカード2000の使用領域のサイズが閾値を超えていない場合、そのメモリカード2000の空き容量が十分に大きい。符号化形式選択部2210は、転送部223から取得した接続管理情報を参照して、メモリカード2000との接続頻度が所定値よりも高い再生装置をコンテンツの転送先に設定する。その所定値は、接続頻度が少なくともどの程度であれば、その再生装置をコンテンツの再生に利用する可能性があるかによって決まる。特にその所定値が0である場合、過去にメモリカード2000と一度でも接続されたことのある再生装置は全て、コンテンツの転送先に設定される。 If the size of the used area of the memory card 2000 does not exceed the threshold, the free space of the memory card 2000 is sufficiently large. The encoding format selection unit 2210 refers to the connection management information acquired from the transfer unit 223, and sets a playback device having a connection frequency with the memory card 2000 higher than a predetermined value as a content transfer destination. The predetermined value depends on at least how often the connection frequency is likely to be used for reproducing the content. In particular, when the predetermined value is 0, all playback devices that have been connected to the memory card 2000 in the past are set as the content transfer destination.
 メモリカード2000の使用領域のサイズが閾値を超えている場合、そのメモリカード2000の空き容量が不足する可能性が高いので、転送先の再生装置の台数を制限することによって、メモリカード2000に記録されるべきコンテンツのデータ量を制限する必要がある。符号化形式選択部2210はまず、転送部223から取得した再生管理情報から各再生装置131-134の再生頻度を取得する。符号化形式選択部2210は次に、再生装置A131-D134の中から1台以上を、再生頻度の高い順にコンテンツの転送先として選択する。符号化形式選択部2210はそのとき、実施形態1による転送装置120の含む符号化形式選択部313と同様にして、転送先の再生装置の台数を制限する。具体的には、まず、記録装置2110によって録画されたコンテンツのうち、メモリカード2000へまだ転送されていないコンテンツを、転送先の再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式で符号化することによって得られるデータ量が予測される。次に、予測されたデータ量がメモリカード2000の空き容量を超えないように、転送先の再生装置の台数が制限される。 If the size of the used area of the memory card 2000 exceeds the threshold, there is a high possibility that the memory card 2000 will run out of free space, so recording on the memory card 2000 is limited by limiting the number of transfer destination playback devices. There is a need to limit the amount of content data to be done. The encoding format selection unit 2210 first acquires the playback frequency of each playback device 131-134 from the playback management information acquired from the transfer unit 223. Next, the encoding format selection unit 2210 selects one or more of the playback devices A131 to D134 as content transfer destinations in descending order of playback frequency. At that time, the encoding format selection unit 2210 limits the number of transfer destination playback devices in the same manner as the encoding format selection unit 313 included in the transfer device 120 according to the first embodiment. Specifically, first, content that has not yet been transferred to the memory card 2000 among the content recorded by the recording device 2110 is encoded in an encoding format that can be decoded by the playback device at the transfer destination. The amount of data is predicted. Next, the number of transfer destination playback devices is limited so that the predicted data amount does not exceed the free capacity of the memory card 2000.
 符号化形式選択部2210は続いて、転送部223から取得した符号化形式管理情報を参照し、転送先の再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式を選択候補として特定する。符号化形式選択部2210は更に、再生管理情報が示す再生頻度と再生履歴とから、選択候補の各符号化形式がメモリカード2000からいずれかの再生装置へのコンテンツの転送に利用された頻度を算定する。その上で符号化形式選択部2210は、選択候補の符号化形式の中から1つ以上の符号化形式を、上記の頻度が高い順に選択する。その選択処理では、符号化形式選択部2210はまず、選択された符号化形式で所望のコンテンツを符号化することによって得られるデータ量を予測する。符号化形式選択部2210は次に、予測されたデータ量がメモリカード2000の空き容量を超えないように、選択される符号化形式の数を制限する。メモリカード2000の使用領域のサイズが閾値を超えている場合、符号化形式選択部2210は、転送先以外の再生装置のみによって復号可能な符号化データをメモリカード2000から削除する。それにより、符号化形式選択部2210はメモリカード2000の空き容量を可能な限り拡大して、所望のコンテンツを可能な限り多くの符号化形式でメモリカード2000に記録できるようにする。こうして選択された符号化形式を符号化形式選択部2210は、転送部223がメモリカード2000へ所望のコンテンツを記録する際に利用すべき符号化形式として決定し、転送部223へ通知する。 Next, the encoding format selection unit 2210 refers to the encoding format management information acquired from the transfer unit 223, and specifies an encoding format that can be decoded by the transfer destination playback device as a selection candidate. The encoding format selection unit 2210 further determines, from the playback frequency and playback history indicated by the playback management information, the frequency at which each encoding format of the selection candidate was used to transfer content from the memory card 2000 to any playback device. Calculate. In addition, the encoding format selection unit 2210 selects one or more encoding formats from the selection candidate encoding formats in the order of the above-mentioned frequencies. In the selection process, the encoding format selection unit 2210 first predicts the data amount obtained by encoding the desired content in the selected encoding format. Next, the encoding format selection unit 2210 limits the number of encoding formats to be selected so that the predicted data amount does not exceed the free capacity of the memory card 2000. When the size of the used area of the memory card 2000 exceeds the threshold value, the encoding format selection unit 2210 deletes the encoded data that can be decoded only by the playback device other than the transfer destination from the memory card 2000. Thereby, the encoding format selection unit 2210 expands the free space of the memory card 2000 as much as possible, and enables desired content to be recorded in the memory card 2000 in as many encoding formats as possible. The encoding format selection unit 2210 determines the encoding format thus selected as an encoding format to be used when the transfer unit 223 records desired content on the memory card 2000, and notifies the transfer unit 223 of the determination.
  [コンテンツの記録再生処理] [Content recording / playback processing]
 図23は、図21に示されているシステムによるコンテンツの記録再生処理のフローチャートである。この処理は、メモリカード2000が再生装置A131-D134のいずれかに接続されたときに開始される。 FIG. 23 is a flowchart of content recording / playback processing by the system shown in FIG. This process is started when the memory card 2000 is connected to one of the playback devices A131-D134.
 ステップS2301では、メモリカード2000が接続された再生装置130の再生部521がメモリカード2000へ符号化形式管理情報を送信する。更に、その再生装置130の録画予約部522が録画予約情報を転送装置120へ送信する。ここで、その再生装置130に関する符号化形式管理情報がメモリカード2000に既に格納されていれば、その再生装置130の再生部521は符号化形式管理情報を改めて送信しなくてもよい。その後、処理はステップS2302へ進む。 In step S2301, the playback unit 521 of the playback device 130 connected to the memory card 2000 transmits the encoding format management information to the memory card 2000. Further, the recording reservation unit 522 of the playback device 130 transmits the recording reservation information to the transfer device 120. Here, if the encoding format management information related to the playback device 130 is already stored in the memory card 2000, the playback unit 521 of the playback device 130 may not transmit the encoding format management information again. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2302.
 ステップS2302では、メモリカード2000が記録装置2110に接続された際、記録装置2110の録画部221がメモリカード2000から録画予約情報を読み出す。録画部221は更に、その録画予約情報をメモリカード2000の識別情報と共に転送部223へ通知する。転送部223はその通知に応じて、録画予約情報とメモリカード2000の識別情報との対を記憶部208に格納する。その後、処理はステップS2303へ進む。 In step S2302, when the memory card 2000 is connected to the recording device 2110, the recording unit 221 of the recording device 2110 reads the recording reservation information from the memory card 2000. The recording unit 221 further notifies the transfer unit 223 of the recording reservation information together with the identification information of the memory card 2000. In response to the notification, the transfer unit 223 stores the pair of the recording reservation information and the identification information of the memory card 2000 in the storage unit 208. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2303.
 ステップS2303では、記録装置2110の録画部221が、記憶部208に格納された録画予約情報に従って予約録画を行う。その予約録画が完了したとき、録画部221は録画完了通知を記録装置2110の転送部223へ送信する。転送部223はその通知に応じて、その通知の示すコンテンツの識別情報を含む録画予約情報を記憶部208から検索し、その録画予約情報に対応付けられたメモリカード2000の識別情報を特定する。転送部223は更に、その識別情報を接続管理部222に利用させて、I/Oポート206がメモリカード2000との接続を確立したか否かを監視させる。その後、処理はステップS2304へ進む。 In step S2303, the recording unit 221 of the recording device 2110 performs reserved recording according to the recording reservation information stored in the storage unit 208. When the scheduled recording is completed, the recording unit 221 transmits a recording completion notification to the transfer unit 223 of the recording device 2110. In response to the notification, the transfer unit 223 searches the storage unit 208 for recording reservation information including the identification information of the content indicated by the notification, and identifies the identification information of the memory card 2000 associated with the recording reservation information. The transfer unit 223 further causes the connection management unit 222 to use the identification information to monitor whether the I / O port 206 has established a connection with the memory card 2000. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S2304.
 ステップS2304では、I/Oポート206がメモリカード2000との接続の確立が接続管理部222によって検出される。その場合、転送部223は、接続管理情報、再生管理情報、及び符号化形式管理情報をメモリカード2000から読み出して符号化形式選択部2210へ渡すと共に、符号化形式選択部2210に符号化形式の選択を要求する。符号化形式選択部2210はその要求に応じて符号化形式を選択する。その選択処理の詳細は、実施形態1によるものと同様である。その後、処理はステップS2305へ進む。 In step S2304, the connection management unit 222 detects that the I / O port 206 is connected to the memory card 2000. In that case, the transfer unit 223 reads the connection management information, the reproduction management information, and the encoding format management information from the memory card 2000 and passes them to the encoding format selection unit 2210, and the encoding format selection unit 2210 stores the encoding format information. Request selection. The encoding format selection unit 2210 selects an encoding format according to the request. The details of the selection process are the same as those according to the first embodiment. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S2305.
 ステップS2305では、符号化形式選択部2210によって選択された符号化形式が、録画されたコンテンツの符号化形式と一致するか否かを、記録装置2110の転送部223が判断する。両方の符号化形式が一致した場合、転送部223はそのコンテンツをそのまま、記憶部208からメモリカード2000へ転送する。一方、両方の符号化形式が一致しなかった場合、転送部223はまず、符号化部224にそのコンテンツの符号化形式を、符号化形式選択部2210によって選択された符号化形式に変換させる。転送部223は次に、そのコンテンツをメモリカード2000へ書き込む。転送部223は続いて、符号化形式管理情報を符号化形式選択部2210から取得し、その符号化形式管理情報に基づいてコンテンツの一覧を生成して、メモリカード2000へ書き込む。その後、処理はステップS2306へ進む。 In step S2305, the transfer unit 223 of the recording device 2110 determines whether or not the encoding format selected by the encoding format selection unit 2210 matches the encoding format of the recorded content. If both encoding formats match, the transfer unit 223 transfers the content as it is from the storage unit 208 to the memory card 2000. On the other hand, if the two encoding formats do not match, the transfer unit 223 first causes the encoding unit 224 to convert the encoding format of the content into the encoding format selected by the encoding format selection unit 2210. Next, the transfer unit 223 writes the content to the memory card 2000. Subsequently, the transfer unit 223 acquires the encoding format management information from the encoding format selection unit 2210, generates a list of contents based on the encoding format management information, and writes the content list to the memory card 2000. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S2306.
 ステップS2306では、メモリカード2000が再生装置A131-D134のいずれかに接続された際、その再生装置130の再生部521がメモリカード2000からコンテンツの一覧を読み出して表示部503に表示させ、ユーザに再生対象のコンテンツの指定を促す。その後、処理はステップS2307へ進む。 In step S2306, when the memory card 2000 is connected to any of the playback devices A131 to D134, the playback unit 521 of the playback device 130 reads the content list from the memory card 2000 and causes the display unit 503 to display the content list. Prompt to specify the content to be played. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S2307.
 ステップS2307では、再生装置130の操作部505がユーザの指示を受け付けて、その指示に従って再生対象のコンテンツの識別情報を特定する。再生装置130の再生部521はその識別情報を利用して、再生対象のコンテンツをメモリカード2000から読み出して復号し、表示部503に再生させる。その後、処理はステップS2308へ進む。 In step S2307, the operation unit 505 of the playback device 130 receives an instruction from the user, and specifies identification information of the content to be played according to the instruction. Using the identification information, the playback unit 521 of the playback device 130 reads the content to be played back from the memory card 2000, decodes it, and causes the display unit 503 to play it back. Thereafter, processing proceeds to step S2308.
 ステップS2308では、コンテンツの再生処理が完了したとき、再生装置130の再生部521は、メモリカード2000に格納された自身に関する再生管理情報を更新する。その後、ユーザからメモリカード2000の取り外しが指示されたとき、再生装置130の接続管理部523は、メモリカード2000に格納された自身に関する接続管理情報を更新して、メモリカード2000との接続を遮断する。その後、処理は終了する。 In step S2308, when the content playback process is completed, the playback unit 521 of the playback device 130 updates the playback management information related to itself stored in the memory card 2000. After that, when the user instructs removal of the memory card 2000, the connection management unit 523 of the playback device 130 updates the connection management information related to itself stored in the memory card 2000 and cuts off the connection with the memory card 2000. To do. Thereafter, the process ends.
  [実施形態3による記録装置の利点] [Advantages of recording apparatus according to Embodiment 3]
 記録装置2110は、メモリカード2000に所望のコンテンツを転送する際、その転送に利用されるべき符号化形式を、再生装置A131-D134によって復号可能な符号化形式の中から選択する。そのとき、選択される符号化形式の数は、それらの符号化形式で所望のコンテンツを符号化することによって得られるデータの全体がメモリカード2000に記録されるように制限される。従って、メモリカード2000の空き容量が不足する場合、再生装置A131-D134によって復号可能な符号化形式の全てを選択することができない。そこで、記録装置2110は符号化形式を、メモリカード2000から再生装置A131-D134のいずれかへのコンテンツの転送に利用された頻度が高い順に選択する。この頻度が高い符号化形式のコンテンツほど、再生装置A131-D134のいずれかによって再生される可能性が高い。それ故、メモリカード2000には、再生される可能性の高い符号化形式で所望のコンテンツを符号化することによって得られるデータが優先的に記録される。このように、記録装置2110は、メモリカード2000の空き容量が不足する場合、コンテンツの符号化形式を適切に選択することができる。 When transferring desired content to the memory card 2000, the recording device 2110 selects an encoding format to be used for the transfer from among encoding formats that can be decoded by the playback devices A131-D134. At that time, the number of encoding formats to be selected is limited so that the entire data obtained by encoding the desired content in these encoding formats is recorded in the memory card 2000. Therefore, when the free space of the memory card 2000 is insufficient, it is not possible to select all of the encoding formats that can be decoded by the playback devices A131 to D134. Accordingly, the recording device 2110 selects the encoding format in descending order of frequency of use for transferring contents from the memory card 2000 to any one of the playback devices A131 to D134. The more frequently encoded content is more likely to be played back by one of the playback devices A131-D134. Therefore, the memory card 2000 preferentially records data obtained by encoding desired content in an encoding format that is highly likely to be reproduced. As described above, the recording device 2110 can appropriately select the content encoding format when the free space of the memory card 2000 is insufficient.
 《変形例》 <Modification>
 (O)本発明の実施形態3による記録再生システムでは、録画予約情報及び符号化形式管理情報が、各再生装置131-134からメモリカード2000を経由して記録装置2110へ伝達される。その他に、録画予約情報等が各再生装置131-134から、ホーム・ネットワーク又はインターネット等のネットワークを経由して記録装置2110へ伝達されてもよい。その場合でも、録画されたコンテンツは、記録装置2110からメモリカード2000を経由して各再生装置131-134へ転送される。それにより、コンテンツの転送に起因するネットワーク・トラフィックの過剰な増大を防止することができる。また、この場合、メモリカード2000には、録画予約情報及び符号化形式管理情報を記録するための領域2001、2003が確保されていなくもよい。 (O) In the recording / reproducing system according to the third embodiment of the present invention, the recording reservation information and the encoding format management information are transmitted from each reproducing device 131-134 to the recording device 2110 via the memory card 2000. In addition, the recording reservation information or the like may be transmitted from each playback device 131-134 to the recording device 2110 via a home network or a network such as the Internet. Even in this case, the recorded content is transferred from the recording device 2110 via the memory card 2000 to each of the playback devices 131-134. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an excessive increase in network traffic due to the transfer of content. In this case, the memory card 2000 may not have the areas 2001 and 2003 for recording the recording reservation information and the encoding format management information.
 《補足》 << Supplement >>
 本発明は、上記の実施形態に基づき、以下のように特徴付けられてもよい。 The present invention may be characterized as follows based on the above embodiment.
 本発明の1つの観点による制御装置では、決定部が、履歴管理部の管理する履歴に基づき、複数の再生装置のそれぞれによって復号可能な符号化形式のそれぞれについて、記憶装置からいずれかの再生装置へのコンテンツの転送に利用された頻度を算定し、その頻度が高い順に、いずれかの再生装置へのコンテンツの転送に利用される可能性が高いとみなしてもよい。その他に、履歴管理部が、各再生装置が記憶装置からコンテンツを再生する動作、又は記憶装置との接続を確立する動作の頻度を算定し、決定部が、その頻度の高い再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式を、いずれかの再生装置へのコンテンツの転送に利用される可能性が高い符号化形式とみなしてもよい。いずれの場合でも、各符号化形式がいずれかの再生装置へのコンテンツの転送に利用される可能性を、適切に評価することができる。 In the control device according to one aspect of the present invention, the determination unit determines from the storage device any one of the encoding formats that can be decoded by each of the plurality of playback devices based on the history managed by the history management unit. The frequency used to transfer the content to the playback device may be calculated, and it may be considered that there is a high possibility that the content will be used to transfer the content to any of the playback devices in descending order of the frequency. In addition, the history management unit calculates the frequency at which each playback device plays back content from the storage device, or establishes a connection with the storage device, and the decision unit can decode it by the playback device with the higher frequency. Such an encoding format may be regarded as an encoding format that is highly likely to be used for transferring content to any of the playback devices. In any case, it is possible to appropriately evaluate the possibility that each encoding format is used for transferring content to any one of the playback devices.
 本発明の別の観点による制御装置では、監視部、履歴管理部、及び決定部が次のように動作してもよい。監視部は記憶装置の使用領域のサイズを所定の閾値と比較する。履歴管理部は、複数の再生装置のそれぞれが記憶装置からコンテンツを再生する動作、又は記憶装置との接続を確立する動作の頻度を算定する。決定部は、記憶装置の使用領域のサイズが閾値を超えている場合、複数の再生装置の中から1台以上の再生装置を、上記の頻度が高い順に転送先の再生装置として選択し、決定部によって決定される符号化形式の候補を、転送先の再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式に制限する。その結果、記憶装置の空き容量が不足する場合、いずれかの再生装置へのコンテンツの転送に利用される可能性が高い符号化形式が優先的に選択される。こうして、その制御装置はコンテンツの符号化形式を適切に選択することができる。 In the control device according to another aspect of the present invention, the monitoring unit, the history management unit, and the determination unit may operate as follows. The monitoring unit compares the size of the used area of the storage device with a predetermined threshold value. The history management unit calculates the frequency of the operation for each of the plurality of playback devices to play back content from the storage device or to establish a connection with the storage device. When the size of the used area of the storage device exceeds the threshold, the determination unit selects one or more playback devices from the plurality of playback devices as the transfer destination playback device in the order of the above-mentioned frequency, and determines The encoding format candidates determined by the unit are limited to encoding formats that can be decoded by the playback apparatus at the transfer destination. As a result, when the free space of the storage device is insufficient, an encoding format that is highly likely to be used for transferring content to any of the playback devices is preferentially selected. Thus, the control apparatus can appropriately select the content encoding format.
 この制御装置では更に、決定部は、記憶装置の使用領域のサイズが閾値未満である場合、複数の再生装置の中から、記憶装置との接続を確立する動作の頻度が所定値を超えている再生装置を選択し、決定部によって決定される符号化形式の候補を、選択された再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式に制限してもよい。それにより、記憶装置の空き容量に余裕がある場合でも、その空き容量を徒に消費することがない。 Further, in this control device, the determination unit, when the size of the use area of the storage device is less than the threshold, the frequency of the operation of establishing a connection with the storage device from a plurality of playback devices exceeds a predetermined value. A playback device may be selected, and encoding format candidates determined by the determination unit may be limited to encoding formats that can be decoded by the selected playback device. As a result, even if there is a free space in the storage device, the free space is not consumed.
 所望のコンテンツが、記録装置によって予約録画されるべき放送番組である場合、上記の制御装置が録画予約管理部とデータ量予測部とを更に備えていてもよい。録画予約管理部は、記録装置による予約録画に関する情報を管理する。データ量予測部は、複数の再生装置のそれぞれによって復号可能な符号化形式と予約録画に関する情報とから、所望のコンテンツを特定の符号化形式で符号化することによって得られるデータ量を予測する。その場合、決定部は、転送先の再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式で所望のコンテンツを符号化することによって得られるデータ量をデータ量予測部に予測させ、予測値が記憶装置の空き容量を超えないように、転送先の再生装置の台数を制限してもよい。 When the desired content is a broadcast program that should be reserved and recorded by the recording device, the control device may further include a recording reservation management unit and a data amount prediction unit. The recording reservation management unit manages information related to reserved recording by the recording device. The data amount prediction unit predicts the data amount obtained by encoding the desired content in a specific encoding format from the encoding format decodable by each of the plurality of playback devices and information related to the reserved recording. In this case, the determination unit causes the data amount prediction unit to predict the amount of data obtained by encoding the desired content in an encoding format that can be decoded by the playback device of the transfer destination, and the predicted value is the free capacity of the storage device. The number of playback devices as transfer destinations may be limited so as not to exceed.
 記憶装置を外部電源と電池との両方で駆動することが可能である場合、上記の制御装置が、電力監視部、位置検出部、及び転送時期決定部を更に備えていてもよい。電力監視部は、記憶装置が外部電源から電力供給を受けているか否かを監視する。位置検出部は記憶装置の位置を検出する。転送時期決定部は、電力監視部と位置検出部とを利用して、記憶装置が外部電源から電力供給を受ける可能性が所定のレベルよりも高い時間帯と領域とを決定し、現在の時刻がその時間帯に属し、かつ記憶装置の現在の位置がその領域に属する場合、記録装置に対して、記憶装置へのコンテンツの転送を許可する。これらの要素を利用して、上記の制御装置は、記録装置から記憶装置へのコンテンツの転送を、記憶装置が外部電源から電力供給を受けることが可能であると想定される状況に制限する。それにより、コンテンツの転送が電池切れによって中断されることを防ぐことができる。 When the storage device can be driven by both the external power supply and the battery, the control device may further include a power monitoring unit, a position detection unit, and a transfer time determination unit. The power monitoring unit monitors whether the storage device is supplied with power from an external power source. The position detection unit detects the position of the storage device. The transfer time determination unit uses the power monitoring unit and the position detection unit to determine a time zone and a region where the storage device is more likely to receive power supply from an external power source than a predetermined level, and the current time Belongs to the time zone and the current position of the storage device belongs to the area, the recording device is allowed to transfer the content to the storage device. Using these elements, the control device described above restricts the transfer of content from the recording device to the storage device to a situation where it is assumed that the storage device can be supplied with power from an external power source. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the content transfer from being interrupted due to the battery running out.
 本発明の1つの観点による転送装置は、持ち運びが可能で、所望のコンテンツを記録装置から複数の再生装置の少なくとも1台へ転送する装置であり、記憶部、制御部、及び転送部を備えている。記憶部は記録装置から所望のコンテンツを受信して格納する。制御部は、記録装置が所望のコンテンツを記憶部に記録する際に利用すべき符号化形式を決定する。転送部は、制御部によって決定された符号化形式を記録装置に通知して、その符号化形式で符号化された所望のコンテンツを記録装置から記憶部へ転送し、記憶部から複数の再生装置の少なくとも1台へ転送する。制御部は、監視部、符号化形式管理部、履歴管理部、及び決定部を有する。監視部は記憶部の使用状況を監視する。符号化形式管理部は、複数の再生装置のそれぞれによって復号可能な符号化形式を示す情報を管理する。履歴管理部は、複数の再生装置のそれぞれが記憶部からコンテンツを再生する動作、又は転送装置との接続を確立する動作の履歴を管理する。決定部は、記憶部の使用状況と上記の履歴とに基づき、複数の再生装置のそれぞれによって復号可能な符号化形式の中から1つ以上の符号化形式を、記憶部からいずれかの再生装置へのコンテンツの転送に利用される可能性が高い順に、それら1つ以上の符号化形式で所望のコンテンツを符号化して得られるデータの全体が記憶部に記録されるように選択する。決定部は更に、それら1つ以上の符号化形式を、記録装置が記憶部に所望のコンテンツを記録する際に利用すべき符号化形式として決定する。 A transfer device according to one aspect of the present invention is a device that is portable and transfers desired content from a recording device to at least one of a plurality of playback devices, and includes a storage unit, a control unit, and a transfer unit. Yes. The storage unit receives desired content from the recording device and stores it. The control unit determines an encoding format to be used when the recording device records desired content in the storage unit. The transfer unit notifies the recording device of the encoding format determined by the control unit, and transfers the desired content encoded in the encoding format from the recording device to the storage unit. To at least one of the devices. The control unit includes a monitoring unit, an encoding format management unit, a history management unit, and a determination unit. The monitoring unit monitors the usage status of the storage unit. The encoding format management unit manages information indicating an encoding format that can be decoded by each of the plurality of playback devices. The history management unit manages a history of operations in which each of the plurality of reproducing devices reproduces content from the storage unit or establishes a connection with the transfer device. The determining unit selects one or more encoding formats from among the encoding formats that can be decoded by each of the plurality of playback devices based on the usage status of the storage unit and the history, and any playback device from the storage unit. In order of the high possibility of being used for the transfer of content to the Internet, the entire data obtained by encoding the desired content in the one or more encoding formats is selected to be recorded in the storage unit. The determining unit further determines the one or more encoding formats as encoding formats to be used when the recording apparatus records desired content in the storage unit.
 この転送装置は、複数の再生装置のそれぞれによって復号可能な符号化形式の中から1つ以上の符号化形式を、上記の可能性が高い順に選択する。その結果、その転送装置は、記憶部の空き容量が不足する場合でも、コンテンツの符号化形式を適切に選択することができる。 This transfer device selects one or more encoding formats from among the encoding formats that can be decoded by each of the plurality of reproducing devices in the order of the high possibility. As a result, the transfer device can appropriately select the content encoding format even when the storage unit has insufficient free space.
 本発明の1つの観点による記録媒体は、所望のコンテンツを記録装置から複数の再生装置の少なくとも1台へ転送する際に利用される記録媒体であって、以下の領域を備えている:(1)複数の再生装置のそれぞれによって復号可能な符号化形式を示す情報が記録された領域、(2)複数の再生装置のそれぞれがその記録媒体からコンテンツを再生する動作、又はその記録媒体にアクセスする動作の履歴が記録された領域、及び、(3)記録装置によって所望のコンテンツが符号化されて記録された領域。特に、所望のコンテンツの符号化形式は、上記の履歴に基づき、複数の再生装置のそれぞれによって復号可能な符号化形式の中でも、その記録媒体からいずれかの再生装置へのコンテンツの転送に利用される可能性が高い符号化形式である。 A recording medium according to one aspect of the present invention is a recording medium used when transferring desired content from a recording apparatus to at least one of a plurality of reproducing apparatuses, and includes the following areas: (1 ) An area in which information indicating an encoding format decodable by each of a plurality of playback devices is recorded. (2) Each of the playback devices plays back content from the recording medium or accesses the recording medium. An area where an operation history is recorded, and (3) an area where desired content is encoded and recorded by the recording device. In particular, the encoding format of the desired content is used for transferring content from the recording medium to one of the playback devices, among the encoding formats that can be decoded by each of the plurality of playback devices based on the above history. This is an encoding format that is highly likely to be generated.
 この記録媒体を利用することにより、記録装置は、複数の再生装置のそれぞれによって復号可能な符号化形式の中から1つ以上の符号化形式を、上記の可能性が高い順に、それら1つ以上の符号化形式で符号化された所望のコンテンツの全体がその記録媒体に記録されるように選択する。その結果、その記録装置は、その記録媒体の空き容量が不足する場合でも、コンテンツの符号化形式を適切に選択することができる。 By using this recording medium, the recording device can select one or more encoding formats from among the encoding formats that can be decoded by each of the plurality of reproducing devices, in the order of the above-mentioned possibility. The desired content encoded in the encoding format is selected so as to be recorded on the recording medium. As a result, the recording apparatus can appropriately select the content encoding format even when the recording medium has insufficient free space.
 本発明の1つの観点によるコンテンツの符号化形式の決定方法は、複数の再生装置の少なくとも1台が記憶装置から所望のコンテンツを再生することができるように、記録装置がその記憶装置にそのコンテンツを記録する際に利用すべき符号化形式を、制御装置に決定させる方法であって、以下のステップを有する。まず、複数の再生装置のそれぞれによって復号可能な符号化形式を記憶させる。次に、複数の再生装置のそれぞれが記憶装置からコンテンツを再生する動作、又は記憶装置との接続を確立する動作の履歴を取得させる。続いて、記憶装置の使用状況を監視させる。更に、記憶装置の使用状況と上記の履歴とに基づき、複数の再生装置のそれぞれによって復号可能な符号化形式の中から1つ以上の符号化形式を、記憶装置から複数の再生装置のいずれかへのコンテンツの転送に利用される可能性が高い順に、それら1つ以上の符号化形式で所望のコンテンツを符号化して得られるデータの全体が記憶装置に記録されるように選択させ、それら1つ以上の符号化形式を、記録装置が記憶装置に所望のコンテンツを記録する際に利用すべき符号化形式として決定させる。 According to one aspect of the present invention, there is provided a method for determining a content encoding format, in which a recording device stores the content in the storage device so that at least one of the plurality of playback devices can reproduce the desired content from the storage device. Is a method for causing the control device to determine the encoding format to be used when recording the video, and includes the following steps. First, an encoding format that can be decoded by each of a plurality of playback devices is stored. Next, each of the plurality of playback devices acquires a history of an operation of playing back content from the storage device or an operation of establishing a connection with the storage device. Subsequently, the usage status of the storage device is monitored. Furthermore, based on the usage status of the storage device and the above history, one or more encoding formats can be selected from among the encoding formats that can be decoded by each of the plurality of playback devices, and any one of the playback devices from the storage device. In order of the high possibility of being used for the transfer of content to the network, the entire data obtained by encoding the desired content in the one or more encoding formats is selected so as to be recorded in the storage device. One or more encoding formats are determined as encoding formats to be used when the recording device records desired content in the storage device.
 この方法は、複数の再生装置のそれぞれによって復号可能な符号化形式の中から1つ以上の符号化形式を、上記の可能性が高い順に選択する。その結果、記憶装置の空き容量が不足する場合でも、コンテンツの符号化形式を適切に選択することができる。 In this method, one or more encoding formats are selected from the encoding formats that can be decoded by each of a plurality of playback devices in the order of the high possibility. As a result, even if the storage device has insufficient free space, the content encoding format can be selected appropriately.
 本発明はコンテンツの記録再生技術に関し、上記のとおり、複数の再生装置のそれぞれによって復号可能な符号化形式の中から1つ以上の符号化形式を選択する。このように、本発明は明らかに産業上利用可能である。 The present invention relates to a content recording / reproducing technique, and as described above, one or more encoding formats are selected from encoding formats decodable by each of a plurality of reproducing apparatuses. Thus, the present invention is clearly industrially applicable.
 110  記録装置
 120  転送装置
 131  再生装置A
 132  再生装置B
 301  制御部
 302  I/F部
 303  操作部
 304  I/Oポート
 305  記憶部
 306  通信部
 311  接続管理部
 312  転送部
 313  符号化形式選択部
 MCD  メモリ装置
110 Recording device 120 Transfer device 131 Playback device A
132 Playback device B
301 Control unit 302 I / F unit 303 Operation unit 304 I / O port 305 Storage unit 306 Communication unit 311 Connection management unit 312 Transfer unit 313 Encoding format selection unit MCD memory device

Claims (10)

  1.  複数の再生装置の少なくとも1台が記憶装置から所望のコンテンツを再生することができるように、記録装置が前記記憶装置に前記所望のコンテンツを記録する際に利用すべき符号化形式を決定する制御装置であって、
     前記記憶装置の使用状況を監視する監視部、
     前記複数の再生装置のそれぞれによって復号可能な符号化形式を示す情報を管理する符号化形式管理部、
     前記複数の再生装置のそれぞれが前記記憶装置からコンテンツを再生する動作、又は前記記憶装置との接続を確立する動作の履歴を管理する履歴管理部、及び、
     前記記憶装置の使用状況と前記履歴とに基づき、前記復号可能な符号化形式から1つ以上の符号化形式を、前記記憶装置から前記複数の再生装置のいずれかへのコンテンツの転送に利用される可能性が高い順に、前記1つ以上の符号化形式で前記所望のコンテンツを符号化することによって得られるデータの全体が前記記憶装置に記録されるように選択し、前記1つ以上の符号化形式を、前記記録装置が前記記憶装置に前記所望のコンテンツを記録する際に利用すべき符号化形式として決定する決定部、
    を備えた制御装置。
    Control for determining a coding format to be used when the recording device records the desired content in the storage device so that at least one of the plurality of playback devices can reproduce the desired content from the storage device A device,
    A monitoring unit for monitoring the usage status of the storage device;
    An encoding format management unit that manages information indicating an encoding format that can be decoded by each of the plurality of playback devices;
    A history management unit that manages a history of an operation in which each of the plurality of reproduction devices reproduces content from the storage device or an operation to establish a connection with the storage device; and
    Based on the usage status of the storage device and the history, one or more encoding formats from the decodable encoding format are used for transferring content from the storage device to any of the plurality of playback devices. In order from the highest possibility, the entire data obtained by encoding the desired content in the one or more encoding formats is selected to be recorded in the storage device, and the one or more codes A determination unit that determines an encoding format as an encoding format to be used when the recording device records the desired content in the storage device;
    A control device comprising:
  2.  前記決定部は、前記履歴に基づき、前記復号可能な符号化形式のそれぞれについて、前記記憶装置から前記複数の再生装置のいずれかへのコンテンツの転送に利用された頻度を算定し、前記頻度が高い順に前記可能性が高いとみなす
    ことを特徴とする、請求項1に記載の制御装置。
    The determining unit calculates, based on the history, a frequency used for transferring content from the storage device to one of the plurality of playback devices for each of the decodable encoding formats, and the frequency is The control device according to claim 1, wherein the possibility is considered to be higher in descending order.
  3.  前記履歴管理部は、前記複数の再生装置のそれぞれが前記記憶装置からコンテンツを再生する動作、又は前記記憶装置との接続を確立する動作の頻度を算定し、
     前記決定部は、前記頻度の高い再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式を、前記可能性が高い符号化形式とみなす
    ことを特徴とする、請求項1に記載の制御装置。
    The history management unit calculates the frequency of an operation for each of the plurality of playback devices to play back content from the storage device, or an operation to establish a connection with the storage device,
    The control device according to claim 1, wherein the determination unit regards an encoding format that can be decoded by the high-frequency playback device as an encoding format having the high possibility.
  4.  前記監視部は前記記憶装置の使用領域のサイズを所定の閾値と比較し、
     前記履歴管理部は、前記複数の再生装置のそれぞれが前記記憶装置からコンテンツを再生する動作、又は前記記憶装置との接続を確立する動作の頻度を算定し、
     前記決定部は、前記使用領域のサイズが前記閾値を超えている場合、前記複数の再生装置の中から1台以上の再生装置を、前記頻度の高い順に転送先の再生装置として選択し、前記1つ以上の符号化形式の候補を、前記転送先の再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式に制限する
    ことを特徴とする、請求項1に記載の制御装置。
    The monitoring unit compares the size of the used area of the storage device with a predetermined threshold,
    The history management unit calculates the frequency of an operation for each of the plurality of playback devices to play back content from the storage device, or an operation to establish a connection with the storage device,
    When the size of the used area exceeds the threshold, the determination unit selects one or more playback devices from the plurality of playback devices as a transfer destination playback device in order of the frequency, and The control apparatus according to claim 1, wherein one or more encoding format candidates are limited to an encoding format that can be decoded by the reproduction apparatus at the transfer destination.
  5.  前記決定部は、前記使用領域のサイズが前記閾値未満である場合、前記複数の再生装置の中から、前記記憶装置との接続を確立する動作の頻度が所定値を超えている再生装置を選択し、前記1つ以上の符号化形式の候補を、選択された再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式に制限する
    ことを特徴とする、請求項4に記載の制御装置。
    When the size of the used area is less than the threshold value, the determination unit selects a playback device that has an operation frequency of establishing a connection with the storage device from the plurality of playback devices that exceeds a predetermined value. The control device according to claim 4, wherein the one or more encoding format candidates are limited to an encoding format that can be decoded by the selected playback device.
  6.  前記所望のコンテンツが、前記記録装置によって予約録画されるべき放送番組であり、
     前記制御装置が、
     前記記録装置による予約録画に関する情報を管理する録画予約管理部、及び、
     前記復号可能な符号化形式と前記予約録画に関する情報とから、前記所望のコンテンツを特定の符号化形式で符号化することによって得られるデータ量を予測するデータ量予測部、
    を更に備え、
     前記決定部は、前記転送先の再生装置によって復号可能な符号化形式で前記所望のコンテンツを符号化することによって得られるデータ量を前記データ量予測部に予測させ、予測値が前記記憶装置の空き容量を超えないように、前記転送先の再生装置の台数を制限する
    ことを特徴とする、請求項4に記載の制御装置。
    The desired content is a broadcast program to be reserved and recorded by the recording device;
    The control device is
    A recording reservation management unit for managing information related to reserved recording by the recording device; and
    A data amount prediction unit that predicts a data amount obtained by encoding the desired content in a specific encoding format from the decodable encoding format and the information related to the reserved recording;
    Further comprising
    The determination unit causes the data amount prediction unit to predict a data amount obtained by encoding the desired content in an encoding format that can be decoded by the transfer destination playback device, and a predicted value is stored in the storage device. The control device according to claim 4, wherein the number of transfer destination playback devices is limited so as not to exceed a free capacity.
  7.  前記記憶装置を外部電源と電池との両方で駆動することが可能であり、
     前記記憶装置が外部電源から電力供給を受けているか否かを監視する電力監視部、
     前記記憶装置の位置を検出する位置検出部、及び、
     前記電力監視部と前記位置検出部とを利用して、前記記憶装置が外部電源から電力供給を受ける可能性が所定のレベルよりも高い時間帯と領域とを決定し、現在の時刻が前記時間帯に属し、かつ前記記憶装置の現在の位置が前記領域に属する場合、前記記録装置に対して、前記記憶装置への前記所望のコンテンツの転送を許可する転送時期決定部、
    を更に備えた、請求項1に記載の制御装置。
    The storage device can be driven by both an external power source and a battery,
    A power monitoring unit for monitoring whether the storage device is supplied with power from an external power source;
    A position detector for detecting the position of the storage device; and
    Using the power monitoring unit and the position detection unit, a time zone and a region in which the storage device is likely to receive power supply from an external power source is higher than a predetermined level, and the current time is the time A transfer time determination unit that permits the recording device to transfer the desired content to the storage device when the storage device belongs to a zone and the current position of the storage device belongs to the area;
    The control device according to claim 1, further comprising:
  8.  持ち運びが可能で、所望のコンテンツを記録装置から複数の再生装置の少なくとも1台へ転送する転送装置であって、
     前記記録装置から前記所望のコンテンツを受信して格納する記憶部、
     前記記録装置が前記所望のコンテンツを前記記憶部に記録する際に利用すべき符号化形式を決定する制御部、及び、
     前記制御部によって決定された符号化形式を前記記録装置に通知して、前記符号化形式で符号化された前記所望のコンテンツを前記記録装置から前記記憶部へ転送し、前記記憶部から前記複数の再生装置の少なくとも1台へ転送する転送部、
    を備え、
     前記制御部は、
     前記記憶部の使用状況を監視する監視部、
     前記複数の再生装置のそれぞれによって復号可能な符号化形式を示す情報を管理する符号化形式管理部、
     前記複数の再生装置のそれぞれが前記記憶部からコンテンツを再生する動作、又は前記転送装置との接続を確立する動作の履歴を管理する履歴管理部、及び、
     前記記憶部の使用状況と前記履歴とに基づき、前記復号可能な符号化形式の中から1つ以上の符号化形式を、前記記憶部から前記複数の再生装置のいずれかへのコンテンツの転送に利用される可能性が高い順に、前記1つ以上の符号化形式で前記所望のコンテンツを符号化することによって得られるデータの全体が前記記憶部に記録されるように選択し、前記1つ以上の符号化形式を、前記記録装置が前記記憶部に前記所望のコンテンツを記録する際に利用すべき符号化形式として決定する決定部、
    を有する転送装置。
    A transfer device that is portable and transfers desired content from a recording device to at least one of a plurality of playback devices,
    A storage unit for receiving and storing the desired content from the recording device;
    A control unit that determines an encoding format to be used when the recording device records the desired content in the storage unit; and
    Notifying the recording device of the encoding format determined by the control unit, transferring the desired content encoded in the encoding format from the recording device to the storage unit, A transfer unit for transferring to at least one of the playback devices;
    With
    The controller is
    A monitoring unit for monitoring the usage status of the storage unit;
    An encoding format management unit that manages information indicating an encoding format that can be decoded by each of the plurality of playback devices;
    A history management unit that manages a history of an operation in which each of the plurality of reproduction devices reproduces content from the storage unit or an operation to establish a connection with the transfer device; and
    Based on the usage status of the storage unit and the history, one or more encoding formats from among the decodable encoding formats are transferred from the storage unit to any of the plurality of playback devices. In order from the highest possibility of being used, the entire data obtained by encoding the desired content in the one or more encoding formats is selected to be recorded in the storage unit, and the one or more are selected. A determination unit that determines the encoding format to be used when the recording device records the desired content in the storage unit;
    A transfer device.
  9.  所望のコンテンツを記録装置から複数の再生装置の少なくとも1台へ転送する際に利用される記録媒体であって、
     前記複数の再生装置のそれぞれによって復号可能な符号化形式を示す情報が記録された領域、
     前記複数の再生装置のそれぞれが前記記録媒体からコンテンツを再生する動作、又は前記記録媒体にアクセスする動作の履歴が記録された領域、及び、
     前記記録装置によって前記所望のコンテンツが符号化されて記録された領域、
    を備え、
     前記所望のコンテンツの符号化形式が、前記履歴に基づき、前記復号可能な符号化形式の中でも、前記記録媒体から前記複数の再生装置のいずれかへのコンテンツの転送に利用される可能性が高い符号化形式である
    ことを特徴とする記録媒体。
    A recording medium used when transferring desired content from a recording device to at least one of a plurality of playback devices,
    An area in which information indicating an encoding format that can be decoded by each of the plurality of playback devices is recorded,
    An area in which a history of an operation of reproducing content from the recording medium or an operation of accessing the recording medium is recorded by each of the plurality of reproducing devices; and
    An area where the desired content is encoded and recorded by the recording device;
    With
    The encoding format of the desired content is highly likely to be used for transferring content from the recording medium to any of the plurality of playback devices, among the encoding formats that can be decoded based on the history. A recording medium characterized by being in an encoding format.
  10.  複数の再生装置の少なくとも1台が記憶装置から所望のコンテンツを再生することができるように、記録装置が前記記憶装置に前記所望のコンテンツを記録する際に利用すべき符号化形式を、制御装置に決定させる方法であって、
     前記複数の再生装置のそれぞれによって復号可能な符号化形式を記憶させるステップ、
     前記複数の再生装置のそれぞれが前記記憶装置からコンテンツを再生する動作、又は前記記憶装置との接続を確立する動作の履歴を取得させるステップ、
     前記記憶装置の使用状況を監視させるステップ、及び、
     前記記憶装置の使用状況と前記履歴とに基づき、前記復号可能な符号化形式の中から1つ以上の符号化形式を、前記記憶装置から前記複数の再生装置のいずれかへのコンテンツの転送に利用される可能性が高い順に、前記1つ以上の符号化形式で前記所望のコンテンツを符号化することによって得られるデータの全体が前記記憶装置に記録されるように選択させ、前記1つ以上の符号化形式を、前記記録装置が前記記憶装置に前記所望のコンテンツを記録する際に利用すべき符号化形式として決定させるステップ、
    を有する方法。
    The control device uses an encoding format to be used when the recording device records the desired content in the storage device so that at least one of the plurality of playback devices can reproduce the desired content from the storage device. A method to determine
    Storing an encoding format that can be decoded by each of the plurality of playback devices;
    Obtaining a history of operations in which each of the plurality of reproduction devices reproduces content from the storage device or establishes a connection with the storage device;
    Monitoring the usage status of the storage device; and
    Based on the usage status of the storage device and the history, one or more encoding formats out of the decodable encoding formats are transferred from the storage device to one of the plurality of playback devices. Selecting one or more of the data obtained by encoding the desired content in the one or more encoding formats in order of the possibility of being used, so that the data is recorded in the storage device; Determining the encoding format to be used when the recording device records the desired content in the storage device;
    Having a method.
PCT/JP2012/004308 2011-07-26 2012-07-03 Control device, transfer device, recording medium, and content encoding format determination method WO2013014864A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2011162731A JP2014197721A (en) 2011-07-26 2011-07-26 Content control device
JP2011-162731 2011-07-26

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2013014864A1 true WO2013014864A1 (en) 2013-01-31

Family

ID=47600742

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2012/004308 WO2013014864A1 (en) 2011-07-26 2012-07-03 Control device, transfer device, recording medium, and content encoding format determination method

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JP2014197721A (en)
WO (1) WO2013014864A1 (en)

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2014152050A1 (en) * 2013-03-15 2014-09-25 General Instrument Corporation System and method for optimizing storage and transcoding costs in network dvr
US9124905B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2015-09-01 Arris Technology, Inc. System and method for optimizing storage and transcoding costs in network DVR
WO2016013088A1 (en) * 2014-07-24 2016-01-28 日立マクセル株式会社 Content storage control apparatus, content storage control method, and content transmission/reception system
US9374604B2 (en) 2014-03-31 2016-06-21 Arris Enterprises, Inc. Adaptive streaming transcoder synchronization
US10027993B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2018-07-17 Arris Enterprises Llc System and method for multiscreen network digital video recording using on-demand transcoding

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2005328324A (en) * 2004-05-14 2005-11-24 Hitachi Ltd Digital data storage device
JP2006115244A (en) * 2004-10-15 2006-04-27 Hitachi Ltd Video encoding system, method, and device
WO2007007716A1 (en) * 2005-07-12 2007-01-18 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Contents server apparatus, contents transferring apparatus and contents reproducing apparatus
JP2007312140A (en) * 2006-05-18 2007-11-29 Sony Corp Display device, recording and reproducing unit, and content transfer system, and transfer method
JP2007334654A (en) * 2006-06-15 2007-12-27 Sony Corp Data transfer system, data reading device, data writing device, function notification method, data writing method, function notification program and data writing program
WO2008096437A1 (en) * 2007-02-08 2008-08-14 Pioneer Corporation Information recording device, information recording method, information recording program and computer readable recording medium
JP2009188690A (en) * 2008-02-06 2009-08-20 Hitachi Ltd Content distribution device

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2005328324A (en) * 2004-05-14 2005-11-24 Hitachi Ltd Digital data storage device
JP2006115244A (en) * 2004-10-15 2006-04-27 Hitachi Ltd Video encoding system, method, and device
WO2007007716A1 (en) * 2005-07-12 2007-01-18 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Contents server apparatus, contents transferring apparatus and contents reproducing apparatus
JP2007312140A (en) * 2006-05-18 2007-11-29 Sony Corp Display device, recording and reproducing unit, and content transfer system, and transfer method
JP2007334654A (en) * 2006-06-15 2007-12-27 Sony Corp Data transfer system, data reading device, data writing device, function notification method, data writing method, function notification program and data writing program
WO2008096437A1 (en) * 2007-02-08 2008-08-14 Pioneer Corporation Information recording device, information recording method, information recording program and computer readable recording medium
JP2009188690A (en) * 2008-02-06 2009-08-20 Hitachi Ltd Content distribution device

Cited By (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2014152050A1 (en) * 2013-03-15 2014-09-25 General Instrument Corporation System and method for optimizing storage and transcoding costs in network dvr
US9124905B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2015-09-01 Arris Technology, Inc. System and method for optimizing storage and transcoding costs in network DVR
US9591363B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-03-07 Arris Enterprises, Inc. System and method for optimizing storage and transcoding costs in network DVR
US10027993B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2018-07-17 Arris Enterprises Llc System and method for multiscreen network digital video recording using on-demand transcoding
US10382798B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2019-08-13 Arris Enterprises Llc System and method for multiscreen network digital video recording using on-demand transcoding
USRE49109E1 (en) 2013-03-15 2022-06-14 Arris Enterprises Llc System and method for multiscreen network digital video recording using on-demand transcoding
US9374604B2 (en) 2014-03-31 2016-06-21 Arris Enterprises, Inc. Adaptive streaming transcoder synchronization
US9414100B2 (en) 2014-03-31 2016-08-09 Arris Enterprises, Inc. Adaptive streaming transcoder synchronization
US9668007B2 (en) 2014-03-31 2017-05-30 Arris Enterprises Llc Adaptive streaming transcoder synchronization
WO2016013088A1 (en) * 2014-07-24 2016-01-28 日立マクセル株式会社 Content storage control apparatus, content storage control method, and content transmission/reception system

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2014197721A (en) 2014-10-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP5818412B2 (en) Content providing method and apparatus via network, content receiving method and apparatus, data backup method and apparatus via network, backup data providing apparatus and backup system
WO2013014864A1 (en) Control device, transfer device, recording medium, and content encoding format determination method
JP2013175854A (en) Video recording device and video reproducing system
KR20150022532A (en) Method for reproducing a content, terminal thereof, and system thereof
JP5969569B2 (en) Content providing method and apparatus via network, content receiving method and apparatus, data backup method and apparatus via network, backup data providing apparatus and backup system
WO2013189334A1 (en) Method and system for continuously playing media resources in device
JP4114080B2 (en) Recording system, recording method, and recording apparatus
US7962666B2 (en) Transfer apparatus, transfer system, program, and transfer method
JP5338383B2 (en) Content playback system
KR101671388B1 (en) Method and apparatus for storing back-up data through network, apparatus for providing back-up data, and back-up system
US20090037472A1 (en) Information processing apparatus and control method for information processing apparatus
JP4544353B2 (en) Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program
JP2010263532A (en) Content recording and playback system
JP2012113695A (en) Client device, information processing method, and information processing system
CN102195967A (en) Content output apparatus, content playback system, content output method, and program
JP2012039223A (en) Video recording system, video recorder, control device, and video recording control method
JP5094168B2 (en) Content reproduction apparatus and video display system
JP4123240B2 (en) Network system, and use side device and possession side device included in the system
JP4311188B2 (en) Data recording apparatus, data transfer method, data transfer program and recording medium, and data transfer system
JP2009169460A (en) Automated content copying system
JP2007179215A (en) Content server device
JP2008311794A (en) Recording control unit, recording control method, program, and data structure
JP2014123918A (en) Reproduction apparatus, reproduction system, and process execution control method
JP5162970B2 (en) REPRODUCTION CONTROL DEVICE, REPRODUCTION CONTROL METHOD, PROGRAM, AND DATA STRUCTURE
JP2010103936A (en) Broadcast receiving apparatus and method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 12817179

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 12817179

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP